Manual Danfoss

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE
Design Guide
VLT® HVAC Drive FC 102
1.1–90 kW
www.danfoss.com/drives
Contents Design Guide
Contents
1 How to Read this Design Guide 7
2 Introduction to VLT® HVAC Drive 12

2.1 Safety 12
2.2 CE Labeling 13
2.3 Air humidity 14
2.4 Aggressive Environments 14
2.5 Vibration and Shock 15
2.6 Safe Torque Off 15
2.7 Advantages 22
2.8 Control Structures 36
2.9 General Aspects of EMC 46
2.10 Galvanic Isolation (PELV) 51
2.11 Ground Leakage Current 52
2.12 Brake Function 53
2.13 Extreme Running Conditions 55
3 Selection 58
3.1 Options and Accessories 58
3.1.1 Mounting Option Modules in Slot B 58
3.1.2 General Purpose I/O Module MCB 101 59
3.1.3 Digital Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4 60
3.1.4 Analog Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12 60
3.1.5 Digital Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7 60
3.1.6 Analog Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8 60
3.1.7 Relay Option MCB 105 61
3.1.8 24 V Backup Option MCB 107 (Option D) 63
3.1.9 Analog I/O option MCB 109 64
3.1.10 PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 66
3.1.11 Sensor Input Option MCB 114 67
3.1.11.1 Ordering Code Numbers and Parts Delivered 68
3.1.11.2 Electrical and Mechanical Specifications 68
3.1.11.3 Electrical Wiring 69
3.1.12 Remote Mounting Kit for LCP 69
3.1.13 IP21/IP41/ TYPE1 Enclosure Kit 70
3.1.14 IP21/Type 1 Enclosure Kit 70
3.1.15 Output Filters 72
MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved.

4 How to Order 73
4.1 Ordering Form 73
4.2 Ordering Numbers 75
5 Mechanical Installation 85
5.1 Mechanical Installation 85
5.1.1 Safety Requirements of Mechanical Installation 85
5.1.2 Mechanical Dimensions 86
5.1.3 Accessory Bags 89
5.1.4 Mechanical Mounting 90
5.1.5 Field Mounting 91
6 Electrical Installation 92
6.1 Connections - Enclosure Types A, B
and C 92
6.1.1 Torque 92
6.1.2 Removal of Knockouts for Extra Cables 94
6.1.3 Connection to Line and Grounding 94
6.1.4 Motor Connection 97
6.1.5 Relay Connection 104
6.2 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 105
6.2.1 Fuses 105
6.2.2 Recommendations 105
6.2.3 CE Compliance 105
6.2.4 Fuse Tables 106
6.3 Disconnectors and Contactors 114
6.4 Additional Motor Information 115
6.4.1 Motor Cable 115
6.4.2 Motor Thermal Protection 115
6.4.3 Parallel Connection of Motors 116
6.4.4 Direction of Motor Rotation 118
6.4.5 Motor Insulation 119
6.4.6 Motor Bearing Currents 119
6.5 Control Cables and Terminals 120
6.5.1 Access to Control Terminals 120
6.5.2 Control Cable Routing 120
6.5.3 Control Terminals 121
6.5.4 Switches S201, S202, and S801 122
6.5.5 Electrical Installation, Control Terminals 122
Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

6.5.6 Basic Wiring Example 123

6.5.7 Electrical Installation, Control Cables 124
6.5.8 Relay Output 125
6.6 Additional Connections 126
6.6.1 DC Bus Connection 126
6.6.2 Load Sharing 126
6.6.3 Installation of Brake Cable 126
6.6.4 How to Connect a PC to the Adjustable Frequency Drive 126
6.6.5 PC Software 127
6.6.6 MCT 31 127
6.7 Safety 127
6.7.1 High Voltage Test 127
6.7.2 Grounding 127
6.7.3 Safety Ground Connection 128
6.7.4 ADN-compliant Installation 128
6.8 EMC-compatible Installation 129
6.8.1 Electrical Installation - EMC Precautions 129
6.8.2 Use of EMC-Compatible Cables 131
6.8.3 Grounding of Shielded Control Cables 132
6.8.4 RFI Switch 133
6.9 Residual Current Device 133
6.10 Final Set-up and Test 133
7 Application Examples 135

7.1 Application Examples 135
7.1.1 Start/Stop 135
7.1.2 Pulse Start/Stop 135
7.1.3 Potentiometer Reference 136
7.1.4 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 136
7.1.5 Smart Logic Control 136
7.1.6 Smart Logic Control Programming 137
7.1.7 SLC Application Example 138
7.1.8 Cascade Controller 140
7.1.9 Pump Staging with Lead Pump Alternation 141
7.1.10 System Status and Operation 141
7.1.11 Fixed Variable-speed Pump Wiring Diagram 141
7.1.12 Lead Pump Alternation Wiring Diagram 142
7.1.13 Cascade Controller Wiring Diagram 143
7.1.14 Start/Stop Conditions 144

8 Installation and Set-up 145

8.1 Installation and Set-up 145
8.2 Adjustable Frequency Protocol Overview 147
8.3 Network Configuration 148
8.4 FC Protocol Message Framing Structure 148
8.4.1 Content of a Character (byte) 148
8.4.2 Message Structure 148
8.4.3 Message Length (LGE) 148
8.4.4 Adjustable Frequency Drive Address (ADR) 149
8.4.5 Data Control Byte (BCC) 149
8.4.6 The Data Field 150
8.4.7 The PKE Field 151
8.4.8 Parameter Number (PNU) 151
8.4.9 Index (IND) 151
8.4.10 Parameter Value (PWE) 152
8.4.11 Data Types Supported by the Adjustable Frequency Drive 152
8.4.12 Conversion 152
8.4.13 Process Words (PCD) 153
8.5 Examples 153
8.5.1 Writing a Parameter Value 153
8.5.2 Reading a Parameter Value 153
8.6 Modbus RTU Overview 154
8.6.1 Assumptions 154
8.6.2 What the User Should Already Know 154
8.6.3 Modbus RTU Overview 154
8.6.4 Adjustable Frequency Drive with Modbus RTU 154
8.7 Network Configuration 155
8.8 Modbus RTU Message Framing Structure 155
8.8.1 Adjustable Frequency Drive with Modbus RTU 155
8.8.2 Modbus RTU Message Structure 155
8.8.3 Start/Stop Field 155
8.8.4 Address Field 156
8.8.5 Function Field 156
8.8.6 Data Field 156
8.8.7 CRC Check Field 156
8.8.8 Coil Register Addressing 156
8.8.9 How to Control the Adjustable Frequency Drive 158

8.8.10 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU 158

8.8.11 Modbus Exception Codes 158
8.9 How to Access Parameters 159
8.9.1 Parameter Handling 159
8.9.2 Storage of Data 159
8.9.3 IND 159
8.9.4 Text Blocks 159
8.9.5 Conversion Factor 159
8.9.6 Parameter Values 159
8.10 Examples 159
8.10.1 Read Coil Status (01 HEX) 159
8.10.2 Force/Write Single Coil (05 HEX) 160
8.10.3 Force/Write Multiple Coils (0F HEX) 161
8.10.4 Read Holding Registers (03 HEX) 161
8.10.5 Preset Single Register (06 HEX) 162
8.10.6 Preset Multiple Registers (10 HEX) 162
8.11 Danfoss FC Control Profile 163
8.11.1 Control Word According to FC Profile (8-10 Control Profile = FC profile) 163
8.11.2 Status Word According to FC Profile (STW) (8-10 Control Profile = FC pro-
file) 164
8.11.3 Bus Speed Reference Value 165
9 General Specifications and Troubleshooting 166

9.1 Line Power Supply Tables 166
9.2 General Specifications 176
9.3 Efficiency 181
9.4 Acoustic noise 182
9.5 Peak voltage on motor 182
9.6 Special Conditions 186
9.6.1 Purpose of Derating 186
9.6.2 Derating for Ambient Temperature 186
9.6.3 Derating for Ambient Temperature, Enclosure Type A 186
9.6.4 Derating for Ambient Temperature, Enclosure Type B 187
9.6.5 Derating for Ambient Temperature, Enclosure Type C 189
9.6.6 Automatic Adaptations to Ensure Performance 190
9.6.7 Derating for Low Air Pressure 191
9.6.8 Derating for Running at Low Speed 191
9.7 Troubleshooting 192
9.7.1 Alarm Words 196

9.7.2 Warning Words 197

9.7.3 Extended Status Words 198
Index 206

How to Read this Design Gui... Design Guide
1 1
1 How to Read this Design Guide
VLT® HVAC Drive In no event shall Danfoss be liable for direct, indirect,
special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of
FC 102 Series the use, or the inability to use information contained in
this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such
damages. In particular, Danfoss is not responsible for any
costs, including but not limited to those incurred as a
result of lost profits or revenue, loss or damage of
equipment, loss of computer programs, loss of data, the
costs to substitute these, or any claims by third parties.
This guide can be used with all Danfoss reserves the right to revise this publication at any
VLT® HVAC Drive adjustable time and to make changes to its contents without prior
notice or any obligation to notify former or present users
frequency drives with software of such revisions or changes.
version 3.9x.
The actual software version • Design Guide contains all the technical
information about the adjustable frequency drive
number can be read from and customer design and applications.
15-43 Software Version. • The Programming Guide provides information on

how to program and includes complete
Table 1.1 Software Version parameter descriptions.
This publication contains information proprietary to

• Application Note, Temperature Derating Guide.
Danfoss. By accepting and using this manual, the user • MCT 10 Set-up Software Instruction Manual enables
agrees that the information contained herein will be used the user to configure the adjustable frequency
solely for operating equipment from Danfoss or equipment drive from a Windows™-based PC environment.
from other vendors provided that such equipment is
• Danfoss VLT® Energy Box software at
intended for communication with Danfoss equipment over www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions
a serial communication link. This publication is protected then choose PC Software Download.
under the copyright laws of Denmark and most other
countries. • VLT® HVAC Drive BACnet, Instruction Manual.
• VLT® HVAC Drive Metasys, Instruction Manual.

Danfoss does not warrant that a software program
produced according to the guidelines provided in this
• VLT® HVAC Drive FLN, Instruction Manual.
manual will function properly in every physical, hardware Danfoss technical literature is available in print from local
or software environment. Danfoss Sales Offices or online at:
www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Documen-
Although Danfoss has tested and reviewed the documen- tations/Technical+Documentation.htm
tation within this manual, Danfoss makes no warranty or
representation, neither expressed nor implied, with respect
to this documentation, including its quality, performance,
or fitness for a particular purpose.
MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 7

1 1
Alternating current AC
American wire gauge AWG
Ampere/AMP A
Automatic Motor Adaptation AMA
Current limit ILIM
Degrees Celsius °C
Direct current DC
Drive Dependent D-TYPE
Table 1.2 Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC
Electronic Thermal Relay ETR
The adjustable frequency drive complies with UL508C Adjustable frequency drive FC
thermal memory retention requirements. For more Gram g
information, refer to chapter 6.4.2 Motor Thermal Protection. Hertz Hz
The following symbols are used in this document. Horsepower hp
Kilohertz kHz
WARNING Local Control Panel

Meter
LCP
m
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
Millihenry Inductance mH
result in death or serious injury.
Milliampere mA
Millisecond ms
CAUTION Minute min
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could Motion Control Tool MCT
result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used Nanofarad nF
to alert against unsafe practices. Newton Meters Nm
Nominal motor current IM,N
NOTICE! Nominal motor frequency fM,N

Nominal motor power PM,N
Indicates important information, including situations that
Nominal motor voltage UM,N
may result in damage to equipment or property.
Permanent Magnet motor PM motor
Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV
Printed Circuit Board PCB
Rated Inverter Output Current IINV
Revolutions Per Minute RPM
Regenerative terminals Regen
Second s
Synchronous Motor Speed ns
Torque limit TLIM
Volts V
The maximum output current IVLT,MAX
The rated output current supplied by the IVLT,N
adjustable frequency drive
Table 1.3 Abbreviations
8 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

1 1
1.1.1 Definitions TM,N
The rated torque (motor).
Adjustable Frequency Drive: UM
The instantaneous motor voltage.
IVLT,MAX
UM,N
The maximum output current.
The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
IVLT,N
Break-away torque
The rated output current supplied by the adjustable Torque
frequency drive.
175ZA078.10
Pull-out
UVLT, MAX
The maximum output voltage.
Input:
Control command Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset

Start and stop the and Coasting stop, Quick
connected motor with stop, DC braking, Stop and
the LCP or the digital the "Off" key
inputs. Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing,
Functions are divided Start reversing, Jog and
into two groups. Freeze output
Functions in group 1 rpm
have higher priority
Figure 1.1 Break-away Torque
than functions in
group 2.
Table 1.4 Function Groups ηVLT

The efficiency of the adjustable frequency drive is defined
Motor: as the ratio between the power output and the power
input.
fJOG Start-disable command
The motor frequency when the jog function is activated A stop command belonging to the group 1 control
(via digital terminals). commands - see Table 1.4.
fM Stop command
The motor frequency. See Control commands.
fMAX References:
The maximum motor frequency.
fMIN Analog Reference
The minimum motor frequency. A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be
voltage or current.
fM,N
The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
Bus Reference
IM A signal transmitted to the serial communication port (FC
The motor current. port).
IM,N Preset Reference
The rated motor current (nameplate data). A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100%
nM,N of the reference range. Selection of eight preset references
The rated motor speed (nameplate data). via the digital terminals.
PM,N Pulse Reference
The rated motor power (nameplate data). A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
(terminal 29 or 33).

1 1
RefMAX GLCP
Determines the relationship between the reference input Graphical Local Control Panel (LCP102).
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the Initializing
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in If initialization is carried out (14-22 Operation Mode), the
3-03 Maximum Reference. programmable parameters of the adjustable frequency
RefMIN drive return to their default settings.
Determines the relationship between the reference input Intermittent Duty Cycle
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
reference. The minimum reference value set in cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
3-02 Minimum Reference period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-
Miscellaneous: periodic duty.
LCP
Advanced Vector Control The Local Control Panel makes up a complete interface for
Analog Inputs control and programming of the adjustable frequency
The analog inputs are used for controlling various drive. The LCP is detachable and can be installed up to
functions of the adjustable frequency drive. 10 ft [3 m] from the adjustable frequency drive, i.e., in a
There are two types of analog inputs: front panel by means of the installation kit option.
Current input, 0–20 mA and 4–20 mA The LCP is available in two versions:
Voltage input, 0–10 V DC.
• Numerical LCP101 (NLCP)
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0–20 mA, • Graphical LCP102 (GLCP)
4–20 mA, or a digital signal. lsb
Least significant bit.
Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA
AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for MCM
the connected motor at standstill. Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for
cable cross-section. 1 MCM ≡ 0.00078 in2 [0.5067 mm2].
Brake Resistor
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the msb
braking energy generated in regenerative braking. This Most significant bit.
regenerative braking energy increases the intermediate NLCP
circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the Numerical Local Control Panel LCP 101.
power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
Online/Offline Parameters
CT Characteristics Changes to online parameters are activated immediately
Constant torque characteristics used for screw and scroll after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate
refrigeration compressors. changes to offline parameters.
Digital Inputs PID Controller
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various The PID controller maintains the desired speed, pressure,
functions of the adjustable frequency drive. temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency to
Digital Outputs match the varying load.
The adjustable frequency drive features two solid state RCD
outputs that can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal. Residual Current Device.
DSP Set-up
Digital Signal Processor. Save parameter settings in four set-ups. Change between
Relay Outputs the two parameter set-ups and edit one set-up, while
The adjustable frequency drive features two programmable another set-up is active.
relay outputs. SFAVM
ETR Switching pattern called Stator Flux-oriented Asynchronous
Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation Vector Modulation (14-00 Switching Pattern).
based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
the motor temperature.

1 1
Slip Compensation 1.1.2 Power Factor
The adjustable frequency drive compensates for the motor
slip by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
measured motor load, keeping the motor speed almost
constant. 3 × U × I 1 × COSϕ
Power factor =
3 × U × IRMS
Smart Logic Control (SLC) The power factor for 3-phase control:
The SLC is a sequence of user-defined actions executed
when the associated user-defined events are evaluated as I1 × cosϕ1 I1
= = since cosϕ1 = 1
IRMS IRMS
true by the SLC.
The power factor indicates to which extent the adjustable
Thermistor frequency drive imposes a load on the line power supply.
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
temperature is to be monitored (adjustable frequency drive same kW performance.
or motor).
Trip IRMS = I2 2 2 I2
1 + I5 + I7 + . . +
n
A state entered in fault situations, e.g., if the adjustable
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different
frequency drive is subject to an overtemperature or when
harmonic currents are low.
the adjustable frequency drive is protecting the motor,
The adjustable frequency drive's built-in DC coils produce a
process or mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause
high power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on
of the fault has disappeared and the trip state is canceled
the line power supply.
by activating reset or, in some cases, by being
programmed to reset automatically. Trip may not be used
for personal safety.
Trip Locked
A state entered in fault situations when the adjustable
frequency drive is protecting itself and requiring physical
intervention, e.g., if the adjustable frequency drive is
subject to a short circuit on the output. A locked trip can
only be canceled by cutting off line power, removing the
cause of the fault, and reconnecting the adjustable
frequency drive. Restart is prevented until the trip state is
canceled by activating reset or, in some cases, by being
programmed to reset automatically. The trip-lock function
may not be used as a personal safety measure.
VT Characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
VVCplus
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
Voltage Vector Control (VVCplus) improves the dynamics
and the stability, both when the speed reference is
changed and in relation to the load torque.
60° AVM
Switching pattern called 60° Asynchronous Vector
Modulation (See 14-00 Switching Pattern).

Introduction to VLT® HVAC D... Design Guide
2 Introduction to VLT® HVAC Drive

2 2
2.1 Safety 7. Note that the adjustable frequency drive has
more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3 when
2.1.1 Safety Note load sharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit)
and external 24 V DC have been installed. Make
WARNING sure that all voltage inputs have been discon-

nected and that the necessary time has passed
The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is before commencing repair work.
dangerous whenever connected to line power. Incorrect
installation of the motor, adjustable frequency drive or Installation at high altitudes
serial communication bus may cause death, serious CAUTION
personal injury or damage to the equipment. 380–500 V, enclosure types A, B and C: At altitudes
Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as above 6,600 ft [2 km], contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
national and local rules and safety regulations, must be 525–690 V: At altitudes above 6,600 ft [2 km], contact
complied with. Danfoss regarding PELV.
Safety Regulations
1. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from WARNING
line power if repair work is to be carried out. Warning against unintended start
Make sure that the line power supply has been 1. The motor can be stopped with digital
disconnected and that the necessary time has commands, bus commands, references or a
elapsed before removing motor and line power local stop, while the adjustable frequency drive
plugs. is connected to line power. If personal safety
2. The [Stop/Reset] key on the LCP of the adjustable considerations make it necessary to ensure that
frequency drive does not disconnect the no unintended start occurs, these stop functions
equipment from line power and is thus not to be are not sufficient.
used as a safety switch. 2. While parameters are being changed, the motor
3. Established correct protective grounding of the may start. Consequently, the [Reset] key must
equipment, protect the user against supply always be activated; after which data can be
voltage, and protect the motor against overload modified.
in accordance with applicable national and local 3. A motor that has been stopped may start if
regulations. faults occur in the electronics of the adjustable
4. The ground leakage currents are higher than frequency drive, or if a temporary overload or a
3.5 mA. fault in the line power or the motor connection
ceases.
5. Protection against motor overload is set by
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is
desired, set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to data
value [ETR trip] (default value) or data value [ETR WARNING
warning]. Note: The function is initialized at 1.16 Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after
x rated motor current and rated motor frequency. the equipment has been disconnected from line power.
For the North American market: The ETR
functions provide class 20 motor overload Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been
protection in accordance with NEC. disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing
(linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and line
connection for kinetic backup. Refer to the Instruction
power supply while the adjustable frequency
Manual for further safety guidelines.
drive is connected to line power. Make sure that
the line power supply has been disconnected and
that the necessary time has elapsed before
removing motor and line power plugs.

2.1.2 Caution 2.2 CE Labeling

2.2.1 CE Conformity and Labeling
2 2
WARNING
The DC link capacitors remain charged after power has What is CE Conformity and Labeling?
been disconnected. To avoid an electrical shock hazard, The purpose of CE labeling is to avoid technical trade
disconnect the from line power before carrying out obstacles within the EFTA and the EU. The EU has
maintenance. Wait at least as follows before doing introduced the CE label as a simple way of showing
service on the adjustable frequency drive: whether a product complies with the relevant EU
directives. The CE label says nothing about the specifi-
Voltage [V] Min. waiting time (minutes) cations or quality of the product. Adjustable frequency
4 15 drives are regulated by three EU directives.
200–240 1.5–5 hp [1.1–3.7 kW] 7.5–60 hp [5.5–45 kW] The machinery directive (2006/42/EC)
380–480 1.5–10 hp [1.1–7.5 kW] 15–125 hp [11–90 kW] Adjustable frequency drives with the integrated safety
525–600 1.5–10 hp [1.1–7.5 kW] 15–125 hp [11–90 kW] function are now falling under the Machinery Directive.
525–690 15–125 hp [11–90 kW] Danfoss uses CE labels in accordance with the directive
Be aware that there may be high voltage on the DC link even and will issue a declaration of conformity upon request.
when the LEDs are turned off. Adjustable frequency drives without the safety function do
not fall under the machinery directive. However, if an
Table 2.1 Discharge Time adjustable frequency drive is supplied for use in a
machine, we provide information on its safety aspects.
2.1.3 Disposal Instruction The low-voltage directive (2006/95/EC)
Adjustable frequency drives must be CE labeled in
accordance with the Low-voltage Directive of January 1,
Equipment containing electrical
1997. The directive applies to all electrical equipment and
components may not be disposed of
appliances used in the 50–1,000 V AC and the
together with domestic waste.
75–1,500 V DC voltage ranges. Danfoss CE labels in
It must be separately collected with
accordance with the directive and issues a declaration of
electrical and electronic waste according
conformity upon request.
to local and currently valid legislation.
The EMC directive (2004/108/EC)
EMC is short for electromagnetic compatibility.
The presence of electromagnetic compatibility means that
the mutual interference between different components/
appliances does not affect the way the appliances work.
The EMC directive came into effect January 1, 1996.
Danfoss CE labels in accordance with the directive and
issues a declaration of conformity upon request. To carry
out EMC-compatible installation, see the instructions in this
Design Guide. In addition, Danfoss specifies which
standards our products comply with. Danfoss offers the
filters presented in the specifications and provide other
types of assistance to ensure the optimum EMC result.
The adjustable frequency drive is most often used by

professionals of the trade as a complex component
forming part of a larger appliance, system or installation.
It must be noted that the responsibility for the final EMC
properties of the appliance, system or installation rests
with the installer.

2.2.2 What Is Covered The CE label also applies to the EMC directive provided
2 2 that the instructions for EMC-compatible installation and
filtering are followed. On this basis, a declaration of
The EU "Guidelines on the Application of Council Directive
2004/108/EC" outline three typical situations of using an conformity in accordance with the EMC directive is issued.
adjustable frequency drive.
This Design Guide offers detailed instructions for installation
1. The adjustable frequency drive is sold directly to to ensure EMC-compatible installation. Furthermore,
the end user. For such applications, the Danfoss specifies with what the different products comply.
adjustable frequency drive must be CE labeled in
accordance with the EMC directive. Danfoss provides other types of assistance that can help
obtain the best EMC result.
2. The adjustable frequency drive is sold as part of a
system. It is being marketed as complete system,
e.g., an air-conditioning system. The complete 2.2.4 Compliance with EMC Directive
system must be CE labeled in accordance with 2004/108/EC
the EMC directive. The manufacturer can ensure
CE labeling under the EMC directive by testing As mentioned, the adjustable frequency drive is mostly
the EMC of the system. The components of the used by professionals of the trade as a complex
system do not need to be CE marked. component forming part of a larger appliance, system or
installation. Note that the responsibility for the final EMC
3. The adjustable frequency drive is sold for instal-
properties of the appliance, system or installation rests
lation in a plant. It could be a production or a
with the installer. As an aid to the installer, Danfoss has
heating/ventilation plant designed and installed
prepared EMC installation guidelines for the Power Drive
by professionals of the trade. The adjustable
system. The standards and test levels stated for Power
frequency drive must be CE labeled under the
Drive systems are complied with, provided that the EMC-
EMC directive. The finished plant should not bear
compatible instructions for installation are followed, see.
the CE mark. However, the installation must
comply with the essential requirements of the 2.3 Air humidity
directive. This is assumed by using appliances
and systems that are CE labeled under the EMC The adjustable frequency drive has been designed to meet
directive the IEC/EN 60068-2-3 standard, EN 50178 pkt. 9.4.2.2 at
122 °F [50 °C].
2.2.3 Danfoss Adjustable frequency drive 2.4 Aggressive Environments
and CE Labeling
An adjustable frequency drive contains a large number of
The purpose of CE labeling is to facilitate trade within the mechanical and electronic components. All are to some
EU and EFTA. extent vulnerable to environmental effects.
However, CE labeling may cover many different specifi-

cations. Thus, check what a given CE label specifically
CAUTION
Do not install the adjustable frequency drive in
covers.
environments with airborne liquids, particles, or gases
capable of affecting and damaging the electronic
The covered specifications can be very different and a CE components. Failure to take the necessary protective
label may therefore give the installer a false feeling of measures increases the risk of stoppages, thus reducing
security when using an adjustable frequency drive as a the life of the adjustable frequency drive.
component in a system or an appliance.
Degree of protection as per IEC 60529

Danfoss CE labels the adjustable frequency drives in The Safe Torque Off function may only be installed and
accordance with the low-voltage directive. This means that operated in a control cabinet with degree of protection
if the adjustable frequency drive is installed correctly, IP54 or higher (or equivalent environment). This is required
Danfoss guarantees compliance with the low-voltage to avoid cross faults and short circuits between terminals,
directive. Danfoss issues a declaration of conformity that connectors, tracks and safety-related circuitry caused by
confirms our CE labeling in accordance with the low- foreign objects.
voltage directive.

Liquids can be carried through the air and condense in the 2.5 Vibration and Shock
adjustable frequency drive and may cause corrosion of
components and metal parts. Steam, oil, and salt water The adjustable frequency drive has been tested according
2 2
may cause corrosion of components and metal parts. In to the procedure based on the shown standards:
such environments, use equipment with enclosure rating IP
• IEC/EN 60068-2-6: Vibration (sinusoidal) - 1970
54/55. As an extra protection, coated printed circuit boards
can be ordered as an option. • IEC/EN 60068-2-64: Vibration, broad-band random
Airborne particles such as dust may cause mechanical, The adjustable frequency drive complies with requirements
electrical or thermal failure in the adjustable frequency that exist for units mounted on the walls and floors of
drive. A typical indicator of excessive levels of airborne production premises, as well as in panels bolted to walls or
particles is the presence of dust particles around the floors.
adjustable frequency drive fan. In very dusty environments, 2.6 Safe Torque Off
use equipment with enclosure rating IP 54/55 or a cabinet
for IP 00/IP 20/TYPE 1 equipment. The FC 102 can perform the safety function Safe Torque Off
(STO, as defined by EN IEC 61800-5-21) and Stop Category 0
In environments with high temperatures and humidity, (as defined in EN 60204-12).
corrosive gases such as sulfur, nitrogen, and chlorine Before integrating and using Safe Torque Off in an instal-
compounds cause chemical processes on the adjustable lation, a thorough risk analysis on the installation must be
frequency drive components. carried out in order to determine whether the Safe Torque
Off functionality and safety levels are appropriate and
Such chemical reactions rapidly affect and damage the sufficient. It is designed and approved as suitable for the
electronic components. In such environments, mount the requirements of:
equipment in a cabinet with fresh air ventilation, keeping • Category 3 in EN ISO 13849-1
aggressive gases away from the adjustable frequency drive.
An extra protection in such areas is a coating of the
• Performance Level "d" in EN ISO 13849-1:2008
printed circuit boards, which can be ordered as an option. • SIL 2 Capability in IEC 61508 and EN 61800-5-2
• SILCL 2 in EN 62061
NOTICE! 1) Refer to EN IEC 61800-5-2 for details of Safe torque off
Mounting adjustable frequency drives in aggressive (STO) function.
environments increases the risk of stoppages and consid- 2) Refer to EN IEC 60204-1 for details of stop category 0
erably reduces the life of the adjustable frequency drive. and 1.
Activation and Termination of Safe Torque Off
Before installing the adjustable frequency drive, check the The Safe Torque Off (STO) function is activated by
ambient air for liquids, particles and gases. This is done by removing the voltage at Terminal 37 of the Safe Inverter.
observing existing installations in this environment. Typical By connecting the Safe Inverter to external safety devices
indicators of harmful airborne liquids are water or oil on providing a safe delay, an installation for a Safe Torque Off
metal parts, or corrosion of metal parts. Category 1 can be obtained. The Safe Torque Off function
of FC 102 can be used for asynchronous, synchronous
motors and permanent magnet motors. See examples in
Excessive dust particle levels are often found on instal-
chapter 2.6.1 Terminal 37 Safe Torque Off Function.
lation cabinets and existing electrical installations. One
indicator of aggressive airborne gases is the blackening of
copper rails and cable ends on existing installations.
WARNING
After installation of Safe Torque Off (STO), a commis-
sioning test as specified in section Safe Torque Off
D and E enclosure types have a stainless steel backchannel
Commissioning Test must be performed. A passed
option to provide additional protection in aggressive
commissioning test is mandatory after first installation
environments. Proper ventilation is still required for the
and after each change to the safety installation.
internal components of the adjustable frequency drive.
Contact Danfoss for additional information.

Safe Torque Off Technical Data Abbrev. Ref. Description

2 2 The following values are associated to the different types
of safety levels:
Cat. EN ISO
13849-1
Category, level “B, 1-4”
Reaction time for T37 FIT Failure In Time: 1E-9 hours
• Maximum reaction time: 20 ms HFT IEC 61508 Hardware Fault Tolerance: HFT = n
means that n+1 faults could cause a
Reaction time = delay between de-energizing the STO
loss of the safety function
input and switching off the output bridge.
MTTFd EN ISO Mean Time To Failure - dangerous. Unit:
Data for EN ISO 13849-1 13849-1 years
• Performance Level "d" PFH IEC 61508 Probability of Dangerous Failures per
• MTTFd (Mean Time To Dangerous Failure): Hour. This value shall be considered if
14,000 years the safety device is operated in high
demand (more often than once per
• DC (Diagnostic Coverage): 90%
year) or continuous mode of operation,
• Category 3 where the frequency of demands for
operation made on a safety-related
• Lifetime 20 years
system is greater than one per year
Data for EN IEC 62061, EN IEC 61508, EN IEC 61800-5-2 PFD IEC 61508 Average probability of failure on
• SIL 2 Capability, SILCL 2 demand, value used for low demand
• PFH (Probability of dangerous Failure per Hour) = operation
1E-10/h PL EN ISO Discrete level used to specify the ability
13849-1 of safety related parts of control
• SFF (Safe Failure Fraction) > 99%
systems to perform a safety function
• HFT (Hardware Fault Tolerance) = 0 under foreseeable conditions. Levels a-e
(1001 architecture) SFF IEC 61508 Safe Failure Fraction [%]; Percentage
• Lifetime 20 years part of safe failures and dangerous
detected failures of a safety function or
Data for EN IEC 61508 low demand
a subsystem related to all failures
• PFDavg for 1-year proof test: 1E-10 SIL IEC 61508 Safety Integrity Level
• PFDavg for 3-year proof test: 1E-10 STO EN Safe Torque Off
• PFDavg for 5-year proof test: 1E-10 61800-5-2
SS1 EN 61800 Safe Stop 1
No maintenance of the STO functionality is needed.
-5-2
Take security measures, e.g., only skilled personnel must be
able to access and install in closed cabinets. Table 2.2 Abbreviations Related to Functional Safety
SISTEMA Data
Danfoss provides functional safety data via a data library 2.6.1 Terminal 37 Safe Torque Off Function
for use with the SISTEMA calculation tool from IFA
(Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the The FC 102 is available with Safe Torque Off functionality
German Social Accident Insurance), as well as data for via control terminal 37. Safe Torque Off disables the
manual calculation. The library is complete and continually control voltage of the power semiconductors of the
extended. adjustable frequency drive output stage which in turn
prevents generating the voltage required to rotate the
motor. When the Safe Torque Off (T37) is activated, the
adjustable frequency drive issues an alarm, trips the unit,
and coasts the motor to a stop. Manual restart is required.
The Safe Torque Off function can be used for stopping the
adjustable frequency drive in emergency stop situations. In
the normal operating mode when Safe Torque Off is not
required, use the adjustable frequency drive’s regular stop
function instead. When automatic restart is used – the
requirements according to ISO 12100-2 paragraph 5.3.2.5
must be fulfilled.

Liability Conditions Safe Torque Off Installation and Set-up

It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that personnel
installing and operating the Safe Torque Off function:
WARNING 2 2
SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION!
The Safe Torque Off function does NOT isolate AC line
• Read and understand the safety regulations
voltage to the adjustable frequency drive or auxiliary
concerning health and safety/accident prevention
circuits. Perform work on electrical parts of the
• Understand the generic and safety guidelines adjustable frequency drive or the motor only after
given in this description and the extended isolating the AC line voltage supply and waiting the
description in the Design Guide length of time specified under Safety in this manual.
• Have a good knowledge of the generic and safety Failure to isolate the AC line voltage supply from the
standards applicable to the specific application unit and waiting the time specified could result in death
or serious injury.
Standards
Use of Safe Torque Off on terminal 37 requires that the
user satisfies all provisions for safety including relevant • It is not recommended to stop the adjustable
laws, regulations and guidelines. The optional Safe Torque frequency drive by using the Safe Torque Off
Off function complies with the following standards. function. If a running adjustable frequency drive
is stopped by using the function, the unit trips
and stops by coasting. If this is not acceptable,
IEC 60204-1: 2005 category 0 – uncontrolled stop
e.g., causes danger, the adjustable frequency
IEC 61508: 1998 SIL2 drive and machinery must be stopped using the
IEC 61800-5-2: 2007 – safe torque off (STO) appropriate stopping mode before using this
function function. Depending on the application, a
mechanical brake may be required.
IEC 62061: 2005 SIL CL2
ISO 13849-1: 2006 Category 3 PL d
• Concerning synchronous and permanent magnet
motor adjustable frequency drives in case of a
ISO 14118: 2000 (EN 1037) – prevention of multiple IGBT power semiconductor failure: In
unexpected startup spite of the activation of the Safe Torque Off
The information and instructions of the Instruction Manual function, the adjustable frequency drive system
are not sufficient for a proper and safe use of the Safe can produce an alignment torque which
Torque Off functionality. The related information and maximally rotates the motor shaft by 180/p
instructions in the relevant Design Guide must be followed. degrees. p denotes the pole pair number.
• This function is suitable for performing

Protective Measures mechanical work on the adjustable frequency
drive system or affected area of a machine only.
• Safety engineering systems may only be installed
It does not provide electrical safety. This function
and commissioned by qualified and skilled
should not be used as a control for starting
personnel
and/or stopping the adjustable frequency drive.
• The unit must be installed in an IP54 cabinet or
Meet the following requirements to perform a safe instal-
in an equivalent environment. In special
lation of the adjustable frequency drive:
applications, a higher IP degree may be necessary
• The cable between terminal 37 and the external 1. Remove the jumper wire between control
safety device must be short-circuit-protected terminals 37 and 12 or 13. Cutting or breaking
according to ISO 13849-2 table D.4 the jumper is not sufficient to avoid short-
• If any external forces influence the motor axis circuiting. (See jumper on Figure 2.1.)
(e.g., suspended loads), additional measures 2. Connect an external safety monitoring relay via a
(e.g., a safety holding brake) are required to NO safety function (the instruction for the safety
eliminate hazards. device must be followed) to terminal 37 (Safe
Torque Off) and either terminal 12 or 13 (24 V
DC). The Safety monitoring relay must comply
with Category 3/PL “d” (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 2
(EN 62061).

Safe Torque Off Commissioning Test
130BA874.10
2 2 After installation and before first operation, perform a
commissioning test of the installation making use of Safe
Torque Off. Also, perform the test after each modification
of the installation.
12/13 37
Example with STO
A safety relay evaluates the E-Stop button signals and
triggers an STO function on the adjustable frequency drive
in the event of an activation of the E-Stop button (See
Figure 2.3). This safety function corresponds to a category 0
stop (uncontrolled stop) in accordance with IEC 60204-1. If
the function is triggered during operation, the motor runs
down in an uncontrolled manner. The power to the motor
is safely removed, so that no further movement is possible.
It is not necessary to monitor plant at a standstill. If an
external force effect is to be anticipated, provide additional
measures to safely prevent any potential movement
(e.g., mechanical brakes).
Figure 2.1 Jumper between Terminal 12/13 (24 V) and 37
NOTICE!
For all applications with Safe Torque Off, it is important
130BB967.10
FC that short circuit in the wiring to T37 can be excluded.

3 This can be done as described in EN ISO 13849-2 D4 by
12
the use of protected wiring, (shielded or segregated).
1
Example with SS1
SS1 correspond to a controlled stop, stop category 1
according to IEC 60204-1 (see Figure 2.4). When activating
37 the safety function, a normal controlled stop is performed.
This can be activated through terminal 27. After the safe
4 2 delay time has expired on the external safety module, the
Figure 2.2 Installation to Achieve a Stopping Category 0 STO is triggered and terminal 37 is set low. Ramp-down is
(EN 60204-1) with Safety Cat. 3/PL “d” (ISO 13849-1) or performed as configured in the adjustable frequency drive.
SIL 2 (EN 62061). If the adjustable frequency drive is not stopped after the
safe delay time, the activation of STO coasts the adjustable
frequency drive.
1 Safety relay (cat. 3, PL d or SIL2 NOTICE!
2 Emergency stop button
When using the SS1 function, the brake ramp of the
3 Reset button
adjustable frequency drive is not monitored with respect
4 Short-circuit protected cable (if not inside installation
to safety.
IP54 cabinet)
Table 2.3 Legend to Figure 2.2 Example with Category 4/PL e application
Where the safety control system design requires two
channels for the STO function to achieve Category 4/PL e,
one channel can be implemented by Safe Torque Off T37
(STO) and the other by a contactor which may be
connected in either the adjustable frequency drive input or
output power circuits and controlled by the safety relay
(see Figure 2.5). The contactor must be monitored through
an auxiliary guided contact and connected to the reset
input of the safety relay.

Paralleling of Safe Torque Off inputs via one safety relay FC
130BC001.10
Safe Torque Off inputs T37 (STO) may be connected
directly if the situation is required to control multiple
4 3
2 2
12
adjustable frequency drives from the same control line via
one safety relay (see Figure 2.6). Connecting inputs
increases the probability of a fault in the unsafe direction, 1
since a fault in one adjustable frequency drive might result

20
in all adjustable frequency drives becoming enabled. The 37
probability of a fault for T37 is so low, that the resulting
FC 2
probability still meets the requirements for SIL2.
130BB968.10
20
FC 37
3
FC
12
20
1 37
Figure 2.6 Paralleling of Multiple Adjustable Frequency

Drives Example
37
2
Figure 2.3 STO Example 1 Safety relay
2 Emergency stop button
3 Reset button
4 24 V DC
130BB969.10
FC
3 Table 2.4 Legend to Figure 2.3 to Figure 2.6
12
WARNING
1
Safe Torque Off activation (i.e., removal of 24 V DC
voltage supply to terminal 37) does not provide
18 electrical safety. The Safe Torque Off function itself is
37
therefore not sufficient to implement the Emergency Off
2 function as defined by EN 60204-1. Emergency Off
Figure 2.4 SS1 Example requires measures of electrical isolation, e.g., by
switching off line power via an additional contactor.
FC 3 1. Activate the Safe Torque Off function by

130BB970.10
K1
12 removing the 24 V DC voltage supply to the
terminal 37.
2. After activation of Safe Torque Off (i.e., after the
1
response time), the adjustable frequency drive
37 coasts (stops creating a rotational field in the
K1 motor). The response time is typically shorter
2
than 10 ms for the complete performance range
K1
of the adjustable frequency drive.
Figure 2.5 STO Category 4 Example

2 2
The adjustable frequency drive is guaranteed not to restart
creation of a rotational field by an internal fault (in
WARNING
accordance with Cat. 3 PL d acc. EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2 Automatic Restart Behavior is only allowed in one of the
acc. EN 62061). After activation of Safe Torque Off, the two situations:
adjustable frequency drive display shows the text Safe 1. The Unintended Restart Prevention is
Torque Off activated. The associated help text says "Safe implemented by other parts of the Safe Torque
Torque Off has been activated". This means that the Safe Off installation.
Torque Off has been activated, or that normal operation
2. A presence in the dangerous zone can be
has not been resumed yet after Safe Torque Off activation.
physically excluded when Safe Torque Off is not
activated. In particular, paragraph 5.3.2.5 of ISO
NOTICE! 12100-2 2003 must be observed.
The requirements of Cat. 3/PL “d” (ISO 13849-1) are only
fulfilled while 24 V DC supply to terminal 37 is kept
2.6.2 Installation of External Safety Device
removed or low by a safety device, which itself fulfills
in Combination with MCB 112
Cat. 3/PL “d” (ISO 13849-1). If external forces act on the
motor, e.g., in case of vertical axis (suspended loads) -
If the ex-certified thermistor module MCB 112, which uses
and an unwanted movement, for example caused by
Terminal 37 as its safety-related switch-off channel, is
gravity, could cause a hazard, the motor must not be
connected, then the output X44/12 of MCB 112 must be
operated without additional measures for fall protection.
AND-ed with the safety-related sensor (such as emergency
For example, mechanical brakes must be installed
stop button, safety-guard switch, etc.) that activates Safe
additionally.
Torque Off. This means that the output to Safe Torque Off
terminal 37 is HIGH (24 V) only if both the signal from MCB
To resume operation after activation of Safe Torque Off, 112 output X44/12 and the signal from the safety-related
first reapply 24 V DC voltage to terminal 37 (text Safe sensor are HIGH. If at least one of the two signals is LOW,
Torque Off activated is still displayed), then create a reset the output to Terminal 37 must be LOW, too. The safety
signal (via bus, Digital I/O, or [Reset] key on inverter). device with this AND logic itself must conform to IEC
61508, SIL 2. The connection from the output of the safety
By default, the Safe Torque Off functions is set to an device with safe AND logic to Safe Torque Off terminal 37
Unintended Restart Prevention behavior. This means, in must be short-circuit protected. See Figure 2.7.
order to terminate Safe Torque Off and resume normal
operation, the 24 V DC must first be reapplied to Terminal
37. Subsequently, send a reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O,
or [Reset] key).
The Safe Torque Off function can be set to an Automatic

Restart Behavior by setting the value of 5-19 Terminal 37
Safe Stop from default value [1] to value [3]. If a MCB 112
Option is connected to the adjustable frequency drive,
then Automatic Restart Behavior is set by values [7] and
[8].
Automatic Restart means that Safe Torque Off is
terminated and normal operation is resumed as soon as
the 24 V DC is applied to Terminal 37, and no reset signal
is required.

Selections [6] PTC 1 & Relay A to [9] PTC 1 & Relay W/A must
2 2
130BA967.11
be selected for the combination of external safety device
Hazardous Non- Hazardous Area
Area and MCB 112.
PTC Thermistor Card

MCB112 NOTICE!
Note that selections [7] PTC 1 & Relay W and [8] PTC 1 &
X44/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Relay A/W open up for automatic restart when the
external safety device is de-activated again.
PTC Digital Input
Sensor e.g. Par 5-15
This is only allowed in the following cases:

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
• The unintended restart prevention is
DI DI implemented by other parts of the Safe Torque
Safe Stop
Off installation.
Par. 5- 19
•
Terminal 37 Safe Stop
Safety Device A presence in the dangerous zone can be
SIL 2
Safe AND Input physically excluded when Safe Torque Off is not
Safe Output activated. In particular, paragraph 5.3.2.5 of ISO
S afe Input
12100-2 2003 must be observed.
Manual Restart
See MCB 112 Instruction Manual for further information.
Figure 2.7 Figure of the essential aspects for installing a 2.6.3 Safe Torque Off Commissioning Test
combination of a Safe Torque Off application and an
MCB 112 application. The diagram shows a Restart input for After installation and before first operation, perform a
the external Safety Device. This means that in this installation, commissioning test of an installation or application making
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop might be set to value [7] PTC 1 & use of Safe Torque Off.
Relay W or [8] [8] PTC 1 & Relay A/W. Refer to MCB 112 Moreover, perform the test after each modification of the
Instruction Manual for further details. installation or application which the Safe Torque Off is part
of.
Parameter settings for external safety device in NOTICE!

combination with MCB112
A passed commissioning test is mandatory after first
If MCB 112 is connected, then additional selections ([4] PTC
installation and after each change to the safety instal-
1 Alarm to [9] PTC 1 & Relay W/A) become possible for
lation.
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop. Selections [1] Safe Torque Off
Alarm and [3] Safe Torque Off Warning are still available but
are not to be used as these are for installations without The commissioning test (select one of cases 1 or 2 as
MCB 112 or any external safety devices. If [1] Safe Torque applicable):
Off Alarm or [3] Safe Torque Off Warning should be selected
by mistake and MCB 112 is triggered, then the adjustable Case 1: Restart prevention for Safe Torque Off is
frequency drive reacts with an alarm ”Dangerous Failure required (i.e., Safe Torque Off only where 5-19 Terminal
[A72]” and coasts the adjustable frequency drive safely, 37 Safe Stop is set to default value [1], or combined Safe
without Automatic Restart. Selections [4] PTC 1 Alarm and Torque Off and MCB112 where 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
[5] PTC 1 Warning are not to be selected when an external Stop is set to [6] or [9]):
safety device is used. These selections are for when only 1.1 Remove the 24 V DC voltage supply to
MCB 112 uses the Safe Torque Off. If selection [4] PTC 1 terminal 37 using the interrupt device while the
Alarm or [5] PTC 1 Warning is selected by mistake and the motor is driven by the FC 102 (i.e., the line power
external safety device triggers Safe Torque Off, the supply is not interrupted). The test step is passed
adjustable frequency drive issues an alarm ”Dangerous if the motor reacts with a coast and the
Failure [A72]” and coasts the adjustable frequency drive mechanical brake (if connected) is activated, and
safely, without Automatic Restart. if an LCP is mounted, the alarm “Safe Torque Off
[A68]” is displayed.

1.2 Send reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or Compared to alternative control systems and technologies,
2 2 [Reset] key). The test step is passed if the motor
remains in the Safe Torque Off state, and the
an adjustable frequency drive is the optimum energy
control system for controlling fan and pump systems.
mechanical brake (if connected) remains
activated.
1.3 Reapply 24 V DC to terminal 37. The test step
is passed if the motor remains in the coasted
state, and the mechanical brake (if connected)
remains activated.
1.4 Send reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or
[Reset] key). The test step is passed if the motor
becomes operational again.
The commissioning test is passed if all four test steps 1.1,
1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 are passed.
Case 2: Automatic Restart of Safe Torque Off is wanted
and allowed (i.e., Safe Torque Off only where Figure 2.8 Fan Curves (A, B and C) for Reduced Fan Volumes
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop is set to [3], or combined Safe
Torque Off and MCB112 where 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
Stop is set to [7] or [8]):
2.1 Remove the 24 V DC voltage supply to
terminal 37 by the interrupt device while the
motor is driven by the FC 102 (i.e., line power
supply is not interrupted). The test step is passed
if the motor reacts with a coast and the
mechanical brake (if connected) is activated, and
if an LCP is mounted, the warning “Safe Torque
Off [W68]” is displayed.
2.2 Reapply 24 V DC to terminal 37.
The test step is passed if the motor becomes operational
again. The commissioning test is passed if both test steps
2.1 and 2.2 are passed.
NOTICE!
See warning on the restart behavior in
chapter 2.6.1 Terminal 37 Safe Torque Off Function.
2.7 Advantages
2.7.1 Why use an adjustable frequency
drive for controlling fans and pumps?
An adjustable frequency drive takes advantage of the fact

that centrifugal fans and pumps follow the laws of propor-
tionality for such fans and pumps. For further information, Figure 2.9 When Using an Adjustable Frequency Drive to
see the text and figure The Laws of Proportionality. Reduce Fan Capacity to 60% - More Than 50% Energy
Savings may Be Obtained in Typical Applications.
2.7.2 The Clear Advantage - Energy Savings
The advantage of using an adjustable frequency drive for

controlling the speed of fans or pumps lies in the
electricity savings.

2.7.3 Example of Energy Savings 2.7.4 Comparison of Energy Savings

2 2
As shown in the figure (the laws of proportionality), the The Danfoss adjustable frequency drive solution offers
flow is controlled by changing the RPM. By reducing the major savings compared with traditional energy saving
rated speed by only 20%, the flow is also reduced by 20%. solutions. This is because the adjustable frequency drive is
This is because the flow is directly proportional to the able to control fan speed according to thermal load on the
RPM. The consumption of electricity, however, is reduced system and the fact that the adjustable frequency drive
by 50%. has a built-in facility that enables the adjustable frequency
If the system in question only needs to be able to supply a drive to function as a Building Management System, BMS.
flow corresponding to 100% a few days each year, while
the average is below 80% of the rated flow for the Figure 2.12 shows typical energy savings obtainable with
remainder of the year, the amount of energy saved is even three well-known solutions when fan volume is reduced to,
greater than 50%. e.g., 60%.
Figure 2.12 shows more than 50% energy savings can be
The laws of proportionality achieved in typical applications.
Figure 2.10 describes the dependence of flow, pressure and
power consumption on RPM.
130BA782.10
Q = Flow P = Power
Q1 = Rated flow P1 = Rated power
Q2 = Reduced flow P2 = Reduced power
H = Pressure n = Speed regulation
H1 = Rated pressure n1 = Rated speed
Discharge
H2 = Reduced pressure n2 = Reduced speed damper
Table 2.5 Abbreviations Used in Equation

Less energy savings
175HA208.10
100%
80%
Flow ~n Maximum energy savings

50%
Pressure ~n2
IGV
25%
Power ~n3
12,5%
Costlier installation
n Figure 2.11 The Three Common Energy Saving Systems
50% 80% 100%
Figure 2.10 The Dependence of Flow, Pressure and Power

Consumption on RPM
Q1 n1
Flow : =
Q2 n2
H1 n1 2
Pressure : =
H2 n2
P1 n1 3
Power : =
P2 n2

2 2
Figure 2.12 Discharge dampers reduce power consumption

somewhat. Inlet guide vans offer a 40% reduction but are
expensive to install. The Danfoss adjustable frequency drive
solution reduces energy consumption with more than 50%
and is easy to install.
Figure 2.13 Example with Varying Flow
2.7.5 Example with Varying Flow over 1

Year m3/ Distri- Valve regulation Adjustable frequency
h bution drive control
The example below is calculated on the basis of pump % Hours Power Consumption Power Consump-
characteristics obtained from a pump datasheet. tion
The result obtained shows energy savings in excess of 50%
A1–B1 kWh A1–C1 kWh
at the given flow distribution over a year. The payback
350 5 438 42.5 18.615 42.5 18.615
period depends on the price per kWh and price of
300 15 1314 38.5 50.589 29.0 38.106
adjustable frequency drive. In this example, it is less than a
250 20 1752 35.0 61.320 18.5 32.412
year when compared with valves and constant speed.
200 20 1752 31.5 55.188 11.5 20.148
150 20 1752 28.0 49.056 6.5 11.388
Flow distribution over 1 year
100 20 1752 23.0 40.296 3.5 6.132
Pshaft=Pshaft output
Σ 100 8760 275.064 26.801
175HA210.11
[h] t
2000
Table 2.7 Consumption

1500
1000
500
2.7.6 Better Control
Q
100 200 300 400 [m3 /h]
If an adjustable frequency drive is used for controlling the
flow or pressure of a system, improved control is obtained.
Table 2.6 Energy Savings
An adjustable frequency drive can vary the speed of the
fan or pump, thereby obtaining variable control of flow
and pressure.
Furthermore, an adjustable frequency drive can quickly
adapt the speed of the fan or pump to new flow or
pressure conditions in the system.
Simple control of process (flow, level, or pressure) utilizing
the built-in PID control.

2.7.7 Cos φ Compensation

2 2
Generally speaking, the VLT® HVAC Drive has a cos φ of 1
and provides power factor correction for the cos φ of the
motor, which means that there is no need to make
allowance for the cos φ of the motor when sizing the
power factor correction unit.
2.7.8 Star/Delta Starter or Soft-starter not

Required
When larger motors are started, it is necessary in many

countries to use equipment that limits the start-up current.
In more traditional systems, a star/delta starter or soft-
starter is widely used. Such motor starters are not required
if an adjustable frequency drive is used.
As illustrated in Figure 2.14, an adjustable frequency drive

does not consume more than rated current.
800
175HA227.10
700
600
4
500
% Full load current
400
300 3
200
2
100
1
0
0 12,5 25 37,5 50Hz
Full load
& speed
Figure 2.14 An Adjustable Frequency Drive Does Not

Consume More Than Rated Current
1 VLT® HVAC Drive

2 Star/delta starter
3 Soft-starter
4 Start directly on line power
Table 2.8 Legend to Figure 2.14

2.7.9 Using an Adjustable Frequency Drive Saves Money

2 2
The example on the following page shows that a lot of extra equipment is not required when an adjustable frequency drive
is used. It is possible to calculate the cost of installing the two different systems. In the example on the following page, the
two systems can be established at roughly the same price.
2.7.10 Without an Adjustable Frequency Drive
D.D.C. = Direct Digital Control E.M.S. = Energy Management system
V.A.V. = Variable Air Volume
Sensor P = Pressure Sensor T = Temperature
Table 2.9 Abbreviations used in Figure 2.15 and Figure 2.16
Figure 2.15 Traditional Fan System

2.7.11 With an Adjustable Frequency Drive

Cooling section Heating section
2 2
Fan section
175HA206.11
Supply
Fan air
V.A.V
- + M Sensors
PT outlets
Return Flow Return Flow
x3
M Pump M Pump Duct
x3 x3
Local Main
VLT VLT VLT D.D.C.
Pressure control B.M.S
control
0-10V
or
0/4-20mA
Control
Control temperature
temperature 0-10V
0-10V or
or 0/4-20mA
0/4-20mA Mains Mains
Mains
Figure 2.16 Fan System Controlled by Adjustable Frequency Drives.
2.7.12 Application Examples
The following pages give typical examples of applications within HVAC.

For further information about a given application, ask a Danfoss supplier for an information sheet that gives a full
description of the application.
Variable Air Volume

Ask for The Drive to...Improving Variable Air Volume Ventilation Systems MN.60.A1.02
Constant Air Volume

Ask for The Drive to...Improving Constant Air Volume Ventilation Systems MN.60.B1.02
Cooling Tower Fan

Ask for The Drive to...Improving fan control on cooling towers MN.60.C1.02
Condenser pumps
Ask for The Drive to...Improving condenser water pumping systems MN.60.F1.02
Primary pumps
Ask for The Drive to...Improve your primary pumping in primary/secondary pumping systems MN.60.D1.02
Secondary pumps
Ask for The Drive to...Improve your secondary pumping in primary/secondary pumping systems MN.60.E1.02

2.7.13 Variable Air Volume

2 2
VAV or Variable Air Volume systems, are used to control both the ventilation and temperature to satisfy the requirements of
a building. Central VAV systems are considered to be the most energy efficient method to air condition buildings. By
designing central systems instead of distributed systems, greater efficiency can be obtained.
The efficiency comes from utilizing larger fans and larger chillers which have much higher efficiencies than small motors
and distributed air-cooled chillers. Savings are also a result of decreased maintenance requirements.
2.7.14 The VLT Solution
While dampers and IGVs work to maintain a constant pressure in the ductwork, a solution saves much more energy and
reduces the complexity of the installation. Instead of creating an artificial pressure drop or causing a decrease in fan
efficiency, the decreases the speed of the fan to provide the flow and pressure required by the system.
Centrifugal devices such as fans behave according to the centrifugal laws. This means the fans decrease the pressure and
flow they produce as their speed is reduced. Their power consumption is thereby significantly reduced.
The return fan is frequently controlled to maintain a fixed difference in airflow between the supply and return. The
advanced PID controller of the HVAC can be used to eliminate the need for additional controllers.
130BB455.10
Pressure
Frequency signal
Cooling coil Heating coil
converter VAV boxes
Filter
Supply fan
D1 3 T
Pressure
transmitter
Flow
D2
Frequency
converter
Return fan
Flow
3
D3
Figure 2.17 The VLT Solution

2.7.15 Constant Air Volume

2 2
CAV, or Constant Air Volume systems, are central ventilation systems usually used to supply large common zones with the
minimum amounts of fresh tempered air. They preceded VAV systems and therefore are found in older, multi-zoned
commercial buildings as well. These systems preheat amounts of fresh air utilizing Air Handling Units (AHUs) with a heating
coil, and many are also used to air condition buildings and have a cooling coil. Fan coil units are frequently used to assist in
the heating and cooling requirements in the individual zones.
With an adjustable frequency drive, significant energy savings can be obtained while maintaining decent control of the
building. Temperature sensors or CO2 sensors can be used as feedback signals to adjustable frequency drives. Whether
controlling temperature, air quality, or both, a CAV system can be controlled to operate based on actual building conditions.
As the number of people in the controlled area decreases, the need for fresh air decreases. The CO2 sensor detects lower
levels and decreases the supply fans speed. The return fan modulates to maintain a static pressure setpoint or fixed
difference between the supply and return air flows.
With temperature control (especially used in air conditioning systems), as the outside temperature varies and the number of
people in the controlled zone changes, different cooling requirements arise. As the temperature decreases below the
setpoint, the supply fan can decrease its speed. The return fan modulates to maintain a static pressure setpoint. By
decreasing the air flow, energy used to heat or cool the fresh air is also reduced, adding further savings.
Several features of the Danfoss HVAC dedicated adjustable frequency drive can be utilized to improve the performance of a
CAV system. One concern of controlling a ventilation system is poor air quality. The programmable minimum frequency can
be set to maintain a minimum amount of supply air, regardless of the feedback or reference signal. The adjustable
frequency drive also includes a 3-zone, 3-setpoint PID controller which allows monitoring of both temperature and air
quality. Even if the temperature requirement is satisfied, the adjustable frequency drive will maintain enough supply air to
satisfy the air quality sensor. The adjustable frequency drive is capable of monitoring and comparing two feedback signals
to control the return fan by maintaining a fixed differential air flow between the supply and return ducts as well.
130BB451.10
Temperature
Frequency signal
Cooling coil Heating coil converter
Filter
Supply fan
D1
Temperature
transmitter
D2
Pressure
signal
Frequency
converter
Return fan
Pressure
D3 transmitter

2.7.17 Cooling Tower Fan

2 2
Cooling tower fans are used to cool condenser water in water-cooled chiller systems. Water-cooled chillers provide the most
efficient means of creating chilled water. They are as much as 20% more efficient than air-cooled chillers. Depending on
climate, cooling towers are often the most energy efficient method of cooling the condenser water from chillers.
They cool the condenser water by evaporation.
The condenser water is sprayed into the cooling tower, onto the cooling tower's “fill” to increase its surface area. The tower
fan blows air through the fill and sprayed water to aid in the evaporation. Evaporation removes energy from the water, thus
dropping its temperature. The cooled water collects in the cooling towers basin, where it is pumped back into the chiller's
condenser, and the cycle is then repeated.
With an adjustable frequency drive, the cooling towers fans can be set to the speed required to maintain the condenser
water temperature. The adjustable frequency drives can also be used to turn the fan on and off as needed.
Several features of the Danfoss HVAC dedicated adjustable frequency drive, the HVAC adjustable frequency drive can be
utilized to improve the performance of a cooling tower fans application. As the cooling tower fans drop below a certain
speed, the effect the fan has on cooling the water becomes insignificant. Also, when utilizing a gear box to frequency
control the tower fan, a minimum speed of 40–50% may be required.
The customer programmable minimum frequency setting is available to maintain this minimum frequency even as the
feedback or speed reference calls for lower speeds.
Also as a standard feature, program the adjustable frequency drive to enter a “sleep” mode and stop the fan until a higher
speed is required. Additionally, some cooling tower fans have undesirable frequencies that may cause vibrations. These
frequencies can easily be avoided by programming the bypass frequency ranges in the adjustable frequency drive.

130BB453.10
2 2
Frequency
converter
Water Inlet
Temperature
Sensor
BASIN Water Outlet Conderser

Water pump
CHILLER
Supply

2.7.19 Condenser Pumps

2 2
Condenser water pumps are primarily used to circulate water through the condenser section of water cooled chillers and
their associated cooling tower. The condenser water absorbs the heat from the chiller's condenser section and releases it
into the atmosphere in the cooling tower. These systems are used to provide the most efficient means of creating chilled
water, and they are as much as 20% more efficient than air cooled chillers.
Adjustable frequency drives can be added to condenser water pumps instead of balancing the pumps with a throttling
valve or trimming the pump impeller.
Using an adjustable frequency drive instead of a throttling valve simply saves the energy that would have been absorbed
by the valve. This can amount to savings of 15–20% or more. Trimming the pump impeller is irreversible, thus if the
conditions change and higher flow is required the impeller must be replaced.
130BB452.10
Frequency
converter
Water
Inlet
Flow or pressure sensor
BASIN
Water
CHILLER
Outlet
Throttling
Condenser valve
Water pump
Supply

2.7.21 Primary Pumps

2 2
Primary pumps in a primary/secondary pumping system can be used to maintain a constant flow through devices that
encounter operation or control difficulties when exposed to variable flow. The primary/secondary pumping technique
decouples the “primary” production loop from the “secondary” distribution loop. This allows devices such as chillers to
obtain constant design flow and operate properly, while allowing the rest of the system to vary in flow.
As the evaporator flow rate decreases in a chiller, the chilled water begins to become overly chilled. As this happens, the
chiller attempts to decrease its cooling capacity. If the flow rate drops far enough, or too quickly, the chiller cannot shed its
load sufficiently and the chiller’s low evaporator temperature safety trips the chiller, requiring a manual reset. This situation
is common in large installations especially when two or more chillers are installed in parallel, if primary/secondary pumping
is not utilized.
Depending on the size of the system and the size of the primary loop, the energy consumption of the primary loop can
become substantial.
An adjustable frequency drive can be added to the primary system, to replace the throttling valve and/or trimming of the
impellers, leading to reduced operating expenses. Two control methods are common:
The first method uses a flow meter. Because the desired flow rate is known and constant, a flow meter installed at the
discharge of each chiller can be used to control the pump directly. Using the built-in PID controller, the adjustable
frequency drive always maintains the appropriate flow rate, even compensating for the changing resistance in the primary
piping loop as chillers and their pumps are staged on and off.
The other method is local speed determination. The operator simply decreases the output frequency until the design flow
rate is achieved.
Using an adjustable frequency drive to decrease the pump speed is very similar to trimming the pump impeller, except it
does not require any labor and the pump efficiency remains higher. The balancing contractor simply decreases the speed of
the pump until the proper flow rate is achieved and leaves the speed fixed. The pump operates at this speed any time the
chiller is staged on. Because the primary loop does not have control valves or other devices that can cause the system curve
to change, and the variance due to staging pumps and chillers on and off is usually small, this fixed speed remains
appropriate. In the event the flow rate needs to be increased later in the systems life, the adjustable frequency drive can
simply increase the pump speed instead of requiring a new pump impeller.

130BB456.10
2 2 Flowmeter Flowmeter
F F
CHILLER
CHILLER
Frequency
Frequency converter
converter

2.7.23 Secondary Pumps

2 2
Secondary pumps in a primary/secondary chilled water pumping system are used to distribute the chilled water to the loads
from the primary production loop. The primary/secondary pumping system is used to hydraulically de-couple one piping
loop from another. In this case, the primary pump is used to maintain a constant flow through the chillers while allowing
the secondary pumps to vary in flow, increase control and save energy.
If the primary/secondary design concept is not used and a variable volume system is designed, the chiller cannot shed its
load properly when the flow rate drops far enough or too quickly. The chiller’s low evaporator temperature safety then trips
the chiller, requiring a manual reset. This situation is common in large installations, especially when two or more chillers are
installed in parallel.
While the primary-secondary system with two-way valves improves energy savings and eases system control problems, the
true energy savings and control potential is realized by adding adjustable frequency drives.
With the proper sensor location, the addition of adjustable frequency drives allows the pumps to vary their speed to follow
the system curve instead of the pump curve.
This results in the elimination of wasted energy and eliminates most of the over-pressurization two-way valves can be
subjected to.
As the monitored loads are reached, the two-way valves close down. This increases the differential pressure measured
across the load and two-way valve. As this differential pressure starts to rise, the pump is slowed to maintain the control
head also called setpoint value. This setpoint value is calculated by summing up the pressure drop of the load and two-way
valve under design conditions.
Note that when running multiple pumps in parallel, they must run at the same speed to maximize energy savings, either
with individual dedicated drives or one running multiple pumps in parallel.
130BB454.10
P
Frequency
converter
3
CHILLER
CHILLER
3
Frequency
converter

2.8 Control Structures

2 2 2.8.1 Control Principle
Load sharing +
130BA193.14
LC Filter +
89(+) (5A) R+ Brake
L1 91 82 Resistor
R-
L2 92 81
U 96
L3 93
V 97
M
88(-) R inr Inrush W 98
Load sharing -
LC Filter -
P 14-50 Rfi Filter (5A)
Figure 2.23 Control Structures
The adjustable frequency drive is a high-performance unit for demanding applications. It can handle various kinds of motor
control principles such as U/f special motor mode and VVCplus and can handle normal squirrel cage asynchronous motors.
Short circuit behavior on this adjustable frequency drive depends on the three current transducers in the motor phases.
Select between open-loop and closed-loop in 1-00 Configuration Mode.
2.8.2 Control Structure Open-loop
P 4-13
130BB153.10
Motor speed
high limit [RPM] 100%
Reference
handling P 4-14
Remote Motor speed P 3-4* Ramp 1
reference high limit [Hz] P 3-5* Ramp 2 0% To motor
Remote control
Auto mode
Linked to hand/auto Reference
Ramp
Hand mode Local
Local P 4-11 100%

reference Motor speed
scaled to low limit [RPM]
RPM or Hz -100%
P 4-10
P 3-13 Motor speed
LCP Hand on, Reference P 4-12 direction
off and auto site Motor speed
on keys low limit [Hz]
Figure 2.24 Open-loop Structure
In the configuration shown in Figure 2.24, 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Open-loop. The resulting reference from the
reference handling system or the local reference is received and fed through the ramp limitation and speed limitation
before being sent to the motor control.
The output from the motor control is then limited by the maximum frequency limit.

2.8.3 PM/EC+ Motor Control 2.8.4 Sizing of Adjustable Frequency Drive

and PM motor 2 2
The Danfoss EC+ concept provides the possibility for using
high efficient PM motors in IEC standard enclosure types The low motor inductances of PM motors can cause
operated by Danfoss adjustable frequency drives. current ripples in the adjustable frequency drive.
The commissioning procedure is comparable to the
existing one for asynchronous (induction) motors by To select the right adjustable frequency drive for a given
utilizing the Danfoss VVCplus PM control strategy. PM motor, ensure that:
• The adjustable frequency drive can deliver the
Customer advantages: required power and current in all operating
• Free choice of motor technology (permanent conditions.
magnet or induction motor)
• The power rating of the adjustable frequency
• Installation and operation as known for induction drive is equal to or higher than the power rating
motors of the motor.
• Manufacturer independent when choosing system • Size the adjustable frequency drive for a constant
components (e.g., motors) 100% operating load with sufficient safety
margin.
• Best system efficiency by choosing best
components The current (A) and the typical power rating (kW) for a PM
motor can be found in chapter 9.1 Line Power Supply Tables
• Possible retrofit of existing installations
for different voltages.
• Power range: 1.5–30 hp [1.1–22 kW]
Current limitations:
• Currently only supported up to 30 hp [22 kW]
• Currently limited to non-salient type PM motors
• LC filters not supported together with PM motors
• Over Voltage Control algorithm is not supported

with PM motors
• Kinetic backup algorithm is not supported with

PM motors
• AMA algorithm is not supported with PM motors
• No missing motor phase detection
• No stall detection
• No ETR function

Sizing examples for nominal power rating

2 2 Example 1
• PM motor size: 1.5 kW / 2.9 A
• Line power: 3 x 400 V
Adjustable Typical [kW] Typical [hp] at Continuous Intermitted Continuous Intermitted

Frequency Drive 460 V [A] [A] [A] [A]
(3x380–440 V) (3x380–440 V) (3x441–480 V) (3x441–480 V)
P1K1 1.1 1.5 3.0 3.3 2.7 3.0
P1K5 1.5 2.0 4.1 4.5 3.4 3.7
Table 2.10 Sizing Data for 1.5 and 2 hp [1.1 and 1.5 kW] Adjustable Frequency Drives
The current rating of the PM motor (2.9 A) matches the current rating of both the 1.5 hp [1.1 kW] adjustable frequency
drive (3 A @ 400 V) and the 2 hp [1.5 kW] adjustable frequency drive (4.1 A @ 400 V). However, since the power rating of
the motor is 2 hp [1.5 kW], the 2 hp [1.5 kW] adjustable frequency drive is the correct choice.
Motor Adjustable Frequency Drive 2 hp [1.5 kW]

Power 2 hp [1.5 kW] 2 hp [1.5 kW]
Current 2.9 A 4.1 A @ 400V
Table 2.11 Correctly Sized Adjustable Frequency Drive
Example 2
• PM motor size: 7.5 hp [5.5 kW] / 12.5 A
• Line power: 3 x 400 V
Adjustable Typical [kW] Typical [hp] at Continuous Intermitted Continuous Intermitted

Frequency Drive 460 V [A] [A] [A] [A]
(3x380–440 V) (3x380–440 V) (3x441–480 V) (3x441–480 V)
P4K0 4.0 5.0 10.0 11.0 8.2 9.0
P5K5 5.5 7.5 13.0 14.3 11.0 12.1
Table 2.12 Sizing Data for 5 and 7.5 hp [4.0 and 5.5 kW] Adjustable Frequency Drives
The current rating of the PM motor (12.5 A) matches the current rating of the 7.5 hp [5.5 kW] adjustable frequency drive
(13 A @ 400 V), not the current rating of the 5 hp [4.0 kW] adjustable frequency drive (10 A @ 400 V). Since the power
rating of the motor is 7.5 hp [5.5 kW], the 7.5 hp [5.5 kW] adjustable frequency drive is the correct choice.
Motor Adjustable Frequency Drive 7.5 hp [5.5 kW]

Power 7.5 hp [5.5 kW] 7.5 hp [5.5 kW]
Current 12.5 A 13 A @ 400 V
Table 2.13 Correctly Sized Adjustable Frequency Drive

2.8.5 Local (Hand On) and Remote (Auto Local reference forces the configuration mode to open-
On) Control loop, independent on the setting of 1-00 Configuration
Mode.
2 2
The adjustable frequency drive can be operated manually
via the local control panel (LCP) or remotely via Local reference is restored at power-down.
analog/digital inputs or serial bus.
If allowed in 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP, 0-41 [Off] Key on 2.8.6 Control Structure Closed-loop
LCP, 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP, and 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP,
it is possible to start and stop the adjustable frequency The internal controller allows the adjustable frequency
drive by LCP using the [Hand On] and [Off] keys. Alarms drive to become an integral part of the controlled system.
can be reset via the [Reset] key. After pressing [Hand On], The adjustable frequency drive receives a feedback signal
the adjustable frequency drive goes into Hand Mode and from a sensor in the system. It then compares this
follows (as default) the local reference set by using feedback to a setpoint reference value and determines the
[▲] and [▼]. error, if any, between these two signals. It then adjusts the
speed of the motor to correct this error.
After pressing [Auto On], the adjustable frequency drive
goes into Auto mode and follows (as default) the remote For example, consider a pump application where the
reference. In this mode, it is possible to control the speed of a pump is to be controlled so that the static
adjustable frequency drive via the digital inputs and pressure in a pipe is constant. The desired static pressure
various serial interfaces (RS-485, USB, or an optional serial value is supplied to the adjustable frequency drive as the
communication bus). See more about starting, stopping, setpoint reference. A static pressure sensor measures the
changing ramps and parameter set-ups, etc.,in parameter actual static pressure in the pipe and supplies this to the
group 5-1* Digital Inputs or parameter group 8-5* Serial adjustable frequency drive as a feedback signal. If the
Communication. feedback signal is greater than the setpoint reference, the
adjustable frequency drive slows down to reduce the
pressure. In a similar way, if the pipe pressure is lower than
130BP046.10
the setpoint reference, the adjustable frequency drive

Hand Auto
on
Off
on
Reset automatically speed up to increase the pressure provided
by the pump.
Figure 2.25 Operation Keys
Hand Off 3-13 Reference Site Active Reference

Auto
LCP Keys
Hand Linked to Hand/ Local
Auto
Hand ⇒ Off Linked to Hand/ Local
Auto
Auto Linked to Hand/ Remote
Auto
Auto ⇒ Off Linked to Hand/ Remote
Auto
All keys Local Local
All keys Remote Remote
Table 2.14 Conditions for Either Local or Remote Reference
Table 2.14 shows under which conditions either the local

reference or the remote reference is active. One of them is
always active, but both cannot be active at the same time.

2 2
Figure 2.26 Block Diagram of Closed-loop Controller
While the default values for the adjustable frequency drive’s closed-loop controller often provides satisfactory performance,
the control of the system can often be optimized by adjusting some of the closed-loop controller’s parameters. It is also
possible to autotune the PI constants.
2.8.7 Feedback Handling
Figure 2.27 Block Diagram of Feedback Signal Processing

Feedback handling can be configured to work with 2.8.8 Feedback Conversion

applications requiring advanced control, such as multiple
setpoints and multiple feedbacks. Three types of control
2 2
In some applications, it may be useful to convert the
are common. feedback signal. One example of this is using a pressure
signal to provide flow feedback. Since the square root of
Single Zone, Single Setpoint pressure is proportional to flow, the square root of the
Single Zone, Single Setpoint is a basic configuration. pressure signal yields a value proportional to the flow. This
Setpoint 1 is added to any other reference (if any, see is shown in Figure 2.28.
Reference Handling) and the feedback signal is selected
using 20-20 Feedback Function.
Multi-zone, Single Setpoint
Multi-zone, Single Setpoint uses two or three feedback
sensors, but only one setpoint. Feedback can be added,
subtracted (only feedback 1 and 2) or averaged. In
addition, the maximum or minimum value may be used.
Setpoint 1 is used exclusively in this configuration.
If [5] Multi Setpoint Min is selected, the setpoint/feedback
pair with the largest difference controls the speed of the
adjustable frequency drive. [6] Multi Setpoint Max attempts
to keep all zones at or below their respective setpoints, Figure 2.28 Feedback Conversion
while [5] Multi Setpoint Min attempts to keep all zones at
or above their respective setpoints.
Example
A two-zone two setpoint application Zone 1 setpoint is
15 bar and the feedback is 5.5 bar. Zone 2 setpoint is
4.4 bar and the feedback is 4.6 bar. If [14] Multi Setpoint
Max is selected, Zone 1’s setpoint and feedback are sent to
the PID controller, since this has the smaller difference
(feedback is higher than setpoint, resulting in a negative
difference). If [13] Multi Setpoint Min is selected, Zone 2’s
setpoint and feedback is sent to the PID controller, since
this has the larger difference (feedback is lower than
setpoint, resulting in a positive difference).

2.8.9 Reference Handling

2 2
Details for Open-loop and Closed-loop operation
Figure 2.29 Block Diagram Showing Remote Reference

The remote reference is comprised of: 2.8.10 Example of Closed-loop PID Control
2 2
• Preset references.
• External references (analog inputs, pulse

frequency inputs, digital potentiometer inputs
and serial communication bus references).
• The preset relative reference.
• Feedback controlled setpoint.

Up to eight preset references can be programmed in the
adjustable frequency drive. The active preset reference can
be selected using digital inputs or the serial communi-
cations bus. The reference can also be supplied externally,
most commonly from an analog input. This external source
is selected by one of the three Reference Source Figure 2.30 Closed-loop Control for a Ventilation System
parameters (3-15 Reference 1 Source, 3-16 Reference 2 Source
and 3-17 Reference 3 Source). Digipot is a digital potenti-
ometer. This is also commonly called a Speed Up/Slow
In a ventilation system, the temperature is to be
Control or a Floating Point Control. To set it up, one digital
maintained at a constant value. The desired temperature is
input is programmed to increase the reference, while
set between 23–95 °F [-5–+35 °C] using a 0–10 V potenti-
another digital input is programmed to decrease the
ometer. Because this is a cooling application, if the
reference. A third digital input can be used to reset the
temperature is above the setpoint value, the speed of the
digipot reference. All reference resources and the bus
fan must be increased to provide more cooling air flow.
reference are added to produce the total external
The temperature sensor has a range of 14–104 °F
reference. The external reference, the preset reference or
[-10–+40 °C] and uses a two-wire transmitter to provide a
the sum of the two can be selected to be the active
4–20 mA signal. The output frequency range of the
reference. Finally, this reference can be scaled by using
adjustable frequency drive is 10 to 50 Hz.
3-14 Preset Relative Reference.
1. Start/Stop via switch connected between

The scaled reference is calculated as follows:
Y
terminals 12 (+24 V) and 18.
Reference = X + X ×
100
2. Temperature reference via a potentiometer
Where X is the external reference, the preset reference or
(23–95 °F [-5–+35 °C], 0 to 10 V) connected to
the sum of these and Y is 3-14 Preset Relative Reference in
terminals 50 (+10 V), 53 (input) and 55 (common).
[%].
3. Temperature feedback via transmitter (14–104 °F
If Y, 3-14 Preset Relative Reference is set to 0%, the [-10–+40 °C], 4–20 mA) connected to terminal 54.
reference is affected by the scaling. Switch S202 behind the LCP set to ON (current
input).

Function Para-- Setting

2 2 Check that the ramp
meter
3-41 60 s
settings are within 3-42 60 s
capabilities of the Depends on motor/load
adjustable frequency drive size!
and allowed application Also active in hand
operating specifications. mode.
Prohibit the motor from 4-10 [0] Clockwise
reversing (if necessary).
Set acceptable limits for 4-12 10 Hz, Motor min speed
the motor speed. 4-14 50 Hz, Motor max speed
4-19 50 Hz, Drive max output
frequency
Switch from open-loop to 1-00 [3] Closed-loop
closed-loop.
4) Configure the feedback to the PID controller.
Select the appropriate 20-12 [71] Bar
reference/feedback unit.
5) Configure the setpoint reference for the PID controller.
Set acceptable limits for 20-13 0 Bar
the setpoint reference. 20-14 10 Bar
Select current or voltage by switches S201 / S202.
6) Scale the analog inputs used for setpoint reference and
Figure 2.31 Example of Closed-loop PID Control feedback.
Scale Analog Input 53 for 6-10 0V
the pressure range of the 6-11 10 V (default)
potentiometer (0–10 Bar, 6-14 0 Bar
2.8.11 Programming Order
0–10 V). 6-15 10 Bar
Scale Analog Input 54 for 6-22 4 mA
NOTICE! pressure sensor (0–10 Bar, 6-23 20 mA (default)
In this example, it is assumed that an induction motor is 4–20 mA). 6-24 0 Bar
used, i.e., that 1-10 Motor Construction = [0] Asynchron. 6-25 10 Bar
7) Tune the PID controller parameters.
Function Para-- Setting Adjust the adjustable 20-93 See Optimization of the
meter frequency drive’s closed- 20-94 PID Controller, below
1) Make sure the motor runs properly. Do the following: loop controller, if needed.
Set the motor parameters 1-2* As specified by motor 8) Save to finish.
using nameplate data. nameplate Save the parameter 0-50 [1] All to LCP
Run Automatic Motor 1-29 [1] Enable complete AMA settings to the LCP for
Adaptation. and then run the AMA safekeeping.
function
2) Check that the motor is running in the right direction. Table 2.15 Programming Order
Run Motor Rotation 1-28 If the motor runs in the

Check. wrong direction, remove
power temporarily and
reverse two of the motor
phases
3) Make sure the adjustable frequency drive limits are set to safe
values.

2.8.12 Tuning the Adjustable Frequency

Drive Closed-loop Controller 2 2
Once the adjustable frequency drive's closed-loop
controller has been set up, the performance of the
controller should be tested. In many cases, its performance
may be acceptable using the default values of 20-93 PID
Proportional Gain and 20-94 PID Integral Time. However, in
some cases it may be helpful to optimize these parameter
values to provide faster system response while still
controlling speed overshoot.
2.8.13 Manual PID Adjustment
1. Start the motor.

2. Set 20-93 PID Proportional Gain to 0.3 and
increase it until the feedback signal begins to
oscillate. If necessary, start and stop the
adjustable frequency drive or make step changes
in the setpoint reference to attempt to cause
oscillation. Next reduce the PID proportional gain
until the feedback signal stabilizes. Then reduce
the proportional gain by 40–60%.
3. Set 20-94 PID Integral Time to 20 s and reduce it
until the feedback signal begins to oscillate. If
necessary, start and stop the adjustable frequency
drive or make step changes in the setpoint
reference to attempt to cause oscillation. Next,
increase the PID integral time until the feedback
signal stabilizes. Then increase of the integral
time by 15–50%.
4. 20-95 PID Differentiation Time should only be used
for very fast-acting systems. The typical value is
25% of 20-94 PID Integral Time. The differential
function should only be used when the setting of
the proportional gain and the integral time has
been fully optimized. Make sure that oscillations
of the feedback signal are sufficiently dampened
by the low-pass filter for the feedback signal
(parameters 6-16, 6-26, 5-54 or 5-59 as required).

2.9 General Aspects of EMC

2 2 Electrical interference is usually conducted at frequencies in the range 150 kHz to 30 MHz. Airborne interference from the
adjustable frequency drive system in the range 30 MHz to 1 GHz is generated from the inverter, motor cable, and the
motor.
As shown in Figure 2.32, capacitance in the motor cable coupled with a high dU/dt from the motor voltage generate
leakage currents.
The use of a shielded motor cable increases the leakage current (see Figure 2.32) because shielded cables have higher
capacitance to ground than non-shielded cables. If the leakage current is not filtered, it causes greater interference on the
line power in the radio frequency range below approximately 5 MHz. Since the leakage current (I1) is carried back to the
unit through the shield (I3), there is in principle only a small electro-magnetic field (I4) from the shielded motor cable
according to Figure 2.32.
The shield reduces the radiated interference, but increases the low-frequency interference in the line power supply. Connect
the motor cable shield to the adjustable frequency drive enclosure as well as on the motor enclosure. This is best done by
using integrated shield clamps so as to avoid twisted shield ends (pigtails) Pigtails increase the shield impedance at higher
frequencies, which reduces the shield effect and increases the leakage current (I4).
If a shielded cable is used for relay, control cable, signal interface and brake, mount the shield on the enclosure at both
ends. In some situations, however, it is necessary to break the shield to avoid current loops.
175ZA062.12
z L1 CS CS
U
I1
z L2 V
z L3 W
z PE PE I2 CS
1
I3
2
CS CS CS
I4 I4
3 4 5 6
Figure 2.32 Situation that Generates Leakage Currents
1 Ground wire 4 Adjustable frequency drive

2 Shield 5 Shielded motor cable
3 AC line power supply 6 Motor
If the shield is to be placed on a mounting plate for the adjustable frequency drive, the mounting plate must be made of
metal, to convey the shield currents back to the unit. Moreover, ensure good electrical contact from the mounting plate
through the mounting screws to the adjustable frequency driver chassis.
When non-shielded cables are used, some emission requirements are not complied with, although most immunity
requirements are observed.

To reduce the interference level from the entire system When the generic (conducted) emission standards are used
(unit+installation), make motor and brake cables as short
as possible. Avoid placing cables with a sensitive signal
the adjustable frequency drives are required to comply
with the following limits.
2 2
level alongside motor and brake cables. Radio interference
higher than 50 MHz (airborne) is especially generated by Conducted
the control electronics. See for more information on EMC. emission
requirement
Environment Generic standard
2.9.1 Emission Requirements according to the
limits given in
According to the EMC product standard for adjustable EN 55011
speed adjustable frequency drives EN/IEC 61800-3:2004, First EN/IEC 61000-6-3 Emission Class B
the EMC requirements depend on the intended use of the environment standard for residential,
adjustable frequency drive. Four categories are defined in (home and commercial and light
the EMC product standard. The definitions of the four office) industrial environments.
categories together with the requirements for line power Second EN/IEC 61000-6-4 Emission Class A Group 1
supply voltage conducted emissions are given in environment standard for industrial
Table 2.17. (industrial environments.
environment)
Conducted
Table 2.18 Limits at Generic Emission Standards
emission
requirement
Category Definition according to 2.9.2 EMC Test Results
the limits
given in EN The following test results have been obtained using a
55011 system with an adjustable frequency drive, a shielded
C1 Adjustable frequency drives Class B control cable, a control box with potentiometer, as well as
installed in the first environment a motor and shielded motor cable at nominal switching
(home and office) with a supply frequency. In Table 2.19, the maximum motor cable lengths
voltage less than 1000 V. for compliance are stated.
C2 Adjustable frequency drives Class A Group 1
installed in the first environment
(home and office) with a supply
voltage less than 1000 V, which are
neither plug-in nor movable and
are intended to be installed and
commissioned by a professional.
C3 Adjustable frequency drives Class A Group 2
installed in the second environment
(industrial) with a supply voltage
lower than 1000 V.
C4 Adjustable frequency drives No limit line.
installed in the second environment An EMC plan
with a supply voltage equal to or should be
above 1000 V or rated current made.
equal to or above 400 A or
intended for use in complex
systems.
Table 2.17 Emission Requirements

RFI filter type Conducted emission Radiated emission

2 2 Cable length (ft [m]) Cable length (ft [m])
Standards and EN 55011 Class B Class A Class A Class B Class A Class A
requirements Housing, Group 1 Group 2 Housing, Group 1 Group 2
trades and Industrial Industrial trades and Industrial Industrial
light environ- environ- light environment environment
industries ment ment industries
EN/IEC 61800-3 Category C1 Category C2 Category C3 Category C1 Category C2 Category C3
First First Second First First Second
environment environment environment environment environment environment
Home and Home and Industrial home and home and Industrial
office office office office
H1
1.5–30 hp [1.1–22 kW]
FC 102 164 [50] 492 [150] 492 [150] No Yes N/A
220–240 V
1.5–60 hp [1.1–45 kW]
164 [50] 492 [150] 492 [150] No Yes Yes
200–240 V
1.5–125 hp [1.1–90 kW]
164 [50] 492 [150] 492 [150] No Yes Yes
380–480 V
H2
FC 102 1.5–30 hp [1.1–22 kW]
No No 82 [25] No No N/A
220–240 V
1.5–5 hp [1.1–3.7 kW]
No No 16.4 [5] No No No
200–240 V
7.5–60 hp [5.5–45 kW]
No No 82 [25] No No No
200–240 V
1.5–10 hp [1.1–7.5 kW]
No No 16.4 [5] No No No
380–500 V
15–125 hp [11–90 kW]
380–500 V4)
15–30 hp [11–22 kW]
525–690 V1, 4)
40–125 hp [30–90 kW]
525–690 V2, 4)
H3
1.5–60 hp [1.1–45 kW]
FC 102 33 [10] 164 [50] 250 [75] No Yes Yes
200–240 V
1.5–125 hp [1.1–90 kW]
33 [10] 164 [50] 250 [75] No Yes Yes
380–480 V
H4
15–40 hp [11–30 kW]
FC 102 No 330 [100] 330 [100] No Yes Yes
525–690 V1)
50–125 hp [37–90 kW]
No 492 [150] 492 [150] No Yes Yes
525–690 V2)
Hx3)
1.5–125 hp [1.1–90 kW]
FC 102 No No No No No No
525–600 V
Table 2.19 EMC Test Results (Emission)

1) Enclosure Type B
2) Enclosure Type C
3) Hx versions can be used according to EN/IEC 61800-3 category C4

4) T7, 50–125 hp [37–90 kW] complies with class A group 1 with 82 ft [25 m] motor cable. Some restrictions for the installation apply (contact
Danfoss for details).
HX, H1, H2, H3, H4 or H5 is defined in the type code pos. 16-17 for EMC filters
2 2
HX - No EMC filters built in the adjustable frequency drive (600 V units only)
H1 - Integrated EMC filter. Fulfill EN 55011 Class A1/B and EN/IEC 61800-3 Category 1/2
H2 - No additional EMC filter. Fulfill EN 55011 Class A2 and EN/IEC 61800-3 Category 3
H3 - Integrated EMC filter. Fulfill EN 55011 class A1/B and EN/IEC 61800-3 Category 1/2
H4 - Integrated EMC filter. Fulfill EN 55011 class A1 and EN/IEC 61800-3 Category 2
H5 – Marine versions. Fulfill same emissions levels as H2 versions
2.9.3 General Aspects of Harmonics Emission
An adjustable frequency drive takes up a non-sinusoidal current from the line power, which increases the input current IRMS.
A non-sinusoidal current is transformed with a Fourier analysis and split into sine-wave currents with different frequencies,
that is, different harmonic currents In with 50 Hz basic frequency:
I1 I5 I7
Hz 50 250 350
Table 2.20 Harmonic Currents
The harmonics do not affect the power consumption directly, but they do increase the heat losses in the installation
(transformer, cables). So, in plants with a high percentage of rectifier load, maintain harmonic currents at a low level to
avoid overload of the transformer and high temperature in the cables.
175HA034.10
Figure 2.33 Harmonic Currents
NOTICE!
Some of the harmonic currents might disturb communication equipment connected to the same transformer or cause
resonance with power-factor correction batteries.
To ensure low harmonic currents, the adjustable frequency drive is equipped with intermediate circuit coils as standard. This
normally reduces the input current IRMS by 40%.
The voltage distortion on the line power supply voltage depends on the size of the harmonic currents multiplied by the line
power impedance for the frequency in question. The total voltage distortion THD is calculated based on the individual
voltage harmonics using this formula:
2 2 2
THD % = U + U + ... + U
5 7 N
(UN% of U)

2.9.4 Harmonics Emission Requirements Compliance with various system level guidelines:
2 2 The harmonic current data in Table 2.22 are given in
accordance with IEC/EN61000-3-12 with reference to the
Equipment connected to the public supply network
Power Drive Systems product standard. The data may be
Options Definition used to calculate the harmonic currents' influence on the
1 IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Class A for 3-phase balanced power supply system and to document compliance with
equipment (for professional equipment only up to relevant regional guidelines: IEEE 519 -1992; G5/4.
1 kW total power).
2 IEC/EN 61000-3-12 Equipment 16 A-75 A and profes- 2.9.6 Immunity Requirements
sional equipment as from 1 kW up to 16 A phase
current. The immunity requirements for adjustable frequency drives
depend on the environment where they are installed. The
Table 2.21 Connected Equipment
requirements for the industrial environment are higher
than the requirements for the home and office
2.9.5 Harmonics Test Results (Emission) environment. All Danfoss adjustable frequency drives
comply with the requirements for the industrial
Power sizes up to PK75 in T2 and T4 comply with IEC/EN environment and consequently comply also with the lower
61000-3-2 Class A. Power sizes from P1K1 and up to P18K requirements for home and office environment with a
in T2 and up to P90K in T4 comply with IEC/EN large safety margin.
61000-3-12, Table 4. Power sizes P110 - P450 in T4 also
comply with IEC/EN 61000-3-12 even though not required To document immunity against electrical interference from
because currents are above 75 A. electrical phenomena, the following immunity tests have
been made in accordance with following basic standards:
Individual harmonic current In/I1 (%)
I5 I7 I11 I13
• EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 61000-4-2): Electrostatic
Actual discharges (ESD): Simulation of electrostatic
40 20 10 8
(typical) discharges from human beings.
Limit for
Rsce≥120
40 25 15 10 • EN 61000-4-3 (IEC 61000-4-3): Incoming electro-
magnetic field radiation, amplitude modulated
Harmonic current distortion factor (%)
simulation of the effects of radar and radio
THD PWHD
communication equipment as well as mobile
Actual communications equipment.
46 45
(typical)
Limit for • EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 61000-4-4): Electrical
48 46 interference: Simulation of interference brought
Rsce≥120
about by switching a contactor, relay or similar
Table 2.22 Harmonics Test Results (Emission) devices.
• EN 61000-4-5 (IEC 61000-4-5): Surge transients:

If the short-circuit power of the supply Ssc is greater than Simulation of transients brought about, e.g., by
or equal to: lightning that strikes near installations.
SSC = 3 × RSCE × Uline power × Iequ = 3 × 120 × 400 × Iequ

• EN 61000-4-6 (IEC 61000-4-6): RF Common
mode: Simulation of the effect from radio-
at the interface point between the user’s supply and the
transmission equipment joined by connection
public system (Rsce).
cables.
See Table 2.23.
It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the
equipment to ensure that the equipment is connected
only to a supply with a short-circuit power Ssc greater than
or equal to what is specified above. If necessary, consult
the distribution network operator.
Other power sizes can be connected to the public supply
network by consultation with the distribution network
operator.

Basic standard Electrical Surge ESD Radiated electromagnetic RF common

interference
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-5 IEC
61000-4-2
field
IEC 61000-4-3
mode voltage
IEC 61000-4-6
2 2
Acceptance criterion B B B A A
Voltage range: 200–240 V, 380–500 V, 525–600 V, 525–690 V
Line 2 kV/2 Ω DM
4 kV CM — — 10 VRMS
4 kV/12 Ω CM
Motor 4 kV CM 4 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Brake 4 kV CM 4 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Load sharing 4 kV CM 4 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Control wires 2 kV CM 2 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Standard bus 2 kV CM 2 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Relay wires 2 kV CM 2 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Application and serial
2 kV CM 2 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
communication options
LCP cable 2 kV CM 2 kV/2 Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
External 24 V DC 0.5 kV/2 Ω DM
2 V CM — — 10 VRMS
1 kV/12 Ω CM
Enclosure 8 kV AD
— — 10 V/m —
6 kV CD
Table 2.23 EMC Immunity Form

1) Injection on cable shield
AD: Air Discharge
CD: Contact Discharge
CM: Common mode
DM: Differential mode
2.10 Galvanic Isolation (PELV)

2.10.1 PELV - Protective Extra Low Voltage
PELV offers protection by way of extra low voltage. Protection against electric shock is ensured when the electrical supply is
of the PELV type and the installation is made as described in local/national regulations on PELV supplies.
All control terminals and relay terminals 01-03/04-06 comply with PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage), with the exception of
the grounded Delta leg above 400 V.
Galvanic (ensured) isolation is obtained by fulfilling requirements for higher isolation and by providing the relevant
creepage/clearance distances. These requirements are described in the EN 61800-5-1 standard.
The components that make up the electrical isolation, as described below, also comply with the requirements for higher
isolation and the relevant test as described in EN 61800-5-1. The PELV galvanic isolation can be shown in six locations (see
Figure 2.34):
To maintain PELV all connections made to the control terminals must be PELV, e.g., thermistor must be reinforced/double
insulated.

2.11 Ground Leakage Current

2 2
1. Power supply (SMPS) incl. signal isolation of UDC,
indicating the voltage of intermediate DC link
Follow national and local codes regarding protective
circuit.
grounding of equipment with a leakage current > 3.5 mA.
2. Gate drive that runs the IGBTs (trigger Adjustable frequency drive technology implies high
transformers/opto-couplers). frequency switching at high power. This generates a
3. Current transducers. leakage current in the ground connection. A fault current
in the adjustable frequency drive at the output power
4. Opto-coupler, brake module.
terminals might contain a DC component which can
5. Internal soft-charge, RFI and temperature charge the filter capacitors and cause a transient ground
measurement circuits. current.
6. Custom relays. The ground leakage current is made up from several
contributions and depends on various system configu-
7. Mechanical brake. rations including RFI filtering, shielded motor cables and
adjustable frequency drive power.
130BC968.10
130BB955.12
Leakage current
7
6 5 4 1 2
b
Motor cable length
a b
Figure 2.35 Cable Length and Power Size Influence on
Leakage Current. Pa > Pb
Figure 2.34 Galvanic Isolation
130BB956.12
Leakage current
The functional galvanic isolation (a and b in drawing) is for

the 24 V backup option and for the RS-485 standard bus THVD=0%
interface. THVD=5%
WARNING
Installation at high altitude:
380–500 V, enclosure types A, B and C: At altitudes
above 6,600 ft [2 km], contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
525–690 V: At altitudes above 6,600 ft [2 km], contact Figure 2.36 Line Distortion Influences Leakage Current
Danfoss regarding PELV.
WARNING NOTICE!
Touching the electrical parts could be fatal - even after When a filter is used, turn off 14-50 RFI 1 when charging
the equipment has been disconnected from line power. the filter to avoid that a high leakage current makes the
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been RCD switch.
disconnected, such as load sharing (linkage of DC
intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for
kinetic backup.
Before touching any electrical parts, wait at least the
amount of time indicated in Table 2.19.
Shorter time is allowed only if indicated on the
nameplate for the specific unit.

EN/IEC61800-5-1 (Power Drive System Product Standard) 2.12 Brake Function

requires special care if the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.
Grounding must be reinforced in one of the following 2.12.1 Selection of Brake Resistor
2 2
ways:
In certain applications, such as in tunnels or underground
• Ground wire (terminal 95) of at least 0.016 in2 railway station ventilation systems, it is desirable to bring
[10 mm2] the motor to a stop more rapidly than can be achieved
through controlling via ramp-down or free-wheeling. In
• Two separate ground wires both complying with
such applications, dynamic braking with a brake resistor
the dimensioning rules
may be utilized. Using a brake resistor ensures that the
See EN/IEC61800-5-1 and EN50178 for further information. energy is absorbed in the resistor and not in the
Using RCDs
Where residual current devices (RCDs), also known as If the amount of kinetic energy transferred to the resistor
ground leakage circuit breakers (GLCBs), are used, comply in each braking period is not known, the average power
with the following: can be calculated on the basis of the cycle time and
braking time, also known as the intermitted duty cycle.
• Use RCDs of type B only which are capable of
The resistor intermittent duty cycle is an indication of the
detecting AC and DC currents
duty cycle at which the resistor is active. Figure 2.39 shows
• Use RCDs with a soft-charge delay to prevent a typical braking cycle.
faults due to transient ground currents
• Dimension RCDs according to the system configu- The intermittent duty cycle for the resistor is calculated as
ration and environmental considerations follows:
RCD with low f cut-
130BB958.12
Leakage current
Duty Cycle = tb / T
RCD with high f cut-
T = cycle time in seconds

tb is the braking time in seconds (as part of the total cycle
50 Hz 150 Hz f sw Frequency
Mains 3rd harmonics Cable time)
Figure 2.37 Main Contributions to Leakage Current
130BA167.10
Load
130BB957.11
Leakage current [mA]
100 Hz
Speed
2 kHz
100 kHz
ta tc tb to ta tc tb to ta
Time
Figure 2.39 Intermittent Duty Cycle for the Resistor
Figure 2.38 The Influence of the Cut-off Frequency of the
RCD on What Is Responded to/Measured
Danfoss offers brake resistors with duty cycle of 5%, 10%
and 40% suitable for use with the VLT® HVAC Drive
See also RCD Application Note, MN90G. adjustable frequency drive series. If a 10% duty cycle
resistor is applied, it is capable of absorbing braking
energy up to 10% of the cycle time, with the remaining
90% being used to dissipate heat from the resistor.
For further selection advice, contact Danfoss.

2.12.2 Brake Resistor Calculation NOTICE!

2 2 The brake resistor circuit resistance selected should not
The brake resistance is calculated as shown: be higher than that recommended by Danfoss. If a brake
resistor with a higher ohmic value is selected, the
U2
dc braking torque may not be achieved because there is a
Rbr Ω =
Ppeak risk that the adjustable frequency drive cuts out for
where safety reasons.
Ppeak = Pmotor x Mbr x ηmotor x η[W]
Table 2.24 Brake Resistor Calculation

NOTICE!
If a short circuit in the brake transistor occurs, power
As can be seen, the brake resistance depends on the dissipation in the brake resistor is only prevented by
intermediate circuit voltage (UDC). using a line switch or contactor to disconnect the line
The brake function of the adjustable frequency drive is power for the adjustable frequency drive. (The contactor
settled in three areas of the line power supply: can be controlled by the adjustable frequency drive).
Size [V] Brake

active [V]
Warning before
cut-out [V]
Cut-out (trip)
[V]
WARNING
Do not touch the brake resistor, as it can get very hot
3x200–240 390 (UDC) 405 410
during/after braking.
3x380–480 778 810 820
3x525–690 1084 1109 1130
2.12.3 Control with Brake Function
Table 2.25 Brake Function Settled in Three Areas of Line
Power Supply The brake is protected against short-circuiting of the brake
resistor, and the brake transistor is monitored to ensure
NOTICE! that short-circuiting of the transistor is detected. A relay/
digital output can be used for protecting the brake resistor
Make sure that the brake resistor can cope with a
against overloading in connection with a fault in the
voltage of 410 V, 820 V or 975 V, unless Danfoss brake
resistors are used.
In addition, the brake enables reading out the momentary
power and the mean power for the latest 120 s. The brake
Danfoss recommends the brake resistance Rrec, i.e., one can also monitor the power energizing and ensure that it
that guarantees that the is able to brake at the highest does not exceed the limit selected in 2-12 Brake Power
braking torque (Mbr(%)) of 110%. The formula can be Limit (kW). In 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring, select the
written as: function to carry out when the power transmitted to the
brake resistor exceeds the limit set in 2-12 Brake Power
U2
dc x 100 Limit (kW).
R rec Ω =
Pmotor x Mbr % x x motor
ηmotor is typically at 0.90
η is typically at 0.98
NOTICE!
Monitoring the braking energy is not a safety function; a
thermal switch is required for that purpose. The brake
For 200 V, 480 V and 600 V adjustable frequency drives,
resistor circuit is not ground leakage protected.
Rrec at 160% braking torque is written as:
107780 Overvoltage control (OVC) (exclusive brake resistor) can be

200V : Rrec = Ω
Pmotor selected as an alternative brake function in 2-17 Over-
375300
480V : Rrec = Ω1 voltage Control. This function is active for all units. The
Pmotor
480V : Rrec =
428914
Ω2
function ensures that a trip can be avoided, if the DC link
Pmotor
voltage increases. This is done by increasing the output
630137
600V : Rrec = Ω
Pmotor frequency to limit the voltage from the DC link. It is a
832664 useful function, e.g., if the ramp-down time is too short
690V : Rrec = Ω
Pmotor
since tripping of the adjustable frequency drive is avoided.
1) For adjustable frequency drives ≤ 7.5 kW shaft output
In this situation, the ramp-down time is extended.
2) For adjustable frequency drives > 7.5 kW shaft output

NOTICE! • Back-EMF from PM motor operation. If coasted at

OVC cannot be activated when running a PM motor
high RPM, the PM motor back-EMF may
potentially exceed the maximum voltage
2 2
(when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM non salient
tolerance of the adjustable frequency drive and
SPM).
cause damage. To help prevent this, the value of
4-19 Max Output Frequency is automatically
2.12.4 Brake Resistor Cabling limited based on an internal calculation based on
the value of 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM,
EMC (twisted cables/shielding) 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed and 1-39 Motor Poles.
Twist the wires to reduce the electrical noise from the If it is possible that the motor may overspeed
wires between the brake resistor and the adjustable (e.g., due to excessive windmilling effects),
frequency drive. Danfoss recommends using a brake resistor.
For enhanced EMC performance, use a metal shield.
WARNING
2.13 Extreme Running Conditions The adjustable frequency drive must be equipped with a
brake chopper.
Short Circuit (Motor Phase – Phase)
The adjustable frequency drive is protected against short
circuits by current measurement in each of the three The control unit may attempt to correct the ramp if
motor phases or in the DC link. A short circuit between possible (2-17 Over-voltage Control).
two output phases causes an overcurrent in the inverter. The inverter turns off to protect the transistors and the
The inverter is turned off individually when the short intermediate circuit capacitors when a certain voltage level
circuit current exceeds the permitted value is reached.
(Alarm 16 Trip Lock). See 2-10 Brake Function and 2-17 Over-voltage Control to
To protect the adjustable frequency drive against a short select the method used for controlling the intermediate
circuit at the load sharing and brake outputs, see the circuit voltage level.
design guidelines.
NOTICE!
Switching on the output OVC cannot be activated when running a PM motor
Switching on the output between the motor and the (when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM non
adjustable frequency drive is permitted. Fault messages salient SPM).
may appear. Enable flying start to catch a spinning motor.
Line drop-out
Motor-generated overvoltage During a line drop-out, the adjustable frequency drive
The voltage in the intermediate circuit is increased when keeps running until the intermediate circuit voltage drops
the motor acts as a generator. This occurs in following below the minimum stop level, which is typically 15%
cases: below the adjustable frequency drive's lowest rated supply
voltage. The AC line voltage before the drop-out and the
• The load drives the motor (at constant output motor load determine how long it takes for the inverter to
frequency from the adjustable frequency drive), coast.
i.e., the load generates energy.
Static overload in VVCplus mode
• During deceleration (ramp-down) if the moment When the adjustable frequency drive is overloaded (the
of inertia is high, the friction is low and the ramp- torque limit in 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode/4-17 Torque
down time is too short for the energy to be Limit Generator Mode is reached), the controls reduces the
dissipated as a loss in the adjustable frequency output frequency to reduce the load.
drive, the motor and the installation. If the overload is excessive, a current may occur that
makes the adjustable frequency drive cut out after approx-
• Incorrect slip compensation setting may cause
imately 5-10 s.
higher DC link voltage.
Operation within the torque limit is limited in time (0–60 s)
in 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit.

2.13.1 Motor Thermal Protection

2 2
This is the way Danfoss is protecting the motor from being
overheated. It is an electronic feature that simulates a
bimetal relay based on internal measurements.
The characteristic is shown in Figure 2.40
t [s]
175ZA052.11
2000
1000
600
500
400
300
200
100 fOUT = 1 x f M,N

Figure 2.41 The Thermistor Cut-out
fOUT = 2 x f M,N
60
50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N
40
30
Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:
20
Example: The adjustable frequency drive trips when the
IM motor temperature is too high.
10
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN Parameter set-up:
Figure 2.40 The X-axis show the ratio between Imotor and Imotor Set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip
nominal. The Y-axis is showing the time in seconds before the Set 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input 33
ETR cuts off and trips the adjustable frequency drive. The
curves show the characteristic nominal speed at twice the
130BA151.11
+24V
GND
nominal speed and at 0.2x the nominal speed. OFF

B
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
At lower speeds, the ETR cuts off at lower levels due to

reduced cooling of the motor. In that way, the motors are
ON
protected from being overheated even at low speeds. The PTC / Thermistor
<6.6 k Ω >10.8 k Ω R
ETR feature calculates the motor temperature based on the
actual current and speed. The calculated temperature is Figure 2.42 Using a Digital Input and 24 V as Power Supply
visible as a readout parameter in 16-18 Motor Thermal in
the adjustable frequency drive.
Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply:
The thermistor cut-out value is > 3 kΩ. Example: The adjustable frequency drive trips when the
motor temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the motor for
Set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip
winding protection.
Set 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input 33
Motor protection can be implemented using a range of

techniques: PTC sensor in motor windings; mechanical
thermal switch (Klixon type); or Electronic Thermal Relay
(ETR).

Summary
+10V
130BA152.10
39 42 50 53 54 55
With the torque limit feature the motor is protected for
being overloaded independent of the speed. With the ETR,
2 2
the motor is protected from being overheated and there is
OFF no need for any further motor protection. That means
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37 when the motor is heated up, the ETR timer controls for
how long time the motor can be running at the high
temperature before it is stopped to prevent overheating. If
the motor is overloaded without reaching the temperature
ON where the ETR shuts off the motor, the torque limit
R
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.7 kΩ protects the motor and application for becoming
Figure 2.43 Using a Digital Input and 10 V as Power Supply overloaded.
ETR is activated in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection and is

Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply: controlled in 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode. The time
Example: The adjustable frequency drive trips when the before the torque limit warning trips the adjustable
motor temperature is too high. frequency drive is set in 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit.
Parameter set-up:
Set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip
Set 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog Input 54
Do not select a reference source.
Figure 2.44 Using an Analog Input and 10 V as Power Supply
Input Supply Voltage V Threshold

Digital/analog Cut-out Values Cut-out Values
Digital 24 < 6.6 kΩ - > 10.8 kΩ
Digital 10 < 800 Ω - > 2.7 kΩ
Analog 10 < 3.0 kΩ - > 3.0 kΩ
Table 2.26 Threshold Cut-out Values
NOTICE!
Ensure that the chosen supply voltage follows the
specification of the thermistor element utilized.

Selection Design Guide
3 Selection
3 3 3.1 Options and Accessories
130BA707.10
XX380-4 x0-U 20 MA
3x T: IS/I DE
XN80V in 0 Tamb RK
O AS IN
U
CH ADE
1150/60 -1000HMax
3
M
00Hz 14 z 16 45C/1
P
CAEE MA MAN ING/“Fran QUIPMTUPE IN
N
S IR
.9 .0 13
U
A A F
VO
TI AL / RL / Fra : tekst” NT UL
NU UA
Wtored 76x1 1L CONFOR PR
11
S
N:CD andnsk tek (4 min

AR cha 342 TRO EFU
.1
Danfoss offers a wide range of options and accessories for
kV
A
N rge 61 L E SE
LIS DU AN ION
TE STR UA S
IN E M AT
hig st
D IA L
SE PL
h
AP
le
ak
sk
ag
IC
e
cu
rre
nt
.)
adjustable frequency drives.
E
3.1.1 Mounting Option Modules in Slot B
Disconnect power to the adjustable frequency drive. A
For A2 and A3 enclosure types:

B
1. Remove the LCP, the terminal cover, and the LCP

frame from the adjustable frequency drive.
2. Fit the MCB1xx option card into slot B. D
3. Connect the control cables and fasten the cables
LCP
with the enclosed cable strips.
Frame
Remove the knockout in the extended LCP frame
delivered in the option set so that the option fits
under the extended LCP frame. Figure 3.1 A2, A3 and B3 Enclosure Types
4. Fit the extended LCP frame and terminal cover.
5. Fit the LCP or blind cover in the extended LCP
130BA708.10
frame. LCP
Cradle DC-
6. Connect power to the adjustable frequency drive. DC+
7. Set up the input/output functions in the

corresponding parameters, as mentioned in
chapter 9.2 General Specifications.
61 6
39 42 50
53 5
For B1, B2, C1 and C2 enclosure types:

Remove
jumper
to activate
Safe Stop
12 13
18 19
27 28
32 38
2
9Ø
9Ø
1. Remove the LCP and the LCP cradle.

2. Fit the MCB 1xx option card into slot B. Figure 3.2 A5, B1, B2, B4, C1, C2, C3 and C4 Enclosure Types
3. Connect the control cables and fasten the cables
with the enclosed cable strips.
4. Fit the cradle.
5. Fit the LCP.

3.1.2 General Purpose I/O Module MCB 101 If the digital inputs 7, 8 or 9 are to be switched by use of
the internal 24 V power supply (terminal 9) the connection
MCB 101 is used for extension of the number of digital between terminal 1 and 5 which is shown in Figure 3.4 has
and analog inputs and outputs of the adjustable frequency to be established.
drive.
Control card (FC 100/200/300)
3 3
130BA209.10
MCB 101 must be fitted into slot B in the adjustable
CPU
frequency drive. Contents: 0V 24V
• MCB 101 option module
CAN BUS
General Purpose
I/O option MCB 101
• Extended LCP frame

CPU
• Terminal cover 0V 24V
FC Series DIG IN DIG & ANALOG

130BA208.10
MCB 101
RIN= ANALOG IN RIN=
General Purpose I/O B slot 5kohm OUT 10kohm
Code No. 130BXXXX
0/4-20mA
SW. ver. XX.XX
COM DIN
0/24VDC
0/24VDC
GND(1)
GND(2)
DOUT3
DOUT4
AOUT2
DIN7
DIN8
DIN9
AIN3
AIN4
GND(1)
GND(2)
DOUT3
DOUT4
AOUT2
24V
COM
DIN7
DIN8
DIN9
AIN3
AIN4
24V
DIN
X30/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X30/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 3.3
>600 ohm
<500 ohm
0-10
VDC
>600 ohm
Galvanic isolation in the MCB 101 PLC
(PNP) 0-10
Digital/analog inputs are galvanically isolated from other VDC
inputs/outputs on the MCB 101 and in the control card of
0V 24V DC
the adjustable frequency drive. Digital/analog outputs in
the MCB 101 are galvanically isolated from other inputs/
outputs on the MCB 101, but not from these on the PLC
(NPN)
control card of the adjustable frequency drive.
24V DC 0V
Figure 3.4 Principle Diagram

3.1.3 Digital Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4
Number of Voltage level Voltage levels Tolerance Max. Input impedance

digital inputs
3 3 3 0–24 V DC PNP type: ± 28 V continuous Approx. 5 kΩ
Common = 0 V ± 37 V in minimum 10 s
Logic “0”: Input < 5 V DC
Logic “0”: Input > 10 V DC
NPN type:
Common = 24 V
Logic “0”: Input > 19 V DC
Logic “0”: Input < 14 V DC
Table 3.1 Parameters for set-up: 5-16, 5-17 and 5-18
3.1.4 Analog Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12
Number of analog voltage inputs Standardized input signal Tolerance Resolution Max. Input impedance
2 0–10 V DC ± 20 V continuously 10 bits Approx. 5 KΩ
Table 3.2 Parameters for set-up: 6-3*, 6-4* and 16-76
3.1.5 Digital Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7
Number of digital outputs Output level Tolerance Max.impedance

2 0 or 2 V DC ±4V ≥ 600 Ω
Table 3.3 Parameters for set-up: 5-32 and 5-33
3.1.6 Analog Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8
Number of analog outputs Output signal level Tolerance Max. impedance

1 0/4–20 mA ±0.1 mA < 500 Ω
Table 3.4 Parameters for set-up: 6-6* and 16-77

3.1.7 Relay Option MCB 105
The MCB 105 option includes three pieces of SPDT contacts and must be fitted into option slot B.
Electrical Data: 3 3
Max terminal load (AC-1)1) (Resistive load) 240 V AC 2A
Max terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC 0.2 A
Max terminal load (DC-1)1) (Resistive load) 24 V DC 1 A
Max terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 V DC 0.1 A
Min terminal load (DC) 5 V 10 mA
Max switching rate at rated load/min load 6 min-1/20 s-1
1) IEC 947 part 4 and 5
When the relay option kit is ordered separately, the kit includes:
• Relay Module MCB 105
• Extended LCP frame and enlarged terminal cover
• Label for covering access to switches S201, S202 and S801
• Cable strips for fastening cables to relay module

130BA709.11
T/ N x38 -U Ta
C : X 0 in m
P/ : 3 3x 20
: XX -48 0-1 b M
IN T: IS/IP
CIA N1 V 5 00 ax
O AS
U
XX 00 0/6 0Hz 45
CH
XP
1
T5
0
B2 S/ 14 0A 3F
0
0B N: .9A 11 M
R1 0
D 12
0H 1 C/
BF 8
CAEE MA MAN ING/“Fran QUIPMTUPE IN
z 6. 11
00 15
S IR
A0 G4
UTNUALUAL / : sk tek ENT UL
VO
0 32
IO / RCDFrans st” (4
Wtored 76x1 L CONFOR P
.1 A
S
N: and k tek min

AR cha 134 TRO REFU
kV D
A E IN
N rge 261 L E SE
LIS DU AN ION
TE STR UA S
IN E M AT
hig st
D IA L
D
SE PL
EN
le
AP
M
ak
A
ag
RK
IC
e
cu
rre
nt
.)
61
68
39
42
Re 50
mov 53
e ju 54
mpe
12
1
r to
13 activ
18 ate
19 Sa
fe
27 Stop
29
32
33
20
LA
BE
L
9Ø
Ø6
9Ø
Figure 3.5 Relay Option MCB 105
A2-A3-A4-B3 A5-B1-B2-B4-C1-C2-C3-C4
NOTICE!
1) IMPORTANT! The label MUST be placed on the LCP frame as shown (UL-approved).
Table 3.5 Legend to Figure 3.5 and Figure 3.6

130BA710.11
DC-
DC+
3 3
61 6
39 42
LABE
50 53 5
L Remov
e jumper
to activat
e Safe
Stop
1
12 13
18 19 27
28 32 38
2
9Ø
9Ø
Figure 3.6 Relay Option Kit
WARNING
Warning Dual supply.
How to add the MCB 105 option:

• See the mounting instructions at the beginning of the section Options and Accessories.
• Disconnect power to the live part connections on relay terminals.
• Do not mix live parts with control signals (PELV).
• Select the relay functions in 5-40 Function Relay [6-8], 5-41 On Delay, Relay [6-8] and 5-42 Off Delay, Relay [6-8].
NOTICE!
Index [6] is relay 7, index [7] is relay 8, and index [8] is relay 9.

Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9

WARNING
130BA162.10
Do not combine low voltage parts and PELV systems.
At a single fault the whole system might become
1 2 3
NC
4 5 6 7
NC
8
NC
9 10 11 12
dangerous to touch, and it could result in death or
serious injury. 3 3
3.1.8 24 V Backup Option MCB 107 (Option
Figure 3.7 Relay 7, Relay 8, and Relay 9 D)
External 24 V DC Supply
130BA177.10
m
2m
An external 24 V DC supply can be installed for low-

m
voltage supply to the control card and any option card

9m
8-
installed. This enables full operation of the LCP (including

the parameter setting) and serial communication busses
without line power supplied to the power section.
Figure 3.8 Mounting

Input voltage range 24 V DC ±15% (max. 37 V in 10 s)
Max. input current 2.2 A
Average input current for 0.9 A
130BA176.11
1 1 1
the adjustable frequency
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 drive
Max cable length 250 ft [75 m]
Input capacitance load <10 uF
Power-up delay <0.6 s
2 2 3
Table 3.7 External 24 V DC Supply Specification

1 1 1
The inputs are protected.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Terminal numbers:
Terminal 35: - external 24 V DC supply.
3 3 3 Terminal 36: + external 24 V DC supply.
1 1 1
Follow these steps:
1. Remove the LCP or blind cover.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. Remove the terminal cover.
3. Remove the cable decoupling plate and the
plastic cover underneath.
2 2 2
Figure 3.9 Connection 4. Insert the 24 V DC backup external supply option

in the option slot.
5. Mount the cable de-coupling plate.
1 NC 6. Attach the terminal cover and the LCP or blind
2 Live part cover.
3 PELV

When 24 V backup option MCB 107 supplies the control 3.1.9 Analog I/O option MCB 109
circuit, the internal 24 V supply is automatically
disconnected. The Analog I/O card is to be used, e.g., in the following
cases:
3 3 •
130BA028.11
Providing battery backup of clock function on
control card
• As general extension of analog I/O selection

35
36 available on control card, e.g., for multi-zone
control with three pressure transmitters
• Turning the adjustable frequency drive into a de-

central I/O block supporting a Building
Management System with inputs for sensors and
outputs for operating dampers and valve servos
• Support Extended PID controllers with I/Os for

36 setpoint inputs, transmitter/sensor inputs and
35
outputs for servos
Figure 3.10 Connection to 24 V Backup Supplier (A2-A3).

130BA216.10
35
36
90
06
90
311 Figure 3.12 Principle Diagram for Analog I/O Mounted in

Adjustable Frequency Drive.
Figure 3.11 Connection to 24 V Backup Supplier (A5-C2).

Analog I/O configuration When used for voltage, analog inputs are scalable by
3 x analog inputs, capable of handling following: parameters for each input.
• 0–10 V DC When used for temperature sensor, analog inputs scaling is

OR preset to necessary signal level for specified temperature 3 3
span.
• 0–20 mA (voltage input 0–10 V) by mounting a
510 Ω resistor across terminals (see NOTICE)
When analog inputs are used for temperature sensors, it is
• 4–20 mA (voltage input 2–10 V) by mounting a
possible to read out the feedback value in both °C and °F.
510 Ω resistor across terminals (see NOTICE)
• Ni1000 temperature sensor of 1000 Ω at 32 °F When operating with temperature sensors, maximum cable
[0 °C]. Specifications according to DIN43760 length to connect sensors is 270 ft [82 m] non-shielded/
non-twisted wires.
• Pt1000 temperature sensor of 1000 Ω at 32 °F
[0 °C]. Specifications according to IEC 60751
Analog outputs - terminal X42/7-12
3 x Analog Outputs supplying 0–10 V DC.
Parameter group: 18-3*. See also VLT® HVAC Drive
Programming Guide.
NOTICE! Parameter groups for set-up: 26-4*, 26-5* and 26-6*.
Note the values available within the different standard See also VLT® HVAC Drive Programming Guide.
groups of resistors:
E12: Closest standard value is 470 Ω, creating an input of 3 x analog Output Resolution Linearity Max load
449.9 Ω and 8.997 V. outputs signal level
E24: Closest standard value is 510 Ω, creating an input of Volt 0–10 V DC 11 bits 1% of full 1 mA
486.4Ω and 9.728 V. scale
E48: Closest standard value is 511 Ω, creating an input of
487.3 Ω and 9.746 V. Table 3.9 Analog outputs - terminal X42/7-12
E96: Closest standard value is 523 Ω, creating an input of
498.2 Ω and 9.964 V. Analog outputs are scalable by parameters for each
output.
Analog inputs - terminal X42/1-6
Parameter group: 18-3*. See also VLT® HVAC Drive The function assigned is selectable via a parameter and
Programming Guide. has the same options as for analog outputs on the control
card.
Parameter groups for set-up: 26-0*, 26-1*, 26-2* and 26-3*.

For a more detailed description of parameters, refer to the
See also VLT® HVAC Drive Programming Guide.
VLT® HVAC Drive Programming Guide.
3 x analog Used as temperature Used as voltage input

inputs sensor input Real time clock (RTC) with backup
The data format of RTC includes year, month, date, hour,
Operating -58–+302 °F 0–10 V DC
minutes and weekday.
range [-50–+150 °C]
Resolution 11 bits 10 bits
Accuracy -58 °F [-50 °C] 0.2% of full Accuracy of clock is better than ± 20 ppm at 77 °F [25 °C].
±1 Kelvin scale at cal.
302 °F [+150 °C] temperature The built-in lithium backup battery lasts on average for
±2 Kelvin minimum 10 years, when adjustable frequency drive is
Sampling 3 Hz 2.4 Hz operating at 104 °F [40 °C] ambient temperature. If the
Max load - ± 20 V continuously battery backup pack fails, the analog I/O option must be
Impedance - Approximately 5 kΩ replaced.
Table 3.8 Analog inputs - terminal X42/1-6

3.1.10 PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 ATEX Certification with FC 102
The MCB 112 has been certified for ATEX, which means
The MCB 112 option makes it possible to monitor the that the adjustable frequency drive with the MCB 112 can
temperature of an electrical motor through a galvanically- now be used with motors in potentially explosive
3 3 isolated PTC thermistor input. It is a B option for adjustable atmospheres. See the Instruction Manual for the MCB 112
for more information.
frequency drive with Safe Torque Off.
For information on mounting and installation of the

option, see chapter 3.1.1 Mounting Option Modules in Slot B.
See also chapter 7 Application Examples for different
application possibilities.
X44/1 and X44/2 are the thermistor inputs. X44/12 enables

Safe Torque Off of the adjustable frequency drive (T-37), if
the thermistor values make it necessary, and X44/10
Figure 3.14 ATmosphère EXplosive (ATEX)
informs the adjustable frequency drive that a request for
safe torque off came from the MCB 112 to ensure a
suitable alarm handling. One of the digital inputs
parameters (or a digital input of a mounted option) must
be set to [80] PTC Card 1 to use the information from
X44/10. Configure 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop to the desired
Safe Torque Off functionality (default is Safe Stop Alarm).
130BA638.10
com
MS 220 DA ZIEHL
Motor protection
MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card

Option B
Code No.130B1137
DO FOR SAFE
11 Reference for 10, 12

10 20-28 VDC 10 mA
STOP T37
12 20-28 VDC 60 mA
DO
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
T1
T2
X44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Control Terminals of FC302
TP TP
PTC
M3~
Figure 3.13 Installation of MCB 112

Electrical Data
Resistor connection
PTC compliant with DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
Number
Shut-off value
1..6 resistors in series
3.3 Ω.... 3.65 Ω.... 3.85 Ω
3 3
Reset value 1.7 Ω.... 1.8 Ω... 1.95 Ω
Trigger tolerance ± 11 °F [± 6 °C]
Collective resistance of the sensor loop < 1.65 Ω
Terminal voltage ≤ 2.5 V for R ≤ 3.65 Ω, ≤ 9 V for R = ∞
Sensor current ≤ 1 mA
Short-circuit 20 Ω ≤ R ≤ 40 Ω
Power consumption 60 mA
Testing conditions
EN 60 947-8
Measurement voltage surge resistance 6000 V
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2
Measurement isolation voltage Vbis 690 V
Reliable galvanic isolation until Vi 500 V
Perm. ambient temperature -4–+140 °F [-20–+60 °C]
EN 60068-2-1 Dry heat
Moisture 5–95%, no condensation permissible
EMC resistance EN61000-6-2
EMC emissions EN61000-6-4
Vibration resistance 10 ... 1000 Hz 1.14 g
Shock resistance 50 g
Safety system values

EN 61508 for Tu = 75 °C ongoing
SIL 2 for maintenance cycle of 2 years
1 for maintenance cycle of 3 years
HFT 0
PFD (for yearly functional test) 4.10 *10-3
SFF 78%
λs + λDD 8494 FIT
λDU 934 FIT
Ordering number 130B1137
3.1.11 Sensor Input Option MCB 114
The sensor input option card MCB 114 can be used in the following cases:
• Sensor input for temperature transmitters PT100 and PT1000 for monitoring bearing temperatures
• As general extension of analog inputs with one additional input for multi-zone control or differential pressure
measurements
• Support extended PID controllers with I/Os for setpoint, transmitter/sensor inputs
Typical motors, designed with temperature sensors for protecting bearings from being overloaded, are fitted with three
PT100/1000 temperature sensors. One in front, one in the back-end bearing, and one in the motor windings. The sensor
input Option MCB 114 supports two or three-wire sensors with individual temperature limits for under/over temperature.
An auto detection of sensor type PT100 or PT1000 takes place at power-up.

The option can generate an alarm if the measured temperature is either below low limit or above high limit specified by
the user. The individual measured temperature on each sensor input can be read out in the display or by readout
parameters. If an alarm occurs, the relays or digital outputs can be programmed to be active high by selecting [21] Thermal
Warning in parameter group 5-**.
3 3
A fault condition has a common warning/alarm number associated with it, which is Alarm/Warning 20, Temp. input error.
Any present output can be programmed to be active in case the warning or alarm appears.
3.1.11.1 Ordering Code Numbers and Parts Delivered
Standard version code no: 130B1172.

Coated version code no: 130B1272.
3.1.11.2 Electrical and Mechanical Specifications
Analog Input
Number of analog inputs 1
Format 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA
Wires 2
Input impedance <200 Ω
Sample rate 1 kHz
Third order filter 100 Hz at 3 dB
The option is able to supply the analog sensor with 24 V DC (terminal 1).
Temperature Sensor Input

Number of analog inputs supporting PT100/1000 3
Signal type PT100/1000
Connection PT 100 2 or 3 wire/PT1000 2 or 3 wire
Frequency PT100 and PT1000 input 1Hz for each channel
Resolution 10 bit
-50–+204 °C
Temperature range -58–+399 °F
Galvanic Isolation
The sensors to be connected are expected to be galvanically isolated from the AC line voltage
level. IEC 61800-5-1 and UL508C
Cabling
Maximum signal cable length 1640 ft [500 m]

3.1.11.3 Electrical Wiring 3.1.12 Remote Mounting Kit for LCP
The LCP can be moved to the front of a cabinet by using

the remote built-in kit. The enclosure is the IP66. The
MCB 114
Sensor Input Option B
fastening screws must be tightened with a torque of max. 3 3
1 Nm.
SW. ver. xx.xx Code No. 130B1272
VDD I IN GND TEMP WIRE GND TEMP WIRE GND TEMP WIRE GND
1 1 2 2 3 3 Enclosure IP66 front
Max. cable length between and unit 10 ft [3 m]
130BB326.10
X48/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Communication std RS-485
Table 3.11 Technical Data
130BA138.10
4-20mA
2 or 3 2 or 3 2 or 3 2 or 3
wire wire wire wire
Figure 3.15 Electrical Wiring
Terminal Name Function

1 VDD 24 V DC to supply 4–20 mA
sensor
2 I in 4–20 mA input
3 GND Analog input GND
4, 7, 10 Temp 1, 2, 3 Temperature input
5, 8, 11 Wire 1, 2, 3 Third wire input if three
wire sensors are used
6, 9, 12 GND Temp. input GND
Table 3.10 Terminals Figure 3.16 LCP Kit with Graphical LCP, Fasteners, 10 ft [3 m]
Cable and Gasket
Ordering No. 130B1113
130BA200.10
Figure 3.17 LCP Kit with Numerical LCP, Fasteners and Gasket
Ordering no. 130B1114

3.1.14 IP21/Type 1 Enclosure Kit
130BT323.10
B A
3 3
Figure 3.18 Dimensions
3.1.13 IP21/IP41/ TYPE1 Enclosure Kit

C
IP21/IP41 top/ TYPE 1 is an optional enclosure element
available for IP20 compact units, enclosure size A2-A3,
B3+B4 and C3+C4. D
If the enclosure kit is used, an IP20 unit is upgraded to
comply with enclosure IP21/41 top/TYPE 1.
The IP41 top can be applied to all standard IP20 VLT®

HVAC Drive variants.
Figure 3.19 Enclosure Type A2

Height A Width B Depth C*
130BT324.10
B A Enclosure type
(in [mm]) (in [mm]) (in [mm])
A2 14.65 [372] 3.54 [90] 8.07 [205]
A3 14.65 [372] 5.12 [130] 8.07 [205]
B3 18.7 [475] 6.5 [165] 9.8 [249] 3 3
B4 26.38 [670] 10.04 [255] 9.69 [246]
C3 29.72 [755] 12.95 [329] 13.27 [337]
C4 37.4 [950] 15.39 [391] 13.27 [337]
Table 3.13 Dimensions

* If option A/B is used, the depth increases
(see chapter 5.1.2 Mechanical Dimensions for details)
130BT620.12
A
B
Figure 3.20 Enclosure Type A3
A Top cover
B Brim
C Base part
D Base cover
E Screw(s)
D
Place the top cover as shown. If an A or B option is used, F
the brim must be fitted to cover the top inlet. Place the
base part C at the bottom of the adjustable frequency
drive and use the clamps from the accessory bag to
correctly fasten the cables. Holes for cable connectors: E
Size A2: 2x M25 and 3xM32

Size A3: 3xM25 and 3xM32 Figure 3.21 Enclosure Type B3

When option module A and/or option module B is/are
130BT621.12
A
used, the brim (B) must be fitted to the top cover (A).
NOTICE!
3 3 G
Side-by-side installation is not possible when using the
IP21/IP4X/TYPE 1 Enclosure Kit.
3.1.15 Output Filters
The high speed switching of the adjustable frequency

drive produces some secondary effects, which influence
the motor and the enclosed environment. These side
effects are addressed by two different filter types, the
dU/dt and the sine-wave filter.
dU/dt filters
Motor insulation stresses are often caused by the
combination of rapid voltage and current increase. The
rapid energy changes can also be reflected back to the DC
line in the inverter and cause shutdown. The dU/dt filter is
designed to reduce the voltage rise time/the rapid energy
change in the motor and by that intervention avoid
premature aging and flashover in the motor insulation.
dU/dt filters have a positive influence on the radiation of
magnetic noise in the cable that connects the adjustable
frequency drive to the motor. The voltage wave form is
still pulse shaped but the dU/dt ratio is reduced in
comparison with the installation without filter.
C
Sine-wave filters
Sine-wave filters are designed to allow only low
D frequencies to pass. High frequencies are consequently
shunted away, which results in a sinusoidal phase-to-phase
voltage waveform and sinusoidal current waveforms.
With the sinusoidal waveforms, the use of special
adjustable frequency drive motors with reinforced
insulation is no longer needed. The acoustic noise from the
motor is also damped as a consequence of the wave
condition.
Besides the features of the dU/dt filter, the sine-wave filter
also reduces insulation stress and bearing currents in the
Figure 3.22 Enclosure Types B4 - C3 - C4 motor thus leading to prolonged motor lifetime and longer
periods between services. Sine-wave filters enable use of
longer motor cables in applications where the motor is
A Top cover installed far from the adjustable frequency drive. The
B Brim length is unfortunately limited because the filter does not
C Base part reduce leakage currents in the cables.
D Base cover
E Screw(s)
F Fan cover
G Top clip

How to Order Design Guide
4 How to Order
4.1 Ordering Form Example of Drive Configurator interface set-up:

The numbers shown in the boxes refer to the letter/figure
4.1.1 Drive Configurator number of the type code string; read from left to right.
It is possible to design an adjustable frequency drive Product groups 1-3

4 4
according to the application requirements by using the Adjustable frequency drive series 4-6
ordering number system. Power rating 8-10
Phases 11
Order the adjustable frequency drive as either standard or AC Line Voltage 12
with integral options by sending a type code string Enclosure 13-15
describing the product a to the local Danfoss sales office, Enclosure type
i.e.: Enclosure class
Control supply voltage
FC-102P18KT4E21H1XGCXXXSXXXXAGBKCXXXXDX Hardware configuration
RFI filter 16-17
The meaning of the characters in the string can be located Brake 18
in the pages containing the ordering numbers in chapter 3 Display (LCP) 19
Selection. In the example above, a Profibus LON works Coating PCB 20
option and a general purpose I/O option is included in the
Line power option 21
Adaptation A 22
Adaptation B 23
Ordering numbers for adjustable frequency drive standard
Software release 24-27
variants can also be located in chapter 4 How to Order.
Software language 28
A options 29-30
Configure the right adjustable frequency drive for the right B options 31-32
application and generate the type code string in the
C0 options, MCO 33-34
Internet-based Drive Configurator. The Drive Configurator
C1 options 35
automatically generates an 8-digit sales number to be
C option software 36-37
delivered to the local sales office.
D options 38-39
Furthermore, establish a project list with several products
and send it to a Danfoss sales representative.
Table 4.1 Example of Drive Configurator Interface Set-up
The Drive Configurator can be found on the global

Internet site: www.danfoss.com/drives.

4.1.2 Type Code String Low and Medium Power
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
130BA052.14
F C - 0 P T H X X S X X X X A B C D
Figure 4.1 Type Code String
4 4
Description Pos. Possible choice
Product group & FC Series 1-6 FC 102
Power rating 8-10 1.1–90 kW (P1K1–P90K)
Number of phases 11 3 phases (T)
S 2: 220–240 V AC single phase
T 2: 200–240 V AC
AC line voltage 11-12 T 4: 380–480 V AC
T 6: 525–600 V AC
T 7: 525–690 V AC
E20: IP20
E21: IP21/NEMA Type 1
E55: IP55/NEMA Type 12
E66: IP66
Enclosure 13-15
P21: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/backplate
P55: IP55/NEMA Type 12 w/backplate
Z55: A4 Frame IP55
Z66: A4 Frame IP66
H1: RFI filter class A1/B
H2: RFI filter class A2
RFI filter 16-17
H3: RFI filter class A1/B (reduced cable length)
Hx: No RFI filter
X: No brake chopper included
B: Brake chopper included
Brake 18
T: Safe Stop
U: Safe + brake
G: Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP)
Display 19 N: Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP)
X: No Local Control Panel
X. No coated PCB
Coating PCB 20
C: Coated PCB
X: No line power disconnect switch and load sharing
1: With line power disconnect switch (IP55 only)
Line power option 21 8: Line power disconnect and Load Sharing
D: Load Sharing
See Chapter 9 for max. cable sizes.
X: Standard cable entries
Adaptation 22 O: European metric thread in cable entries (A4, A5, B1, B2 only)
S: Imperial cable entries (A5, B1, B2 only)
Adaptation 23 Reserved
Software release 24-27 Current software
Software language 28

Description Pos. Possible choice

AX: No options
A0: MCA 101 Profibus DP V1
A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet
AG: MCA 108 Lonworks
A options 29-30
AJ: MCA 109 BACnet gateway
AL: MCA 120 Profinet
AN: MCA 121 EtherNet/IP
AQ: MCA 122 Modbus TCP
4 4
BX: No option
BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option
BP: MCB 105 Relay option
B options 31-32
BO: MCB 109 Analog I/O option
B2: MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card
B4: MCB 114 Sensor input option
C0 options MCO 33-34 CX: No options
C1 options 35 X: No options
C option software 36-37 XX: Standard software
DX: No option
D options 38-39
D0: 24 V backup
Table 4.2 Type Code Description
4.2 Ordering Numbers

4.2.1 Ordering Numbers: Options and Accessories
Type Description Ordering no.

Miscellaneous hardware I
DC link connector Terminal block for DC link connnection on A2/A3 130B1064
IP 21/4X top/TYPE 1 kit IP21/NEMA1 Top + bottom A2 130B1122
IP 21/4X top/TYPE 1 kit IP21/NEMA1 Top + bottom A3 130B1123
IP 21/4X top/TYPE 1 kit IP21/NEMA1 Top + bottom B3 130B1187
IP 21/4X top/TYPE 1 kit IP21/NEMA1 Top + bottom B4 130B1189
IP 21/4X top/TYPE 1 kit IP21/NEMA1 Top + bottom C3 130B1191
IP 21/4X top/TYPE 1 kit IP21/NEMA1 Top + bottom C4 130B1193
IP21/4X top IP21 Top Cover A2 130B1132
IP21/4X top IP21 Top Cover A3 130B1133
IP 21/4X top IP21 Top Cover B3 130B1188
IP 21/4X top IP21 Top Cover B4 130B1190
IP 21/4X top IP21 Top Cover C3 130B1192
IP 21/4X top IP21 Top Cover C4 130B1194
Panel Through Mount Kit Enclosure, enclosure type A5 130B1028
Panel Through Mount Kit Enclosure, enclosure type B1 130B1046
Panel Through Mount Kit Enclosure, enclosure type B2 130B1047
Panel Through Mount Kit Enclosure, enclosure type C1 130B1048
Panel Through Mount Kit Enclosure, enclosure type C2 130B1049
Profibus D-Sub 9 Connector kit for IP20 130B1112
Profibus top entry kit Top entry kit for Profibus connection - D + E enclosure types 176F1742
Terminal blocks Screw terminal blocks for replacing spring loaded terminals 130B1116
1 x 10-pin, 1 x 6-pin and 1 x 3-pin connectors
Backplate A5 IP55/NEMA 12 130B1098
Backplate B1 IP21/IP55 / NEMA 12 130B3383

Type Description Ordering no.

Miscellaneous hardware I
Backplate B2 IP21/IP55 / NEMA 12 130B3397
Backplate C1 IP21/IP55 / NEMA 12 130B3910
Backplate C2 IP21/IP55 / NEMA 12 130B3911
Backplate A5 IP66 130B3242
Backplate B1 IP66 130B3434
4 4 Backplate B2 IP66 130B3465
Backplate C1 IP66 130B3468
Backplate C2 IP66 130B3491
LCPs and kits
LCP 101 Numerical Local Control Panel (NLCP) 130B1124
102 Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP) 130B1107
cable Separate cable, 10 ft [3 m] 175Z0929
kit Panel mounting kit including graphical LCP, fasteners, 10 ft [3 m] cable and 130B1113
gasket
LCP kit Panel mounting kit including numerical LCP, fasteners and gasket 130B1114
kit Panel mounting kit for all LCPs including fasteners, 10 ft [3 m] cable and 130B1117
gasket
kit Front mounting kit, IP55 enclosures 130B1129
kit Panel mounting kit for all LCPs including fasteners and gasket - without 130B1170
cable
Table 4.3 Options can be ordered as factory built-in options, see ordering information.
Type Description Comments

Options for Slot A Ordering no.
Coated
MCA 101 Profibus option DP V0/V1 130B1200
MCA 104 DeviceNet option 130B1202
MCA 108 Lonworks 130B1206
MCA 109 BACnet gateway for built-in. Not to be used with the relay option MCB 105 card 130B1244
MCA 120 Profinet 130B1135
MCA 121 Ethernet 130B1219
Options for Slot B
MCB 101 General purpose Input Output option
MCB 105 Relay option
MCB 109 Analog I/O option and battery backup for real-time clock 130B1243
MCB 112 ATEX PTC 130B1137
Sensor input - uncoated 130B1172
MCB 114
Sensor input - coated 130B1272
Option for Slot D
MCB 107 24 V DC backup 130B1208
External Options
Ethernet IP Ethernet master
Table 4.4 Ordering Information Options

For information on serial communication bus and application option compatibility with older software versions, contact your Danfoss supplier.

Type Description
Spare Parts Ordering no. Comments
Control board FC With Safe Stop Function 130B1150
Control board FC Without Safe Stop Function 130B1151
Fan A2 Fan, enclosure type A2 130B1009
Fan B1 Fan external, enclosure type B1 130B3407 4 4
Fan B2 Fan external, enclosure type B2 130B3406
Fan B3 Fan external, enclosure type B3 130B3563
Fan B4 Fan external, 18.5/22 kW 130B3699
Fan B4 Fan external 22/30 kW 130B3701
Fan C1 Fan external, enclosure type C1 130B3865
Miscellaneous hardware II
Accessory bag A2 Accessory bag, enclosure type A2 130B1022
Accessory bag A4 Accessory bag for frame A4 w/o thread 130B0536
Accessory bag B1 Accessory bag, enclosure type B1 130B2060
Accessory bag B4 Accessory bag, enclosure type B4 130B1300 Small
Accessory bag B4 Accessory bag, enclosure type B4 130B1301 Big
Accessory bag C1 Accessory bag, enclosure type C1 130B0046
Accessory bag C4 Accessory bag, enclosure type C4 130B0982 Small
Accessory bag C4 Accessory bag, enclosure type C4 130B0983 Big
Table 4.5 Accessories Ordering Information

4.2.2 Ordering Numbers: Harmonic Filters
Harmonic filters are used to reduce line harmonics.
• AHF 010: 10% current distortion
• AHF 005: 5% current distortion
4 4 IAHF, N [A] Typical Motor Used [kW] Danfoss Ordering Number Adjustable frequency
AHF 005 AHF 010 drive size
10 1.1–4 175G6600 175G6622 P1K1, P4K0
19 5.5–7.5 175G6601 175G6623 P5K5–P7K5
26 11 175G6602 175G6624 P11K
35 15–18.5 175G6603 175G6625 P15K–P18K
43 22 175G6604 175G6626 P22K
72 30–37 175G6605 175G6627 P30K–P37K
101 45–55 175G6606 175G6628 P45K–P55K
144 75 175G6607 175G6629 P75K
180 90 175G6608 175G6630 P90K
217 110 175G6609 175G6631 P110
289 132 175G6610 175G6632 P132–P160
324 160 175G6611 175G6633
370 200 175G6688 175G6691 P200
175G6609 175G6631
506 250 P250
+ 175G6610 + 175G6632
578 315 2x 175G6610 2x 175G6632 P315
648 355 2x175G6611 2x175G6633 P355
175G6611 175G6633
694 400 P400
+ 175G6688 + 175G6691
740 450 2x175G6688 2x175G6691 P450
Table 4.6 380–415 V AC, 50 Hz

IAHF, N [A] Typical Motor Used [hp] Danfoss Ordering Number Adjustable frequency drive
AHF 005 AHF 010 size
10 1.1–4 130B2540 130B2541 P1K1–P4K0
19 5.5–7.5 130B2460 130B2472 P5K5–P7K5
26 11 130B2461 130B2473 P11K
35 15–18.5 130B2462 130B2474 P15K, P18K
43 22 130B2463 130B2475 P22K
72 30–37 130B2464 130B2476 P30K–P37K 4 4
101 45–55 130B2465 130B2477 P45K–P55K
144 75 130B2466 130B2478 P75K
180 90 130B2467 130B2479 P90K
217 110 130B2468 130B2480 P110
289 132 130B2469 130B2481 P132
324 160 130B2470 130B2482 P160
370 200 130B2471 130B2483 P200
130B2468 130B2480
506 250 P250
+ 130B2469 + 130B2481
578 315 2x 130B2469 2x 130B2481 P315
648 355 2x130B2470 2x130B2482 P355
130B2470 130B2482
694 400 P400
+ 130B2471 + 130B2483
740 450 2x130B2471 130B2483 P450
Table 4.7 380–415 V AC, 60 Hz
IAHF, N [A] Typical Motor Used [hp] Danfoss Ordering Number Adjustable frequency drive
10 1.5–7.5 130B2538 130B2539 P1K1–P5K5
19 10–15 175G6612 175G6634 P7K5–P11K
26 20 175G6613 175G6635 P15K
35 25–30 175G6614 175G6636 P18K–P22K
43 40 175G6615 175G6637 P30K
72 50–60 175G6616 175G6638 P37K–P45K
101 75 175G6617 175G6639 P55K
144 100–125 175G6618 175G6640 P75K–P90K
180 150 175G6619 175G6641 P110
217 200 175G6620 175G6642 P132
289 250 175G6621 175G6643 P160
370 350 175G6690 175G6693 P200
434 350 2x175G6620 2x175G6642 P250
506 450 175G6620 + 175G6621 175G6642 + 175G6643 P315
578 500 2x 175G6621 2x 175G6643 P355
648 550-600 2x175G6689 2x175G6692 P400
694 600 175G6689 + 175G6690 175G6692 + 175G6693 P450
740 650 2x175G6690 2x175G6693 P500
Table 4.8 440–480 V AC, 60 Hz

Matching the adjustable frequency drive and filter is pre-calculated based on 400 V/480 V, a typical motor load (4-pole) and
110% torque.

IAHF, N [A] Typical Motor Used [kW] Danfoss Ordering Number Adjustable frequency
AHF 005 AHF 010 drive size
10 1.1–7.5 175G6644 175G6656 P1K1–P7K5
19 11 175G6645 175G6657 P11K
26 15–18.5 175G6646 175G6658 P15K–P18K
35 22 175G6647 175G6659 P22K
43 30 175G6648 175G6660 P30K
4 4 72 37–45 175G6649 175G6661 P45K–P55K
101 55 175G6650 175G6662 P75K
144 75-90 175G6651 175G6663 P90K–P110
180 110 175G6652 175G6664 P132
217 132 175G6653 175G6665 P160
289 160–200 175G6654 175G6666 P200–P250
324 250 175G6655 175G6667 P315
397 315 175G6652 + 175G6653 175G6641 + 175G6665 P400
434 355 2x175G6653 2x175G6665 P450
506 400 175G6653 + 175G6654 175G6665 + 175G6666 P500
578 450 2X 175G6654 2X 175G6666 P560
613 500 175G6654 + 175G6655 175G6666 + 175G6667 P630
Table 4.9 500–525 V AC, 50 Hz
IAHF, N [A] Typical Motor Used [kW] Danfoss Ordering Number Adjustable frequency drive
43 45 130B2328 130B2293
72 45–55 130B2330 130B2295 P37K–P45K
101 75-90 130B2331 130B2296 P55K–P75K
144 110 130B2333 130B2298 P90K–P110
180 132 130B2334 130B2299 P132
217 160 130B2335 130B2300 P160
288 200–250 2x130B2333 130B2301 P200–P250
324 315 130B2334 + 130B2335 130B2302 P315
397 400 130B2334 + 130B2335 130B2299 + 130B2300 P400
434 450 2x130B2335 2x130B2300 P450
505 500 * 130B2300 + 130B2301 P500
576 560 * 2x130B2301 P560
612 630 * 130B2301 + 130B2300 P630
730 710 * 2x130B2302 P710
Table 4.10 690 V AC, 50 Hz

* For higher currents, contact Danfoss.

4.2.3 Ordering Numbers: Sine-Wave Filter Modules, 200–500 V AC
Adj. Frequency Drive Size Maximum

Minimum switching Rated filter current
200–240 380–440 440–480 output Part No. IP20 Part No. IP00
frequency [kHz] at 50 Hz [A]
[V AC] [V AC] [V AC] frequency [Hz]
P1K1 P1K1 5 120 130B2441 130B2406 4.5
P1K5 P1K5 5 120 130B2441 130B2406 4.5
P2K2 P2K2 5 120 130B2443 130B2408 8 4 4
P1K5 P3K0 P3K0 5 120 130B2443 130B2408 8
P4K0 P4K0 5 120 130B2444 130B2409 10
P2K2 P5K5 P5K5 5 120 130B2446 130B2411 17
P3K0 P7K5 P7K5 5 120 130B2446 130B2411 17
P4K0 5 120 130B2446 130B2411 17
P5K5 P11K P11K 4 100 130B2447 130B2412 24
P7K5 P15K P15K 4 100 130B2448 130B2413 38
P18K P18K 4 100 130B2448 130B2413 38
P11K P22K P22K 4 100 130B2307 130B2281 48
P15K P30K P30K 3 100 130B2308 130B2282 62
P18K P37K P37K 3 100 130B2309 130B2283 75
P22K P45K P55K 3 100 130B2310 130B2284 115
P30K P55K P75K 3 100 130B2310 130B2284 115
P37K P75K P90K 3 100 130B2311 130B2285 180
P45K P90K P110 3 100 130B2311 130B2285 180
P110 P132 3 100 130B2312 130B2286 260
P132 P160 3 100 130B2313 130B2287 260
P160 P200 3 100 130B2313 130B2287 410
P200 P250 3 100 130B2314 130B2288 410
P250 P315 3 100 130B2314 130B2288 480
P315 P315 2 100 130B2315 130B2289 660
P355 P355 2 100 130B2315 130B2289 660
P400 P400 2 100 130B2316 130B2290 750
P450 2 100 130B2316 130B2290 750
P450 P500 2 100 130B2317 130B2291 880
P500 P560 2 100 130B2317 130B2291 880
P560 P630 2 100 130B2318 130B2292 1200
P630 P710 2 100 130B2318 130B2292 1200
P710 P800 2 100 2x130B2317 2x130B2291 1500
P800 P1M0 2 100 2x130B2317 2x130B2291 1500
P1M0 2 100 2x130B2318 2x130B2292 1700
Table 4.11 Line Power Supply 3x200 to 480 V AC
When using sine-wave filters, the switching frequency should comply with filter specifications in 14-01 Switching Frequency.
NOTICE!
See also Output Filter Design Guide.

4.2.4 Ordering Numbers: Sine-Wave Filter Modules, 525–600/690 V AC
Adj. Frequency Drive Size Rated filter

Minimum switching Maximum output
Part No. IP20 Part No. IP00 current at
525–600 [V AC] 690 [V AC] frequency [kHz] frequency [Hz]
50 Hz [A]
P1K1 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
P1K5 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
4 4 P2k2 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
P3K0 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
P4K0 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
P5K5 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
P7K5 2 100 130B2341 130B2321 13
P11K 2 100 130B2342 130B2322 28
P15K 2 100 130B2342 130B2322 28
P18K 2 100 130B2342 130B2322 28
P22K 2 100 130B2342 130B2322 28
P30K 2 100 130B2343 130B2323 45
P37K P45K 2 100 130B2344 130B2324 76
P45K P55K 2 100 130B2344 130B2324 76
P55K P75K 2 100 130B2345 130B2325 115
P75K P90K 2 100 130B2345 130B2325 115
P90K P110 2 100 130B2346 130B2326 165
P132 2 100 130B2346 130B2326 165
P160 2 100 130B2347 130B2327 260
P200 2 100 130B2347 130B2327 260
P250 2 100 130B2348 130B2329 303
P315 2 100 130B2370 130B2341 430
P355 1.5 100 130B2370 130B2341 430
P400 1.5 100 130B2370 130B2341 430
P450 1.5 100 130B2371 130B2342 530
P500 1.5 100 130B2371 130B2342 530
P560 1.5 100 130B2381 130B2337 660
P630 1.5 100 130B2381 130B2337 660
P710 1.5 100 130B2382 130B2338 765
P800 1.5 100 130B2383 130B2339 940
P900 1.5 100 130B2383 130B2339 940
P1M0 1.5 100 130B2384 130B2340 1320
P1M2 1.5 100 130B2384 130B2340 1320
P1M4 1.5 100 2x130B2382 2x130B2338 1479
Table 4.12 Line Power Supply 3 x 525–690 V AC
NOTICE!
When using sine-wave filters, the switching frequency should comply with filter specifications in 14-01 Switching
Frequency.
NOTICE!

4.2.5 Ordering Numbers: dU/dt Filters, 380–480 V AC
Adj. Frequency Drive Size Minimum switching Maximum output Rated filter current at
Part No. IP20 Part No. IP00
380–439 [V AC] 440–480 [V AC] frequency [kHz] frequency [Hz] 50 Hz [A]
P11K P11K 4 100 130B2396 130B2385 24
P15K P15K 4 100 130B2397 130B2386 45
4 4
P18K P18K 4 100 130B2397 130B2386 45
P22K P22K 4 100 130B2397 130B2386 45
P30K P30K 3 100 130B2398 130B2387 75
P37K P37K 3 100 130B2398 130B2387 75
P45K P45K 3 100 130B2399 130B2388 110
P55K P55K 3 100 130B2399 130B2388 110
P75K P75K 3 100 130B2400 130B2389 182
P90K P90K 3 100 130B2400 130B2389 182
P110 P110 3 100 130B2401 130B2390 280
P132 P132 3 100 130B2401 130B2390 280
P160 P160 3 100 130B2402 130B2391 400
P200 P200 3 100 130B2402 130B2391 400
P250 P250 3 100 130B2277 130B2275 500
P315 P315 2 100 130B2278 130B2276 750
P355 P355 2 100 130B2278 130B2276 750
P400 P400 2 100 130B2278 130B2276 750
P450 2 100 130B2278 130B2276 750
P450 P500 2 100 130B2405 130B2393 910
P500 P560 2 100 130B2405 130B2393 910
P560 P630 2 100 130B2407 130B2394 1500
P630 P710 2 100 130B2407 130B2394 1500
P710 P800 2 100 130B2407 130B2394 1500
P800 P1M0 2 100 130B2407 130B2394 1500
P1M0 2 100 130B2410 130B2395 2300
Table 4.13 Line Power supply 3x380 to 3x480 V AC
NOTICE!

4.2.6 Ordering Numbers: dU/dt Filters, 525–600/690 V AC
Adj. Frequency Drive Size Minimum switching Maximum output Rated filter current at 50
Part No. IP20 Part No. IP00
525–600 [V AC] 690 [V AC] frequency [kHz] frequency [Hz] Hz [A]
P1K1 4 100 130B2423 130B2414 28
P1K5 4 100 130B2423 130B2414 28
4 4
P2K2 4 100 130B2423 130B2414 28
P3K0 4 100 130B2423 130B2414 28
P4K0 4 100 130B2424 130B2415 45
P5K5 4 100 130B2424 130B2415 45
P7K5 3 100 130B2425 130B2416 75
P11K 3 100 130B2425 130B2416 75
P15K 3 100 130B2426 130B2417 115
P18K 3 100 130B2426 130B2417 115
P22K 3 100 130B2427 130B2418 165
P30K 3 100 130B2427 130B2418 165
P37K P45K 3 100 130B2425 130B2416 75
P45K P55K 3 100 130B2425 130B2416 75
P55K P75K 3 100 130B2426 130B2417 115
P75K P90K 3 100 130B2426 130B2417 115
P90K P110 3 100 130B2427 130B2418 165
P132 2 100 130B2427 130B2418 165
P160 2 100 130B2428 130B2419 260
P200 2 100 130B2428 130B2419 260
P250 2 100 130B2429 130B2420 310
P315 2 100 130B2238 130B2235 430
P400 2 100 130B2238 130B2235 430
P450 2 100 130B2239 130B2236 530
P500 2 100 130B2239 130B2236 530
P560 2 100 130B2274 130B2280 630
P630 2 100 130B2274 130B2280 630
P710 2 100 130B2430 130B2421 765
P800 2 100 130B2431 130B2422 1350
P900 2 100 130B2431 130B2422 1350
P1M0 2 100 130B2431 130B2422 1350
P1M2 2 100 130B2431 130B2422 1350
P1M4 2 100 2x130B2430 2x130B2421 1530
Table 4.14 Line Power Supply 3x525 to 3x690 V AC
NOTICE!
4.2.7 Ordering Numbers: Brake Resistors
NOTICE!
See Brake Resistor Design Guide.

Mechanical Installation Design Guide
5 Mechanical Installation
5.1 Mechanical Installation

5.1.1 Safety Requirements of Mechanical
Installation
WARNING
Pay attention to the requirements that apply to 5 5
integration and the field mounting kit. Observe the
information in the list to avoid serious injury or
equipment damage, especially when installing large
units.
CAUTION
The adjustable frequency drive is cooled by air
circulation.
To protect the unit from overheating, it must be ensured
that the ambient temperature does not exceed the
maximum temperature stated for the adjustable frequency
drive, and that the 24-hour average temperature is not
exceeded. Locate the maximum temperature and 24-hour
average in chapter 9.6.2 Derating for Ambient
Temperature.
If the ambient temperature is in the range of 113–131 °F
[45 °C–55 °C], derating of the adjustable frequency drive
becomes relevant, see chapter 9.6.2 Derating for Ambient
Temperature.
The service life of the adjustable frequency drive is
reduced if derating for ambient temperature is not taken
into account.

5 5
86
A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
130BA814.10
130BA829.10
130BA815.10
130BA813.10
130BA828.10
130BA827.10
130BA812.10
130BA826.10
130BA811.10
130BB458.10
130BA809.10
130BA810.10
Mechanical Installation
IP20/21 IP20/21 IP55/66 IP55/66 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20 IP20 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20 IP20
b
B
5.1.2 Mechanical Dimensions
C e
e
130BA648.12
f
130BA715.12
a f
c
A
Design Guide
d a
e
a
Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved.

b
Top and bottom mounting holes

Accessory bags containing necessary brackets, screws and connectors are included with the adjustable frequency drives upon delivery.
(B4, C3 and C4 only)
* A5 in IP55/66 only
Table 5.1 Mechanical Dimensions
MG11BC22
Enclosure Type A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Rated 200–240 V 1.5–3 4–5 1.5–3 1.5–5 7.5–15 20 7.5–15 11–25 25–40 50–60 30–40 50–60
MG11BC22
Power [1.1–2.2] [3–3.7] [1.1–2.2] [1.1–3.7] [5.5–11] [15] [5.5–11] [15–18] [18–30] [37–45] [22–30] [37–45]
(hp [kW]) 380–480/ 1.5–5 7.5–10 1.5–5 1.5–10 15–25 30–40 15–25 30–50 50–75 100–125 60–75 100–125
500 V [1.1–4.0] [5.5–7.5] [1.1–4] [1.1–7.5] [11–18] [22–30] [11–18] [22–37] [37–55] [75–90] [45–55] [75–90]
525–600 V 1.5–10 1.5–10 15–25 30–40 15–25 30–50 50–75 100–125 60–75 100–125
[1.1–7.5] [1.1–7.5] [11–18] [22–30] [11–18] [22–37] [37–55] [75–90] [45–55] [75–90]
525–690 V 15–40 50–125
[11–30] [37–90]
IP 20 21 20 21 55/66 55/66 21/ 55/66 21/55/66 20 20 21/55/66 21/55/66 20 20
NEMA Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type 12 Type 12 Type 1/ Type 1/ Chassis Chassis Type 1/ Type 1/ Chassis Chassis
Type 12 Type 12 Type 12 Type 12
Height (in [mm])
10.60 14.76 10.6 14.76 15.35 16.54 18.90 25.59 15.71 20.47 26.77 30.32 21.65 25.98
Height of backplate A
[268] [375] [268] [375] [390] [420] [480] [650] [399] [520] [680] [770] [550] [660]
Height with decoupling
14.72 14.72 16.54 23.43 24.8 31.5
plate for serial communi- A - - - - -
Design Guide
[374] [374] [420] [595] [630] [800]

cation bus cables
Distance between 10.12 13.80 10.12 13.80 15.80 15.83 17.87 24.57 14.96 19.50 25.51 29.1 20.51 24.84
a
mounting holes [257] [350] [257] [350] [401] [402] [454] [624] [380] [495] [648] [739] [521] [631]
Width (in [mm])
3.54 3.54 5.12 5.12 7.87 9.53 9.53 9.53 6.5 9.06 12.13 14.57 12.13 14.57
Width of backplate B
[90] [90] [130] [130] [200] [242] [242] [242] [165] [230] [308] [370] [308] [370]
Width of backplate with 5.12 5.12 6.69 6.69 9.53 9.53 9.53 8.07 9.06 12.13 14.57 12.13 14.57
B
one C option [130] [130] [170] [170] [242] [242] [242] [205] [230] [308] [370] [308] [370]
Width of backplate with 5.91 5.91 7.48 7.48 9.53 9.53 9.53 8.86 9.06 12.13 14.57 12.13 14.57

B
two C options [150] [150] [190] [190] [242] [242] [242] [225] [230] [308] [370] [308] [370]
Distance between 2.76 2.76 4.33 4.33 6.73 8.47 8.27 8.27 5.51 7.87 10.71 13.15 10.63 13
b
mounting holes [70] [70] [110] [110] [171] [215] [210] [210] [140] [200] [272] [334] [270] [330]
Depth (in [mm])
Depth without 8.07 18.15 8.07 18.15 6.89 7.87 10.24 10.24 9.8 9.53 12.21 13.19 12.99 12.99
C
option A/B [205] [207] [205] [207] [175] [200] [260] [260] [249] [242] [310] [335] [333] [333]
8.66 8.74 8.66 8.74 6.89 7.87 10.24 10.24 10.32 9.53 12.21 13.19 12.99 12.99
With option A/B C
[220] [222] [220] [222] [175] [200] [260] [260] [262] [242] [310] [335] [333] [333]
87
5 5
5 5
88
Enclosure Type A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Rated 200–240 V 1.5–3 4–5 1.5–3 1.5–5 7.5–15 20 7.5–15 11–25 25–40 50–60 30–40 50–60
Power [1.1–2.2] [3–3.7] [1.1–2.2] [1.1–3.7] [5.5–11] [15] [5.5–11] [15–18] [18–30] [37–45] [22–30] [37–45]
(hp [kW]) 380–480/ 1.5–5 7.5–10 1.5–5 1.5–10 15–25 30–40 15–25 30–50 50–75 100–125 60–75 100–125
500 V [1.1–4.0] [5.5–7.5] [1.1–4] [1.1–7.5] [11–18] [22–30] [11–18] [22–37] [37–55] [75–90] [45–55] [75–90]
525–600 V 1.5–10 1.5–10 15–25 30–40 15–25 30–50 50–75 100–125 60–75 100–125
[1.1–7.5] [1.1–7.5] [11–18] [22–30] [11–18] [22–37] [37–55] [75–90] [45–55] [75–90]
525–690 V 15–40 50–125
[11–30] [37–90]
IP 20 21 20 21 55/66 55/66 21/ 55/66 21/55/66 20 20 21/55/66 21/55/66 20 20
NEMA Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type 12 Type 12 Type 1/ Type 1/ Chassis Chassis Type 1/ Type 1/ Chassis Chassis
Type 12 Type 12 Type 12 Type 12
Screw holes (in [mm])
0.32 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.33 0.33 0.47 0.47 0.49 0.49
c 8
[8.0] [8.0] [8.0] 8.0] [8.25] [8.25] [12] [12] [12.5] [12.5]
ø0.43 ø0.43 ø0.43 ø0.43 ø0.47 ø0.47 ø0.75 ø0.75 0.47 ø0.75 ø0.75
d
[ø11] [ø11] [ø11] [ø11] [ø12] [ø12] [ø19] [ø19] [12] [ø19] [ø19]
Design Guide
ø0.22 ø0.22 ø0.22 ø0.22 ø0.26 ø0.26 ø0.35 ø0.35 0.27 0.34 ø0.35 ø0.35 0.34 0.34
e
[ø5.5] [ø5.5] [ø5.5] [ø5.5] [ø6.5] [ø6.5] [ø9] [ø9] [6.8] [8.5] [ø9] [ø9] [8.5] [8.5]
0.35 0.35 0.26 0.26 0.24 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.31 0.59 0.39 0.39 0.67 0.67
f
[9] [9] [6.5] [6.5] [6] [9] [9] [9] [7.9] [15] [9.8] [9.8] [17] [17]
10.8 11.68 14.6 15.5 21.5 30/31.5 50.7 59.53 26.5 52 99.21 143.3 77.2 110.2
Max weight lbs [kg]
[4.9] [5.3] [6.6] [7.0] [9.7] [13.5/14.2] [23] [27] [12] [23.5] [45] [65] [35] [50]
Front cover tightening torque [Nm]

Plastic cover (low IP) Click Click - - Click Click Click Click Click Click 2.0 2.0
Metal cover (IP55/66) - - 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 - - 2.2 2.2 2.0 2.0
Table 5.2 Weight and Dimensions
MG11BC22
MG11BC22
A C D
B
130BT330.10
61 68 6 39 42 50 53 54 5
130BA406.10
03 02 01 06 05 04
E
F
010
06
010
G H
06
I
130BT339.10
5.1.3 Accessory Bags
130BT309.10
RELAY
L1 L
2 1
91 9 L3 RELAY
2 93 U V 01 1
03 02
96 9 W 04
7 98 06 05 J K
WARNING:
Risk of Electric Shock - Dual supply
ISOA0021
Disconnect mains and loadsharing before service
Enclosure type A1, A2 and A3 Enclosure type A56 Enclosure type B1 and B2 Enclosure type C1 and C2
RELAY
1
RELAY
2
RELAY 1 03 02 01
RELAY 2 06 05
04 61 68
01 39 42 50 53
54 5
01 03 02
03 02
06 05 04 61 68 06 05 04 61 68
39 42 50 39 42 50
53 54 5
130BT346.10
53 54 5
130BT349.10
130BT348.10
WARNIN
Risk of G:
DisconnElectric Shock
ect mains - Dual supply
and loadsha
130BT347.10
ring before
service WARNING
WARNING: STORED CHARGE
Risk of Electric 15 MIN. AFTER DO NOT TOUCH
CHARGE DISCONNECT UNTIL
Disconnec Shock - Dual
supply ATTENDRERESIDUELLE. ION
t mains and 15 MIN. APRES
loadsharin DECONNEXIO
g before N
service
WARNING
Risk of Electric :
Disconnect Shock - Dual
mains and supply
loadsharing
before service
61 68
39 42 50
53 54 95
95
Design Guide
99
RELAY
1
99
RELAY 2
01
03 02
04
06 05
WARNING
Risk of Electri :
c Shock -
Discunnect Dual supply
mains and
loadsharing
before service
Enclosure type B3 Enclosure type B4 Enclosure type C3 Enclosure type C4

1 + 2 only available in units with brake chopper. For the DC link connection (load sharing), connector 1 can be ordered separately (code no. 130B1064).
An 8-pole connector is included in accessory bag for FC 102 without Safe Torque Off.
Table 5.3 Parts included in Accessory Bags

89
5 5
5.1.4 Mechanical Mounting
130BA419.10
All enclosure types allow side-by-side installation except
a
when a IP21/IP4X/TYPE 1 Enclosure Kit is used (see
chapter 3.1 Options and Accessories).
Side-by-side mounting
IP20 A and B enclosures can be arranged side-by-side with
no clearance required between them, but the mounting
order is important. Figure 5.1 shows how to mount the
5 5 frames correctly.
130BD389.11
Figure 5.2 Clearance
Enclosure type A2/A3/A4/A5/B1 B2/B3/B4/C1/C3 C2/C4

a (ins [mm]) 3.94 [100] 7.87 [200] 8.86 [225]
b (ins [mm]) 3.94 [100] 7.87 [200] 8.86 [225]
Table 5.4 Air Passage for Different Enclosure Types

A2 A2
1. Drill holes in accordance with the measurements

B3 B3
given.
Figure 5.1 Correct Side-by-side Mounting
2. Provide screws suitable for the surface for
mounting the adjustable frequency drive.
Retighten all four screws.
If the IP 21 Enclosure kit is used on enclosure type A2 or
A3, there must be a clearance between the adjustable
130BA219.11
frequency drives of min. 2 in [50 mm].
For optimal cooling conditions, allow a free-air passage

above and below the adjustable frequency drive. See
Table 5.4.
1
Figure 5.3 Proper Mounting with Backplate

Mounting enclosure types A4, A5, B1, B2, C1 and C2 on a
130BA228.11
non-solid back wall, the adjustable frequency drive must
be provided with a backplate, “1”, due to insufficient
cooling air over the heatsink.
Enclosure IP20 IP21 IP55 IP66

A2 * * - -
A3 * * - -
1
A4/A5 - - 1.48 [2] 1.48 [2]
B1 - * 1.62 [2.2] 1.62 [2.2]
B2 - * 1.62 [2.2] 1.62 [2.2] 5 5
B3 * - - -
B4 1.48 [2] - - -
C1 - * 1.62 [2.2] 1.62 [2.2]
Figure 5.4 Proper Mounting with Railings C2 - * 1.62 [2.2] 1.62 [2.2]
C3 1.48 [2] - - -
C4 1.48 [2] - - -
Item Description * = No screws to tighten
1 Backplate - = Does not exist
Table 5.5 Legend to Figure 5.4 Table 5.6 Tightening torque for covers (lb/ft [Nm])
130BA392.11
5.1.5 Field Mounting
For field mounting the IP21/IP4X top/TYPE 1 kits or IP54/55

units are recommended.
2
Figure 5.5 Mounting on a Non-solid Back Wall

Electrical Installation Design Guide
6 Electrical Installation
6.1 Connections - Enclosure Types A, B

and C
6.1.1 Torque
NOTICE!
Cables General
All cabling must comply with national and local
regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient
6 6 temperature. Copper (167 °F [75 °C]) conductors are
recommended.
Aluminum Conductors
Terminals can accept aluminum conductors, but the
conductor surface must be clean, and the oxidation must
be removed and sealed by neutral acid-free Vaseline
grease before the conductor is connected.
Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after
two days due to softness of the aluminum. It is crucial to
keep the connection a gas-tight joint; otherwise, the
aluminum surface will oxidize again.

Enclosure 200–240 V 380–480 V 525–690 V Cable for Tightening up torque

type (hp [kW]) (hp [kW]) (hp [kW]) (lb/ft [Nm])
A2 1.5–3 1.5–5 -
[1.1–2.2] [1.1–4]
A3 4–5 7.5–10 -
[3–3.7] [5.5–7.5]
A4 1.5–3 1.5–5
[1.1–2.2] [1.1–4]
A5 1.5–5 1.5–10 -
[1.1–3.7] [1.1–7.5]
B1 7.5–15 15–25 - Line power, brake resistor, load sharing, motor cables 1.33 [1.8]
[5.5–11] [11–18] Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
B2 20 30–40 15–40 Line power, brake resistor, load sharing cables 3.32 [4.5]
[15] [22–30] [11–30] Motor cables 3.32 [4.5]
Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
B3 7.5–15 15–25 -
Ground
Line power, brake resistor, load sharing, motor cables
1.48–2.21 [2–3]
1.33 [1.8]
6 6
[5.5–11] [11–18] Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
B4 11–25 30–50 - Line power, brake resistor, load sharing, motor cables 3.32 [4.5]
[15–18] [22–37] Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
C1 25–40 50–75 - Line power, brake resistor, load sharing cables 7.38 [10]
[18–30] [37–55] Motor cables 7.38 [10]
Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
C2 50–60 100–125 50–125 Line power, motor cables 10.33 [14] (up to
[37–45] [75–90] [37–90] 4/0 AWG [95 mm2])
17.7 [24] (over 4/0 AWG
[95 mm2])
Load sharing, brake cables 10.33 [14]
Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
C3 30–40 60–75 - Line power, brake resistor, load sharing, motor cables 7.38 [10]
[22–30] [45–55] Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
C4 50–60 100–125 - Line power, motor cables 10.33 [14] (up to
[37–45] [75–90] 4/0 AWG [95 mm2])
17.7 [24] (over 4/0 AWG
[95 mm2])
Load sharing, brake cables 10.33 [14]
Relay 0.37–0.44 [0.5–0.6]
Ground 1.48–2.21 [2–3]
Table 6.1 Tightening-up Torque

6.1.2 Removal of Knockouts for Extra

Cables
CAUTION
The ground connection cable cross-section must be at
least 10 mm2 or 2 x rated line power wires terminated
1. Remove the cable entry from the adjustable
separately according to EN 50178.
frequency drive (this prevents foreign parts from
falling into the adjustable frequency drive when
removing knockouts). The AC line input connection is fitted to the line power
switch if this is included.
2. Cable entry has to be supported around the
knockout to be removed.
3. The knockout can now be removed with a strong
mandrel and a hammer.
4. Remove burrs from the hole.
6 6 5. Mount the cable entry on the adjustable
frequency drive.
6.1.3 Connection to Line and Grounding

Figure 6.1 AC line input connections
NOTICE!
The plug connector for power can be plugged on
adjustable frequency drives of up to 10 hp [7.5 kW]. AC line input connection for enclosure types A1, A2
and A3:
130BA261.10
1. Fit the two screws in the de-coupling plate, slide
it into place and tighten the screws.
2. Make sure the adjustable frequency drive is
properly grounded. Connect to ground
connection (terminal 95). Use screw from the
accessory bag. M
A
I N
S RELAY 1 RELAY 2
95
3. Place plug connector 91 (L1), 92 (L2), 93 (L3) from -D

C+
D C
the accessory bag onto the terminals labeled

BR
-B
R+
U
V
W
MAINS at the bottom of the adjustable frequency

- LC +
drive.
99
4. Attach the line wires to the line power plug

connector.
5. Support the cable with the enclosed supporting Figure 6.2 Fitting the Mounting Plate
brackets.
NOTICE!
Ensure that AC line voltage corresponds to the AC line
voltage on the nameplate.
CAUTION
IT Line Power
Do not connect 400 V adjustable frequency drives with
RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between
phase and ground of more than 440 V.

AC line input connector enclosure type A4/A5 (IP55/66)
130BA262.10
130BT336.10
L3
L 2 93
L1
92
91
Figure 6.6 Connecting to Line Power and Grounding without

Disconnector
M
I
N
S
6 6
130BT335.10
95
RELAY 2
RELAY 1
+D
C
BR
-
BR
+
U
V
W
Figure 6.7 Connecting to Line Power and Grounding with

Disconnector
Figure 6.3 Tightening the Ground Cable
When disconnector is used (enclosure type A4/A5), the PE

130BA263.10
must be mounted on the left side of the adjustable

frequency drive.
130BT332.10
M
A
I
N
S
RELAY 2
95
RELAY 1
L1
L2
91 L3
92
93
+D
C
BR
- B
R +
U
V
W
Figure 6.4 Mounting Line Power Plug and Tightening

Wires
Figure 6.8 AC Line Input Connection Enclosure Types B1 and
B2 (IP21/NEMA Type 1 and IP55/66/ NEMA Type 12)
130BA264.10
M
L1 A
I
91 L2 N
S
92 L3
93
RELAY 2
RELAY 1
+D
C
BR
- BR
+
U
99 V
W
- LC -
Figure 6.5 Tighten Support Bracket

130BA725.10
130BA389.10
91 92 93
L1 L2 L3
95
Figure 6.9 AC Line Input Connection Enclosure Type B3

6 6 (IP20)
130BA714.10
L1 91
L2 92
L3 93
Figure 6.11 AC Line Input Connection Enclosure Types C1

and C2 (IP21/NEMA Type 1 and IP55/66/NEMA Type 12).
L1 91
L2 92
L3 93
U 96
V 97 W
95 98 DC-88
DC+89
R-81
R+82
99
130BA718.10
91 92
93
Figure 6.10 AC Line Input Connection Enclosure Type B4

(IP20)
95
91 92
93
96
97 98
88 89 99
81 82
Figure 6.12 AC Line Input Connection Enclosure Type C3

(IP20).

Cable length and cross-section
130BA719.10
L1
L2
The adjustable frequency drive has been tested with a
L3
given length of cable and a given cross-section of that
91
92
93 cable. If the cross-section is increased, the cable
capacitance - and thus the leakage current - may increase,
thereby requiring that the cable length is reduced
accordingly. Keep the motor cable as short as possible to
L1 L2
L3
reduce the noise level and leakage currents.
95 U V W
91 92 DC-DC
93 +R- R+
99 96
97 98
Switching frequency
88 89
81 82
When adjustable frequency drives are used with sine-wave

filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the
Figure 6.13 AC Line Input Connection Enclosure Type C4 switching frequency must be set according to the sine-
(IP20). wave filter instruction in 14-01 Switching Frequency. 6 6
1. Fasten decoupling plate to the bottom of the
Usually the power cables for line power are non-shielded adjustable frequency drive with screws and
cables. washers from the accessory bag.
2. Attach motor cable to terminals 96 (U), 97 (V),
6.1.4 Motor Connection 98 (W).
3. Connect to ground connection (terminal 99) on
NOTICE! decoupling plate with screws from the accessory
To comply with EMC emission specifications, shielded/ bag.
armored cables are required. For more information, see
4. Insert plug connectors 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W)
chapter 2.9.2 EMC Test Results.
(up to 10 hp [7.5 kW]) and motor cable to
terminals labeled MOTOR.
See chapter 9 General Specifications and Troubleshooting for
5. Fasten shielded cable to the decoupling plate
correct dimensioning of motor cable cross-section and
with screws and washers from the accessory bag.
length.
All types of three-phase asynchronous standard motors can
Shielding of cables: be connected to the adjustable frequency drive. Normally,
Avoid installation with twisted shield ends (pigtails). They small motors are star-connected (230/400 V, Y). Large
spoil the shielding effect at higher frequencies. If it is motors are normally delta-connected (400/690 V, Δ). Refer
necessary to break the shield to install a motor isolator or to the motor nameplate for correct connection mode and
motor contactor, the shield must be continued at the voltage.
lowest possible HF impedance.
Connect the motor cable shield to both the decoupling Procedure
plate on the adjustable frequency drive and to the metal
1. Strip a section of the outer cable insulation.
housing on the motor.
Make the shield connections with the largest possible 2. Position the stripped wire under the cable clamp
surface area (cable clamp). This is done by using the to establish mechanical fixation and electrical
supplied installation devices in the adjustable frequency contact between cable shield and ground.
drive. 3. Connect ground wire to the nearest grounding
If it is necessary to split the shield to install a motor terminal in accordance with grounding
isolator or motor relay, continue the shield with the lowest instructions.
possible HF impedance.
4. Connect the three-phase motor wiring to
terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), and 98 (W), see
Figure 6.14.
5. Tighten terminals in accordance with the
information provided in chapter 6.1.1 Torque.

130BA726.10
130BD531.10
W
V 98
U 97
96
6 6
Figure 6.16 Motor Connection for Enclosure Type B3
130BA721.10
Figure 6.14 Motor Connection
130BT333.10
U 96
V 97
W 98
L1 91 L
2 92 L3
93
U 96 V
97 W 9
8 DC- 88 D
C+89
R- 81
R+ 82
99
Figure 6.17 Motor Connection for Enclosure Type B4
Figure 6.15 Motor Connection for Enclosure Type B1 and B2

(IP21/NEMA Type 1, IP55/NEMA Type 12 and IP66/NEMA
Type 4X)

Term. 96 97 98 99
130BA390.11
no.
U V W PE1) Motor voltage 0–100% of AC line
88
DC-
89
DC+
81
R-
8
R+ voltage.
91 92 93
3 wires out of motor
L1 96 97 98
L2 L3 U V W
95 99
U1 V1 W1 Delta-connected
PE1)
W2 U2 V2 6 wires out of motor
U1 V1 W1 PE1) Star-connected U2, V2, W2
U2, V2 and W2 to be interconnected
separately.
Table 6.2 Terminal Descriptions

1) Protected Ground Connection
6 6
175ZA114.11
Motor Motor
U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
Figure 6.18 Motor Connection Enclosure Type C1 and C2
(IP21/NEMA Type 1 and IP55/66/NEMA Type 12)
FC FC
130BA740.10
96 97 98 96 97 98
Figure 6.20 Star and Delta Connections
L1
L2
NOTICE!
L3
U V
91 W
92 9 DC-
DC+
3
99 96
R- R+ In motors without phase insulation paper or other
97 98 88 8
9 81 insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with
82
voltage supply (such as an adjustable frequency drive),
fit a sine-wave filter on the output of the adjustable
frequency drive.
U V
W
96 97 98
Figure 6.19 Motor Connection for Enclosure Type C3 and C4

Cable entry holes
130BB657.10
The suggested use of the holes are purely recommen-
dations, and other solutions are possible. Unused cable
entry holes can be sealed with rubber grommets (for IP21).
* Tolerance ± 0.007 in [0.2 mm] [4]
[5]
130BB656.10
[6]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
[2]
[1]
[3] Figure 6.22 A3 - IP21
6 6 [2]
Hole number and recommended Dimensions1) Nearest

use UL [in] [mm] metric
1) Line power 3/4 28.4 M25
2) Motor 3/4 28.4 M25
3) Brake/Load Sharing 3/4 28.4 M25
4) Control Cable 1/2 22.5 M20
Figure 6.21 A2 - IP21
Hole number and recommended Dimensions1) Nearest Table 6.4 Legend to Figure 6.22
use UL [in] [mm] metric
1) Tolerance ± 0.007 in [0.2 mm]
1) Line power 3/4 28.4 M25
2) Motor 3/4 28.4 M25
130BB663.10
3) Brake/Load S 3/4 28.4 M25 [2]
4) Control Cable 1/2 22.5 M20 [3]

5) Control Cable 1/2 22.5 M20 [4]
[5]
Table 6.3 Legend to Figure 6.21 [1]
1) Tolerance ± 0.007 in [0.2 mm] Figure 6.23 A4 - IP55
Hole number Dimensions1)

and
Nearest metric
recommended UL [in] [mm]
use
1) Line power 3/4 28.4 M25
2) Motor 3/4 28.4 M25
3) Brake/Load 3/4 28.4 M25
Sharing
4) Control 1/2 22.5 M20
Cable
5) Removed - - -


130BB666.10
130BB665.10
[4] [4]
[2] [5]
[3] [3]
[5] [6]
[1] [2]
Figure 6.24 A4 - IP55 Threaded Connector Holes [1]
Figure 6.26 A5- IP55 Threaded Connector Holes
Hole number and recommended use Nearest metric

1) Line power M25 Hole number and recommended use Nearest metric
2) Motor M25 1) Line power M25
3) Brake/Load Sharing M25 2) Motor M25
6 6
4) Control Cable M16 3) Brake/Load S 1.12 in [28.4 mm]1)
5) Control Cable M20 4) Control Cable M25
5) Control Cable M25
6) Control Cable M25
130BB664.10
[3]
[4] Table 6.8 Legend to Figure 6.26
[5] 1) Knockout hole
[6]
130BB659.10
[2] [1]
[1] [4]
Figure 6.25 A5 - IP55 [5]
[3]
[2]

and
Nearest metric
Figure 6.27 B1 - IP21
use
1) Line power 3/4 28.4 M25
2) Motor 3/4 28.4 M25
3) Brake/Load 3/4 28.4 M25
and
Sharing Nearest metric
4) Control 3/4 28.4 M25
use
Cable
1) Line power 1 34.7 M32
5) Control 3/4 28.4 M25
2) Motor 1 34.7 M32
Cable2)
3) Brake/Load 1 34.7 M32
6) Control 3/4 28.4 M25
Sharing
Cable2)
4) Control 1 34.7 M32
Table 6.7 Legend to Figure 6.25 Cable
5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20
Cable
2) Knockout hole

[5]
130BB667.10
130BB660.10
[4] [1]
[3] [4]
[6]
[5]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]


and Hole number Dimensions1)
Nearest metric
recommended UL [in] [mm] and
Nearest metric
6 6 use
recommended
use
UL [in] [mm]
2) Motor 1 34.7 M32 1) Line power 1 1/4 44.2 M40

3) Brake/Load 1 34.7 M32 2) Motor 1 1/4 44.2 M40
Sharing 3) Brake/Load 1 34.7 M32
4) Control 3/4 28.4 M25 Sharing
Cable 4) Control 3/4 28.4 M25
5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20 Cable
5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20 Cable
Cable2)
Table 6.10 Legend to Figure 6.28 1) Tolerance ± 0.007 in [0.2 mm]
130BB668.10
2) Knockout hole
[4]
130BB669.10
[6]
[3]
[5] [5]
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
[4]
[1]
Figure 6.29 B1 - IP55 Threaded Connector Holes

and
Nearest metric
Hole number and recommended use Nearest metric recommended UL [in] [mm]
1) Line power M32 use
2) Motor M32 1) Line power 1 1/4 44.2 M40
3) Brake/Load Sharing M32 2) Motor 1 1/4 44.2 M40
4) Control Cable M25 3) Brake/Load 1 34.7 M32
5) Control Cable M25 Sharing
6) Control Cable 0.89 in [22.5 mm]1) 4) Control 3/4 28.4 M25
Cable
Table 6.11 Legend to Figure 6.29 5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20
1) Knockout hole Cable2)

2) Knockout hole

130BB661.10
130BB670.10
[4] [5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2] [3]
[5] [1]
[1]
Figure 6.32 B2 - IP55 Threaded Connector Holes Figure 6.34 C1 - IP21
Hole number and recommended use Nearest metric Hole number Dimensions1)
1) Line power M40 and
Nearest metric
2) Motor M40 recommended UL [in] [mm]
use
6 6
3) Brake/Load Sharing M32
4) Control Cable M25 1) Line power 2 63.3 M63
5) Control Cable M20 2) Motor 2 63.3 M63
3) Brake/Load 1 1/2 50.2 M50
Table 6.14 Legend to Figure 6.32 Sharing
4) Control 3/4 28.4 M25
130BB658.10
Cable
[3]
5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20
[2]
Cable
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6] 1) Tolerance ± 0.007 in [0.2 mm]
130BB662.10
[5]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Hole number Dimensions1) [1]
and
Nearest metric Figure 6.35 C2 - IP21
use
2) Motor 1 34.7 M32 Hole number Dimensions1)
3) Brake/Load 1 34.7 M32 and
Nearest metric
Sharing recommended UL [in] [mm]
4) Control 1/2 22.5 M20 use
Cable 1) Line power 2 63.3 M63
5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20 2) Motor 2 63.3 M63
Cable 3) Brake/Load 1 1/2 50.2 M50
6) Control 1/2 22.5 M20 Sharing
Cable
Table 6.15 Legend to Figure 6.33 5) Control 1/2 22.5 M20
1) Tolerance ± 0.007 in [0.2 mm] Cable
6) Control 1/2 22.5 M20
Cable


6.1.5 Relay Connection
130BA391.12
To set the relay output, see parameter group 5-4* Relays.
RELAY 2
06 05 04
No. 01 - 02 make (normally open)
RELAY 1
03 02 01
01 - 03 break (normally closed) DC
+
04 - 05 make (normally open)

04 - 06 break (normally closed)
Table 6.18 Description of Relays
130BA029.12
6 6 Re
lay
2
Re
lay
1
36
35
Figure 6.37 Terminals for Relay Connection

(Enclosure Types C1 and C2).
130BA215.10
REL
AY
1
REL
01 AY
02 2
03
Figure 6.36 Terminals for Relay Connection 04
05
90
(Enclosure Types A1, A2 and A3).
9
6
9
311
Figure 6.38 Terminals for Relay Connection

(Enclosure Types A5, B1 and B2).

6.2 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6.2.2 Recommendations

6.2.1 Fuses
WARNING
It is recommended to use fuses and/or circuit breakers on In case of malfunction, not following the recommen-
the supply side as protection in case of component dation may result in risk to personnel and damage to
breakdown inside the adjustable frequency drive (first the adjustable frequency drive and other equipment.
fault).
The tables in chapter 6.2.4 Fuse Tables list the
NOTICE! recommended rated current. Recommended fuses are of
the type gG for small to medium power sizes. For larger
Using fuses and/or circuit breakers on the supply side is powers, aR fuses are recommended. For circuit breakers,
mandatory to ensure compliance with IEC 60364 for CE Moeller types are recommended. Other types of circuit
or NEC 2009 for UL. breakers may be used provided they limit the energy into
the adjustable frequency drive to a level equal to or lower
6 6
WARNING than the Moeller types.
Protect personnel and property against the consequence

If fuses/circuit breakers according to recommendations are
of component breakdown internally in the adjustable
selected, possible damage on the adjustable frequency
frequency drive.
drive is mainly limited to damages inside the unit.
Branch Circuit Protection

For further information, see Application Note Fuses and
To protect the installation against electrical and fire hazard,
Circuit Breakers.
all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear, machines,
etc., must be protected against short-circuit and
overcurrent according to national/international regulations. 6.2.3 CE Compliance
NOTICE! Fuses or circuit breakers are mandatory to comply with IEC
The recommendations given do not cover branch circuit 60364. Danfoss recommend using a selection of the
protection for UL. following.
Short-circuit protection The fuses below are suitable for use on a circuit capable of
Danfoss recommends using the fuses/circuit breakers delivering 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 240 V, 480 V, 600 V,
mentioned below to protect service personnel and or 690 V depending on the adjustable frequency drive
property in case of component breakdown in the voltage rating. With the proper fusing the adjustable
adjustable frequency drive. frequency drive, short-circuit current rating (SCCR) is
100,000 Arms.
The following UL-listed fuses are suitable:

• UL248-4 class CC fuses
• UL248-8 class J fuses
• UL248-12 class R fuses (RK1)
• UL248-15 class T fuses

The following max. fuse size and type have been tested:

6.2.4 Fuse Tables
Enclosure Power (hp [kW]) Recommended Recommended Recommended circuit Max trip level [A]
type fuse size Max. fuse breaker
Moeller
A2 1.5–3 [1.1–2.2] gG-10 (1.5–2 [1.1–1.5]) gG-25 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (3 [2.2])
A3 4–5 [3.0–3.7] gG-16 (4 [3]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-20 (5 [3.7])
B3 7.5–15 [5.5–11] gG-25 (7.5–10 [5.5–7.5]) gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
gG-32 (15 [11])
B4 11–25 [15–18] gG-50 (20 [15]) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (25 [18])
6 6 C3 30–40 [22–30] gG-80 (30 [22]) gG-150 (22) NZMB2-A200 150
aR-125 (40 [30]) aR-160 (30)
C4 50–60 [37–45] aR-160 (50 [37]) aR-200 (50 [37]) NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (60 [45]) aR-250 (60 [45])
A4 1.5–3 [1.1–2.2] gG-10 (1.5–2 [1.1–1.5]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (3 [2.2])
A5 0.34–5 [0.25–3.7] gG-10 (0.34–2 [0.25–1.5]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (3–4 [2.2–3])
gG-20 (5 [3.7])
B1 7.5–15 [5.5–11] gG-25 (7.5 [5.5]) gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
gG-32 (10–15 [7.5–11])
B2 15 gG-50 gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
C1 25–40 [18–30] gG-63 (25 [18.5]) gG-160 (25–30 [18.5–22]) NZMB2-A200 160
gG-80 (30 [22]) aR-160 (40 [30])
gG-100 (40 [30])
C2 50–60 [37–45] aR-160 (50 [37]) aR-200 (50 [37]) NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (60 [45]) aR-250 (60 [45])
Table 6.19 200–240 V, Enclosure Types A, B and C

type fuse size Max. fuse breaker Moeller
A2 1.5–5 [1.1–4.0] gG-10 (1.5–4 [1.1–3]) gG-25 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (5 [4])
A3 7.5–10 [5.5–7.5] gG-16 gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
B3 15–25 [11–18] gG-40 gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
B4 30–50 [22–37] gG-50 (30 [22]) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (40 [30])
gG-80 (50 [37])
C3 60–75 [45–55] gG-100 (60 [45]) gG-150 (60 [45]) NZMB2-A200 150
gG-160 (75 [55]) gG-160 (75 [55])
C4 100–125 [75–90] aR-200 (100 [75]) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-250 (125 [90])
A4 1.5–5 [1.1–4] gG-10 (1.5–4 [1.1–3]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 82 [25] 6 6
gG-16 (5 [4])
A5 1.5–10 [1.1–7.5] gG-10 (1.5–4 [1.1–3]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (5–10 [4–7.5])
B1 15–25 [11–18.5] gG-40 gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
B2 30–40 [22–30] gG-50 (30 [22]) gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (40 [30])
C1 50–75 [37–55] gG-80 (50 [37]) gG-160 NZMB2-A200 160
gG-100 (60 [45])
gG-160 (75 [55])
C2 100–125 [75–90] aR-200 (100 [75]) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-250 (125 [90])

Moeller
A3 7.5–10 [5.5–7.5] gG-10 (7.5 [5.5]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (10 [7.5])
B3 15–25 [11–18] gG-25 (15 [11]) gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
gG-32 (20–25 [15–18])
B4 30–50 [22–37] gG-40 (30 [22]) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-50 (40 [30])
gG-63 (50 [37])
C3 60–75 [45–55] gG-63 (60 [45]) gG-150 NZMB2-A200 150
gG-100 (75 [55])
C4 100–125 [75–90] aR-160 (100 [75]) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
6 6 A5 1.5–10 [1.1–7.5]
aR-200 (125 [90])
gG-10 (1.5–7.5 [1.1–5.5]) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (10 [7.5])
B1 15–25 [11–18] gG-25 (15 [11]) gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
gG-32 (20 [15])
gG-40 (25 [18.5])
B2 30–40 [22–30] gG-50 (30 [22]) gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (40 [30])
C1 50–75 [37–55] gG-63 (50 [37]) gG-160 (50–60 [37–45]) NZMB2-A200 160
gG-100 (60 [45]) aR-250 (75 [55])
aR-160 (75 [55])
C2 100–125 [75–90] aR-200 (100–125 [75–90]) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
Moeller
A3 1.5 [1.1] gG-6 gG-25 - -
2 [1.5] gG-6 gG-25
3 [2.2] gG-6 gG-25
4 [3] gG-10 gG-25
5 [4] gG-10 gG-25
7.5 [5.5] gG-16 gG-25
10 [7.5] gG-16 gG-25
B2 15 [11] gG-25 (15 [11]) gG-63 - -
20 [15] gG-32 (20 [15]) gG-80 (40 [30])
25 [18] gG-32 (25 [18])
30 [22] gG-40 (30 [22])
40 [30] gG-63 (40 [30])
C2 50 [37] gG-63 (50 [37]) gG-100 (50 [37]) - -
60 [45] gG-80 (60 [45]) gG-125 (60 [45])
75 [55] gG-100 (75 [55]) gG-160 (75–100 [55–75])
100 [75] gG-125 (100 [75])
C3 60 [45] gG-80 gG-100 - -
75 [55] gG-100 gG-125

UL Compliance
Fuses or circuit breakers are mandatory for compliance with NEC 2009. Danfoss recommends using a selection of the
following
The fuses below are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 240 V, or 480 V, or 500 V,
or 600 V depending on the adjustable frequency drive voltage rating. With the proper fusing the adjustable frequency drive
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) is 100,000 Arms.
Recommended max. fuse

Power Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann
(hp [kW]) Type RK11) Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
1.5 [1.1] KTN-R-10 JKS-10 JJN-10 FNQ-R-10 KTK-R-10 LP-CC-10
2 [1.5] KTN-R-15 JKS-15 JJN-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
4 [3.0] KTN-R-25 JKS-25 JJN-25 FNQ-R-25 KTK-R-25 LP-CC-25 6 6
7.5 [5.5]- KTN-R-50 KS-50 JJN-50 - - -
10 [7.5]
15 [11] KTN-R-60 JKS-60 JJN-60 - - -
15–18.5 KTN-R-80 JKS-80 JJN-80 - - -
30 [22] KTN-R-125 JKS-125 JJN-125 - - -
40 [30] KTN-R-150 JKS-150 JJN-150 - - -
50 [37] KTN-R-200 JKS-200 JJN-200 - - -
60 [45] KTN-R-250 JKS-250 JJN-250 - - -

Ferraz- Ferraz-
Power SIBA Littelfuse
Shawmut Shawmut
(hp [kW]) Type RK1 Type RK1
Type CC Type RK13)
1.5 [1.1] 5017906-010 KLN-R-10 ATM-R-10 A2K-10-R
2 [1.5] 5017906-016 KLN-R-15 ATM-R-15 A2K-15-R
3 [2.2] 5017906-020 KLN-R-20 ATM-R-20 A2K-20-R
4 [3.0] 5017906-025 KLN-R-25 ATM-R-25 A2K-25-R
5 [3.7] 5012406-032 KLN-R-30 ATM-R-30 A2K-30-R
7.5 [5.5]- 5014006-050 KLN-R-50 - A2K-50-R
10 [7.5]
15 [11] 5014006-063 KLN-R-60 - A2K-60-R
15–18.5 5014006-080 KLN-R-80 - A2K-80-R
30 [22] 2028220-125 KLN-R-125 - A2K-125-R
40 [30] 2028220-150 KLN-R-150 - A2K-150-R
50 [37] 2028220-200 KLN-R-200 - A2K-200-R
60 [45] 2028220-250 KLN-R-250 - A2K-250-R


Ferraz-
Power Bussmann Littelfuse Ferraz-
Shawmut
(hp [kW]) Type JFHR22) JFHR2 Shawmut J
JFHR24)
1.5 [1.1] FWX-10 - - HSJ-10
2 [1.5] FWX-15 - - HSJ-15
3 [2.2] FWX-20 - - HSJ-20
4 [3.0] FWX-25 - - HSJ-25
5 [3.7] FWX-30 - - HSJ-30
7.5 [5.5]- FWX-50 - - HSJ-50
10 [7.5]
15 [11] FWX-60 - - HSJ-60
6 6
20–25 FWX-80 - - HSJ-80
[15–18.5]
30 [22] FWX-125 - - HSJ-125
40 [30] FWX-150 L25S-150 A25X-150 HSJ-150
50 [37] FWX-200 L25S-200 A25X-200 HSJ-200
60 [45] FWX-250 L25S-250 A25X-250 HSJ-250

1) KTS fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for 240 V adjustable frequency drives.
2) FWH fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V adjustable frequency drives.
3) A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A2KR for 240 V adjustable frequency drives.
4) A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V adjustable frequency drives.

(hp [kW]) Type RK1 Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
1.5 [1.1] KTS-R-6 JKS-6 JJS-6 FNQ-R-6 KTK-R-6 LP-CC-6
2–3 KTS-R-10 JKS-10 JJS-10 FNQ-R-10 KTK-R-10 LP-CC-10
[1.5–2.2]
4 [3] KTS-R-15 JKS-15 JJS-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
5 [4] KTS-R-20 JKS-20 JJS-20 FNQ-R-20 KTK-R-20 LP-CC-20
10 [7.5] KTS-R-30 JKS-30 JJS-30 FNQ-R-30 KTK-R-30 LP-CC-30
15 [11]- KTS-R-40 JKS-40 JJS-40 - - -
20 [15]
25 [18] KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
30 [22] KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
40 [30] KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
50 [37] KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
60 [45] KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
75 [55] KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
100 [75] KTS-R-200 JKS-200 JJS-200 - - -
125 [0] KTS-R-250 JKS-250 JJS-250 - - -


Ferraz- Ferraz-
Power SIBA Littelfuse
Shawmut Shawmut
(hp [kW]) Type RK1 Type RK1
Type CC Type RK1
1.5–3 5017906-010 KLS-R-10 ATM-R-10 A6K-10-R
[1.1–2.2]
4 [3] 5017906-016 KLS-R-15 ATM-R-15 A6K-15-R
5 [4] 5017906-020 KLS-R-20 ATM-R-20 A6K-20-R
7.5 [5.5] 5017906-025 KLS-R-25 ATM-R-25 A6K-25-R
10 [7.5] 5012406-032 KLS-R-30 ATM-R-30 A6K-30-R
15 [11]- 5014006-040 KLS-R-40 - A6K-40-R
20 [15]
25 [18] 5014006-050 KLS-R-50 - A6K-50-R
30 [22] 5014006-063 KLS-R-60 - A6K-60-R 6 6
40 [30] 2028220-100 KLS-R-80 - A6K-80-R
50 [37] 2028220-125 KLS-R-100 - A6K-100-R
60 [45] 2028220-125 KLS-R-125 - A6K-125-R
75 [55] 2028220-160 KLS-R-150 - A6K-150-R
100 [75] 2028220-200 KLS-R-200 - A6K-200-R
125 [90] 2028220-250 KLS-R-250 - A6K-250-R

Power Bussmann Ferraz- Shawmut Littelfuse
Ferraz- Shawmut J
(hp [kW]) JFHR2 JFHR21) JFHR2
1.5–3 FWH-10 HSJ-10 - -
[1.1–2.2]
4 [3] FWH-15 HSJ-15 - -
5 [4] FWH-20 HSJ-20 - -
7.5 [5.5] FWH-25 HSJ-25 - -
10 [7.5] FWH-30 HSJ-30 - -
15 [11]- FWH-40 HSJ-40 - -
20 [15]
25 [18] FWH-50 HSJ-50 - -
30 [22] FWH-60 HSJ-60 - -
40 [30] FWH-80 HSJ-80 - -
50 [37] FWH-100 HSJ-100 - -
60 [45] FWH-125 HSJ-125 - -
75 [55] FWH-150 HSJ-150 - -
100 [75] FWH-200 HSJ-200 A50-P-225 L50-S-225
125 [90] FWH-250 HSJ-250 A50-P-250 L50-S-250

1) Ferraz-Shawmut A50QS fuses may substitute for A50P fuses.


[1.5–2.2]
4 [3] KTS-R15 JKS-15 JJS-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
15 [11]- KTS-R-35 JKS-35 JJS-35 - - -
20 [15]
25 [18] KTS-R-45 JKS-45 JJS-45 - - -
6 6 30 [22] KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
40 [30] KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
50 [37] KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
60 [45] KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
75 [55] KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
100 [75] KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
125 [90] KTS-R-175 JKS-175 JJS-175 - - -

Ferraz-
Power SIBA Littelfuse Ferraz-
Shawmut
(hp [kW]) Type RK1 Type RK1 Shawmut J
Type RK1
1.5 [1.1] 5017906-005 KLS-R-005 A6K-5-R HSJ-6
2–3 5017906-010 KLS-R-010 A6K-10-R HSJ-10
[1.5–2.2]
4 [3] 5017906-016 KLS-R-015 A6K-15-R HSJ-15
5 [4] 5017906-020 KLS-R-020 A6K-20-R HSJ-20
7.5 [5.5] 5017906-025 KLS-R-025 A6K-25-R HSJ-25
10 [7.5] 5017906-030 KLS-R-030 A6K-30-R HSJ-30
15 [11]- 5014006-040 KLS-R-035 A6K-35-R HSJ-35
20 [15]
25 [18] 5014006-050 KLS-R-045 A6K-45-R HSJ-45
30 [22] 5014006-050 KLS-R-050 A6K-50-R HSJ-50
40 [30] 5014006-063 KLS-R-060 A6K-60-R HSJ-60
50 [37] 5014006-080 KLS-R-075 A6K-80-R HSJ-80
60 [45] 5014006-100 KLS-R-100 A6K-100-R HSJ-100
75 [55] 2028220-125 KLS-R-125 A6K-125-R HSJ-125
100[90] 2028220-150 KLS-R-150 A6K-150-R HSJ-150
125 [90] 2028220-200 KLS-R-175 A6K-175-R HSJ-175

1) 170M fuses shown from Bussmann use the -/80 visual indicator. –TN/80 Type T, -/110 or TN/110 Type T indicator fuses of the same
size and amperage may be substituted.


(hp [kW])
[1.5–2.2]
15 [11]- KTS-R-35 JKS-35 JJS-35 - - -
20 [15]
25 [18] KTS-R-45 JKS-45 JJS-45 - - - 6 6
30 [22] KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
40 [30] KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
50 [37] KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
60 [45] KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
75 [55] KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
100 [75] KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
125 [90] KTS-R-175 JKS-175 JJS-175 - - -

Ferraz- Ferraz-
Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann SIBA Littelfuse
Power Max. Shawmut Shawmut
E52273 E4273 E4273 E180276 E81895
(hp [kW]) prefuse E163267/E2137 E2137
RK1/JDDZ J/JDDZ T/JDDZ RK1/JDDZ RK1/JDDZ
RK1/JDDZ J/HSJ
15 [11]- 30 A KTS-R-30 JKS-30 JKJS-30 5017906-030 KLS-R-030 A6K-30-R HST-30
20 [15]
20 [18.5] 45 A KTS-R-45 JKS-45 JJS-45 5014006-050 KLS-R-045 A6K-45-R HST-45
40 [30] 60 A KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 5014006-063 KLS-R-060 A6K-60-R HST-60
100 [75] 125 A KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 2028220-125 KLS-150 A6K-125-R HST-125
125 [90] 150 A KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 2028220-150 KLS-175 A6K-150-R HST-150
Table 6.32 *525–690 V, Enclosure Types B and C

* UL compliance only 525–600 V

6.3 Disconnectors and Contactors

6.3.1 Line Power Disconnectors
Assembling of IP55/NEMA Type 12 (enclosure type A5) with line power disconnector.
Line power switch is placed on left side on enclosure types B1, B2, C1 and C2. Line power switch on A5 enclosures is placed
on right side.
130BD470.10
6 6
F
OF
Figure 6.39 Location of Line Power Switch
Enclosure type Type Terminal connections

A5 Kraus&Naimer KG20A T303 L1 L2 L3 31 43
130BB182.10
B1 Kraus&Naimer KG64 T303
B2 Kraus&Naimer KG64 T303
T1 T2 T3 32 44
C1 50 hp [37 kW] Kraus&Naimer KG100 T303 L1 L2 L3 13
130BB181.10
C1 60–75 hp [45–55 kW] Kraus&Naimer KG105 T303
C2 100 hp [75 kW] Kraus&Naimer KG160 T303
C2 125 hp [90 kW] Kraus&Naimer KG250 T303
T1 T2 T3 14
Table 6.33 Terminal Connections for Various Enclosure Types

6.4 Additional Motor Information The direction of rotation can be changed by switching two
phases in the motor cable or by changing the setting of
6.4.1 Motor Cable 4-10 Motor Speed Direction.
The motor must be connected to terminals U/T1/96, Motor rotation check can be performed using 1-28 Motor
V/T2/97, W/T3/98. Ground to terminal 99. All types of Rotation Check and following the steps shown in the
three-phase asynchronous standard motors can be used display.
with an adjustable frequency drive unit. The factory setting
is for clockwise rotation with the adjustable frequency
drive output connected as follows:
NOTICE!
If a retrofit application requires unequal amounts of
wires per phase, consult the factory for requirements
Terminal No. Function
and documentation or use the top/bottom entry side
96, 97, 98, 99 Line power U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
Ground
cabinet option.
6 6
Table 6.34 Terminal Functions 6.4.2 Motor Thermal Protection
175HA036.11
Motor The electronic thermal relay in the adjustable frequency

U2 V2 W2 drive has received UL-approval for single motor protection,
when 1-90 Motor Thermal Protectionis set for ETR Trip and
1-24 Motor Current is set to the rated motor current (see
U1 V1 W1
the motor nameplate).
For thermal motor protection,it is also possible to use the
PTC Thermistor Card option MCB 112. This card provides
an ATEX certificate to protect motors in explosion hazard
FC areas, Zone 1/21 and Zone 2/22. When 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR combined with the use of
96 97 98
MCB 112, it is possible to control an Ex-e motor in
explosion hazard areas. Consult the Programming Guide for
details on how to set up the adjustable frequency drive for
safe operation of Ex-e motors.
Motor
U2 V2 W2
U1 V1 W1
FC
96 97 98
Figure 6.40 Terminal Connection for Clockwise and Counter-

clockwise Rotation
• Terminal U/T1/96 connected to U-phase
• Terminal V/T2/97 connected to V-phase
• Terminal W/T3/98 connected to W-phase

6.4.3 Parallel Connection of Motors
The adjustable frequency drive can control several motors

connected in parallel. When using a parallel motor
connection, the following must be observed:
• Recommended to run applications with parallel

motors in U/F mode 1-01 Motor Control Principle.
Set the U/F graph in 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U
and 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F.
• VCCplus mode may be used in some applications.
• The total current consumption of the motors

6 6 must not exceed the rated output current IINV for
• If motor sizes are widely different in winding

resistance, starting problems may arise due to too
low motor voltage at low speed.
• The electronic thermal relay (ETR) of the

frequency inverter cannot be used as motor
protection for the individual motor. Provide
further motor protection, e.g., by thermistors in
each motor winding or individual thermal relays.
(Circuit breakers are not suitable as protection
devices).

NOTICE!
Installations with cables connected using a common joint, as shown in the first example in the picture, are only
recommended for short cable lengths.
NOTICE!
When motors are connected in parallel, 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source cannot be used, and 1-01 Motor Control
Principle must be set to Special motor characteristics (U/f).
130BB838.12
6 6
a
d
b e
c f
Figure 6.41 Parallel Motor Connection
c, d) The total motor cable length specified in section 4.5, General Specifications, is valid as long as the parallel cables are
kept short (less than 33 ft [10 m] each).
d, e) Consider voltage drop across the motor cables.
e) Be aware of the maximum motor cable length specified in Table 6.35.
e) Use LC filter for long parallel cables.

Enclosure Type Power Size Voltage [V] 1 cable (ft [m]) 2 cables (ft [m]) 3 cables (ft [m]) 4 cables (ft [m])
(hp [kW])
A5 7.5 400 492.13 147.64 26.25 19.69
[5] [150] [45] [8] [6]
500 492.13 22.97 13.12 9.84
[150] [7] [4] [3]
A2, A5 1.5–2 400 492.13 147.64 65.62 26.25
[1.1–1.5] [150] [45] [20] [8]
500 492.13 147.64 16.4 13.12
[150] [45] [5] [4]
A2, A5 3–5 400 492.13 147.64 65.62 36.09
[2.2–4] [150] [45] [20] [11]
500 492.13 147.64 65.62 19.69
6 6 [150] [45] [20] [6]
A3, A5 7.5–10 400 492.13 147.64 65.62 36.09
[5.5–7.5] [150] [45] [20] [11]
500 492.13 147.64 65.62 36.09
[150] [45] [20] [11]
B1, B2, B3, B4, 15–125 400 492.13 246.06 164.04 121.39
C1, C2, C3, C4 [11–90] [150] [75] [50] [37]
500 492.13 246.06 164.04 121.39
[150] [75] [50] [37]
Table 6.35 Max. Cable Length for Each Parallel Cable, Depending on Quantity of Parallel Cables.
Problems may arise at start and at low RPM values if motor sizes are widely different because small motors' relatively high
ohmic resistance in the stator calls for a higher voltage at start and at low RPM values.
The electronic thermal relay (ETR) of the adjustable frequency drive cannot be used as motor protection for the individual
motor of systems with parallel-connected motors. Provide further motor protection with, for example, thermistors in each
motor or individual thermal relays (Circuit breakers are not suitable as protection).
6.4.4 Direction of Motor Rotation
The default setting is clockwise rotation with the adjustable frequency drive output connected as follows.
Terminal 96 connected to U-phase

Terminal 97 connected to V-phase
Terminal 98 connected to W-phase
The direction of motor rotation is changed by switching two motor phases.
Motor rotation check can be performed using 1-28 Motor Rotation Check and following the steps shown in the display.

6.4.6 Motor Bearing Currents
175HA036.11
Motor
U2 V2 W2
All motors installed with FC 102 90 kW or higher power

adjustable frequency drive should have NDE (Non-Drive
U1 V1 W1 End) insulated bearings installed to eliminate circulating
bearing currents. To minimize DE (Drive End) bearing and
shaft currents proper grounding of the adjustable
frequency drive, motor, driven machine, and motor to the
FC driven machine is required.
96 97 98
Standard Mitigation Strategies
1. Use an insulated bearing.
Motor
2. Apply rigorous installation procedures
2a Ensure the motor and load motor are
6 6
U2 V2 W2 aligned.
2b Strictly follow the EMC Installation
guideline.
U1 V1 W1
2c Reinforce the PE so the high frequency
impedance is lower in the PE than the
input power leads.
FC
2d Provide a good high frequency
connection between the motor and the
96 97 98 adjustable frequency drive for instance
by shielded cable which has a 360°
connection in the motor and the
Figure 6.42 Motor Rotation Check Steps
2e Make sure that the impedance from
adjustable frequency drive to building
ground is lower that the grounding
impedance of the machine. This can be
6.4.5 Motor Insulation difficult for pumps.
For motor cable lengths ≤ the maximum cable length 2f Make a direct ground connection
listed in chapter 9 General Specifications and Trouble- between the motor and load motor.
shooting, the motor insulation ratings listed in Table 6.36 3. Lower the IGBT switching frequency.
are recommended. If a motor has lower insulation rating, it
4. Modify the inverter waveform, 60° AVM vs.
is recommended to use a dU/dt or sine-wave filter.
SFAVM.
5. Install a shaft grounding system or use an
Nominal AC Line Voltage [V] Motor Insulation [V]
isolating coupling.
UN ≤ 420 Standard ULL = 1300
420 V < UN ≤ 500 Reinforced ULL = 1600 6. Apply conductive lubrication.
500 V < UN ≤ 600 Reinforced ULL = 1800 7. Use minimum speed settings if possible.
600 V < UN ≤ 690 Reinforced ULL = 2000
8. Try to ensure the line voltage is balanced to
ground. This can be difficult for IT, TT, TN-CS or
Table 6.36 Motor Insulation
Grounded leg systems.
9. Use a dU/dt or sinus filter.

6.5 Control Cables and Terminals 6.5.2 Control Cable Routing

6.5.1 Access to Control Terminals Tie down all control wires to the designated control cable
routing as shown in the picture. Remember to connect the
All terminals to the control cables are located underneath shields in a proper way to ensure optimum electrical
the terminal cover on the front of the adjustable frequency immunity.
drive. Remove the terminal cover by means of a
screwdriver (see Figure 6.43). Serial communication bus connection
Connections are made to the relevant options on the
control card. For details, see the relevant serial communi-
130BT304.10
cation bus instructions. The cable must be placed in the
provided path inside the adjustable frequency drive and
tied down together with other control wires (see
6 6 Figure 6.45).
In the chassis (IP00) and NEMA 1 units, it is also possible to
connect the serial communication bus from the top of the
unit as shown in Figure 6.46 and Figure 6.47. On the NEMA
1 unit, remove a cover plate. Kit number for serial
communication bus top connection: 176F1742.
130BA867.10
Figure 6.43 Enclosure Types A1, A2, A3, B3, B4,
C3 and C4
s Option A
Profibu
vice
FC300 Ser
130BT334.10
Figure 6.45 Inside Location of Serial Communication Bus 130BB255.10
Figure 6.44 Enclosure Types A5, B1, B2, C1 and C2
Figure 6.46 Top Connection for Serial Communication

Bus on IP00

6.5.3 Control Terminals
130BB256.10
Item Description
1 8-pole plug digital I/O
2 3-pole plug RS-485 Bus
3 6-pole analog I/O
4 USB Connection
Table 6.38 Legend Table to Figure 6.48, for FC 102
Item Description
1 10-pole plug digital I/O
2 3-pole plug RS-485 Bus
Figure 6.47 Top Connection for Serial Communication Bus

3 6-pole analog I/O 6 6
4 SB Connection
NEMA 1 Units
Table 6.39 Legend Table to Figure 6.48, for FC 102
Installation of 24 V external DC Supply
130BA012.12
Torque: 0.5–0.6 Nm (5 in-lbs)
Screw size: M3
No. Function
35 (-), 36 (+) 24 V external DC supply
Table 6.37 24 V External DC Supply
3
24 V DC external supply can be used as low-voltage supply 55
54
to the control card and any option cards installed. This 53
50
enables full operation of the LCP (including parameter 42
39
setting) without connection to line power.
37
69 20
NOTICE! 61
68
32
33
29
A warning of low voltage is given when 24 V DC has 27 4
been connected; however, there is no tripping. 19
2 18
13
12
WARNING
Use a 24 V DC supply of type PELV to ensure correct
galvanic isolation (type PELV) on the control terminals of
the adjustable frequency drive. 1
Figure 6.48 Control Terminals (all Enclosure Types)

6.5.4 Switches S201, S202, and S801 6.5.5 Electrical Installation, Control
Terminals
Switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) are used to select a
current (0–20 mA) or a voltage (-10 to 10 V) configuration To mount the cable to the terminal
of the analog input terminals 53 and 54. 1. Strip insulation of 0.34–0.39 in [9–10 mm].
130BA150.10
Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termination
on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69).
Default setting
S201 (A53) = OFF (voltage input) 9 - 10 mm
S202 (A54) = OFF (voltage input) (0.37 in)
6 6 S801 (Bus termination) = OFF Figure 6.50 Strip Cable
NOTICE!
When changing the function of S201, S202 or S801, be 2. Insert a screwdriver1) in the square hole.
careful not to force the switch over. Removing the LCP
130BT312.10
fixture (cradle) when operating the switches is
recommended. The switches must not be operated while
the adjustable frequency drive is powered.
130BT310.11
Figure 6.51 Insert Screwdriver
3. Insert the cable in the adjacent circular hole.

130BT311.10
Figure 6.49 Location of S201, S202 and S801 Switches
Figure 6.52 Insert Cable

4. Remove the screwdriver. The cable is now

mounted to the terminal.
130BT306.10 6 6
Figure 6.53 Remove Screwdriver
To remove the cable from the terminal

1. Insert a screwdriver1) in the square hole.
2. Pull out the cable.
1) Max. 0.4 x 2.5 mm
6.5.6 Basic Wiring Example
1. Mount terminals from the accessory bag to the

front of the adjustable frequency drive.
2. Connect terminals 18 and 27 to +24 V
(terminal 12/13).
Default settings
18 = Start, 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
27 = Stop inverse, 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6]
37 = Safe Torque Off inverse
Figure 6.54 Basic Wiring

6.5.7 Electrical Installation, Control Cables
130BD552.10
3-phase 91 (L1) (U) 96
power 92 (L2) (V) 97
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
Switch Mode
DC bus 88 (-)
Power Supply
89 (+)
10 V DC 24 V DC (R+) 82 Brake
15 mA 130/200 mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT)
+10 V DC + - + - (R-) 81
S201
0/-10 V DC- 53 (A IN)
1 2
ON
+10 V DC ON=0/4–20 mA relay1

0/4–20 mA
6 6
S202 03
OFF=0/-10 V DC -
0/-10 V DC-
1 2
54 (A IN)
ON
+10 V DC 240 V AC, 2 A

+10 V DC 02
0/4–20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
relay2
12 (+24 V OUT) 06
240 V AC, 2 A
13 (+24 V OUT) P 5-00 05 400 V AC, 2 A
24 V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) 04
24 V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output
0/4–20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24 V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP) S801
24 V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open
0V 5V
24 V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP)
24 V
S801 0V
0V
RS-485 (N RS-485) 69 RS-485
24 V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68
24 V (NPN) **
33 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (COM RS-485) 61
: Chassis
* : Ground
37 (D IN)
Figure 6.55 Basic Wiring Schematic
A=Analog, D=Digital
*Terminal 37 (optional) is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the Safe Torque Off
Instruction Manual for Danfoss VLT® Adjustable Frequency Drives.
**Do not connect cable shield.
Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz ground
loops due to noise from line power supply cables. If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the shield or insert a 100 nF
capacitor between shield and chassis. The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be connected separately to the
common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) of the adjustable frequency drive to avoid ground currents from both groups affecting
other groups. For example, switching on the digital input may disturb the analog input signal.

Input polarity of control terminals
130BA681.10
130BT106.10
PNP (Source)
+24 V DC
Digital input wiring
0 VDC
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
6 6
Figure 6.58 Grounding of Shielded/Armored Control Cables
Figure 6.56 Input Polarity PNP (Source)
6.5.8 Relay Output

130BT107.11
+24 V DC
Relay 1
0 VDC
NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring • Terminal 01: common
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37 • Terminal 02: normal open 240 V AC
• Terminal 03: normal closed 240 V AC

Relay 2 (Not FC 301)
• Terminal 04: common
• Terminal 05: normal open 400 V AC
• Terminal 06: normal closed 240 V AC

Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in 5-40 Function Relay,
5-41 On Delay, Relay and 5-42 Off Delay, Relay.
Additional relay outputs by using Relay Option Module

MCB 105.
Figure 6.57 Input Polarity NPN (Sink)
NOTICE!
To comply with EMC emission specifications, shielded/
armored cables are recommended. If an non-shielded/
unarmored cable is used, see chapter 2.9.2 EMC Test
Results.
Figure 6.59 Relay Outputs 1 and 2

6.6 Additional Connections NOTICE!

If a short circuit in the brake IGBT occurs, prevent power
6.6.1 DC Bus Connection dissipation in the brake resistor by using a line switch or
contactor to disconnect the line power from the
The DC bus terminal is used for DC backup, with the
adjustable frequency drive. Only the adjustable
intermediate circuit being supplied from an external
frequency drive should control the contactor.
source. It uses terminals 88 and 89.
For further information, contact Danfoss. CAUTION

Note that voltages up to 1,099 V DC, depending on the
6.6.2 Load Sharing supply voltage, may occur on the terminals.
6.6.4 How to Connect a PC to the

6 6
Use terminals 88 and 89 for load sharing.
Adjustable Frequency Drive
The connection cable must be shielded and the max.
length from the adjustable frequency drive to the DC bar To control the adjustable frequency drive from a PC, install
is limited to 80 ft [25 m]. the MCT 10 Set-up Software.
Load sharing enables the linking of the DC intermediate The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB
circuits of several adjustable frequency drives. cable, or via the RS-485 interface.
WARNING USB is a serial bus utilizing four shielded wires with

Ground pin 4 connected to the shield in the PC USB port.
Note that voltages up to 1099 V DC may occur on the When connecting the PC to an adjustable frequency drive
terminals. through the USB cable, there is a potential risk of
Load sharing calls for extra equipment and safety damaging the PC USB host controller. All standard PCs are
considerations. For further information, see load sharing manufactured without galvanic isolation in the USB port.
Instructions. Any ground potential difference caused by not following
the recommendations described in AC Line Input
WARNING Connection in the Instruction Manual can damage the USB
host controller through the shield of the USB cable.
Note that line power disconnect may not isolate the It is recommended to use a USB isolator with galvanic
adjustable frequency drive due to DC link connection isolation to protect the PC USB host controller from
ground potential differences when connecting the PC to
6.6.3 Installation of Brake Cable an adjustable frequency drive through a USB cable.
It is recommended not to use a PC power cable with a
The connection cable to the brake resistor must be ground plug when the PC is connected to the adjustable
shielded and the max. length from adjustable frequency frequency drive through a USB cable. It reduces the
drive to the DC bar is limited to 82 feet [25 m]. ground potential difference, but does not eliminate all
potential differences due to the ground and shield
1. Connect the shield by means of cable clamps to connected in the PC USB port.
the conductive backplate on the adjustable
frequency drive and to the metal cabinet of the
brake resistor.
2. Size the brake cable cross-section to match the
brake torque.
Terminals 81 and 82 are brake resistor terminals.
See Brake instructions for more information about safe

installation.

6.6.6 MCT 31
130BT308.10
The MCT 31 harmonic calculation PC tool enables easy
estimation of the harmonic distortion in a given
application. Both the harmonic distortion of Danfoss
adjustable frequency drives as well as non-Danfoss
adjustable frequency drives with additional harmonic
reduction devices, such as Danfoss AHF filters and
12-18-pulse rectifiers, can be calculated.
Ordering number:
Order the CD containing the MCT 31 PC tool using code
number 130B1031.
Figure 6.60 USB Connection

MCT 31 can also be downloaded from www.danfoss.com/ 6 6
BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Softwaredownload/.
6.7 Safety
6.6.5 PC Software
6.7.1 High Voltage Test
Data storage in PC via MCT 10 Set-up Software
1. Connect a PC to the unit via the USB COM port. Carry out a high voltage test by short-circuiting terminals
U, V, W, L1, L2 and L3. Energize maximum 2.15 kV DC for
2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software.
380–500 V adjustable frequency drives and 2.525 kV DC for
3. Select the USB port in the network section. 525–690 V adjustable frequency drives for one second
4. Select copy. between this short-circuit and the chassis.
5. Select the project section.

6. Select paste.
WARNING
When running high voltage tests of the entire instal-
7. Select Save as.
lation, interrupt line power and the motor connection if
All parameters are now stored. the leakage currents are too high.
Data transfer from PC to adjustable frequency drive via 6.7.2 Grounding

MCT 10 Set-up Software
1. Connect a PC to the unit via the USB COM port. The following basic issues need to be considered when
2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software. installing an adjustable frequency drive, so as to obtain
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
3. Select Open – stored files are shown.
• Safety grounding: The adjustable frequency drive
4. Open the appropriate file. has a high leakage current and must be
5. Select Write to drive. grounded appropriately for safety reasons. Apply
local safety regulations.
All parameters are now transferred to the adjustable
frequency drive. • High-frequency grounding: Keep the ground wire
connections as short as possible.
A separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available.

Connect the different ground systems at the lowest 6.7.4 ADN-compliant Installation
possible conductor impedance. The lowest possible
conductor impedance is obtained by keeping the Units with ingress protection rating IP55 (NEMA 12) or
conductor as short as possible and by using the greatest higher prevent spark formation and are classified as limited
possible surface area. explosion risk electrical apparatus in accordance with the
The metal cabinets of the different devices are mounted European Agreement concerning International Carriage of
on the cabinet rear plate using the lowest possible HF Dangerous Goods by Inland Waterways (ADN).
impedance. This prevents having different HF voltages for
the individual devices and prevents the risk of radio For units with ingress protection rating IP20, IP21, or IP54,
interference currents running in connection cables that prevent risk of spark formation as follows:
may be used between the devices, as The radio
interference have been reduced.
• Do not install a line power switch.
To obtain a low HF impedance, use the fastening bolts of • Ensure that 14-50 RFI 1 is set to [1] On.
6 6 the devices as HF connection to the rear plate. It is

necessary to remove insulating paint and the like from the
• Remove all relay plugs marked “RELAY”.
See Figure 6.61.
fastening points.
• Check which relay options are installed, if any.
The only permitted relay option is Extended Relay
6.7.3 Safety Ground Connection Card MCB 113.
10
The adjustable frequency drive has a high leakage current
11
and must be grounded appropriately for safety reasons
130BC301.11
according to EN 50178.
WARNING
The ground leakage current from the adjustable
frequency drive exceeds 3.5 mA. To ensure a good
mechanical connection from the ground cable to the
ground connection (terminal 95), the cable cross-section 1
must be at least 10 mm2 or two rated ground wires
terminated separately.
6
7
4
2
5
3
8
Figure 6.61 Location of Relay Plugs, Pos. 8 and 9
Manufacturer declaration is available upon request.

6.8 EMC-compatible Installation Figure 6.62 shows an example of an EMC-compatible

electrical installation of an IP20 adjustable frequency drive.
6.8.1 Electrical Installation - EMC The adjustable frequency drive is fitted in an installation
Precautions cabinet with an output contactor and connected to a PLC,
which is installed in a separate cabinet. Other ways of
The following is a guideline for good engineering practice performing the installation may result in an equally
when installing adjustable frequency drives. Follow these effective EMC performance, provided the above guidelines
guidelines to comply with EN 61800-3 First environment. If for engineering practice are followed.
the installation is in EN 61800-3 Second environment, i.e.,
industrial networks, or in an installation with its own If the installation is not carried out according to the
transformer, deviation from these guidelines is allowed but guidelines, and if non-shielded cables and control wires are
not recommended. See also paragraphs chapter 2.2 CE used, some emission requirements will not be fulfilled,
Labeling, chapter 2.9 General Aspects of EMC and although the immunity requirements will be. See
chapter 2.9.2 EMC Test Results. chapter 2.9.2 EMC Test Results. 6 6
Good engineering practice to ensure EMC-compatible
electrical installation:
• Use only braided shielded/armored motor cables
and braided shielded/armored control cables. The
shield should provide a minimum coverage of
80%. The shield material must be metal, not
limited to, but typically, copper, aluminum, steel
or lead. There are no special requirements for the
line cable.
• Installations using rigid metal conduits are not

required to contain shielded cable, but the motor
cable must be installed in a conduit separate
from the control and line cables. Full connection
of the conduit from the adjustable frequency
drive to the motor is required. The EMC
performance of flexible conduits varies a lot and
information from the manufacturer must be
obtained.
• Connect the shield/armor/conduit to ground at

both ends for motor cables as well as for control
cables. In some cases, it is not possible to
connect the shield at both ends. If so, connect
the shield at the adjustable frequency drive. See
also chapter 6.8.3 Grounding of Shielded Control
Cables.
• Avoid terminating the shield/armor with twisted

ends (pigtails). It increases the high frequency
impedance of the shield, which reduces its
effectiveness at high frequencies. Use low
impedance cable clamps or EMC cable connectors
instead.
• Avoid using non-shielded/unarmored motor or

control cables inside cabinets housing the
adjustable frequency drive(s).
Leave the shield as close to the connectors as possible.

6 6
Figure 6.62 EMC-compatible Electrical Installation of an Adjustable Frequency Drive in Cabinet

Transfer impedance (ZT) can be assessed on the basis of

the following factors:
• The conductibility of the shield material
• The contact resistance between the individual
shield conductors
• The shield coverage, i.e., the physical area of the

cable covered by the shield - often stated as a
percentage value
• Shield type, i.e., braided or twisted pattern

a. Aluminum-clad with copper wire
b. Twisted copper wire or armored steel wire cable
c. Single-layer braided copper wire with varying
percentage shield coverage
6 6
This is the typical Danfoss reference cable
d. Double-layer braided copper wire
e. Twin layer of braided copper wire with a
magnetic, shielded/armored intermediate layer
f. Cable that runs in copper tube or steel tube
g. Lead cable with 0.043 in [1.1 mm] wall thickness
Figure 6.63 Electrical Connection Diagram
6.8.2 Use of EMC-Compatible Cables
Danfoss recommends braided shielded/armored cables to

optimize EMC immunity of the control cables and the EMC
emission from the motor cables.
The ability of a cable to reduce the in and outgoing

radiation of electric noise depends on the transfer
impedance (ZT). The shield of a cable is normally designed
to reduce the transfer of electric noise; however, a shield
with a lower transfer impedance (ZT) value is more
effective than a shield with a higher transfer impedance
(ZT).
Transfer impedance (ZT) is rarely stated by cable manufac-

turers, but it is often possible to estimate transfer
impedance (ZT) by assessing the physical design of the
cable.
Figure 6.64 Transfer Impedance

6.8.3 Grounding of Shielded Control Cables Avoid EMC noise on serial communication
This terminal is connected to ground via an internal RC
Correct shielding link. Use twisted-pair cables to reduce interference
The preferred method in most cases is to secure control between conductors.
and cables with shielding clamps provided at both ends to
ensure best possible high frequency cable contact. FC FC
130BB923.12
If the ground potential between the adjustable frequency 69
68
69
68
drive and the PLC is different, electric noise may occur that 61 61
disturbs the entire system. Solve this problem by fitting an PE PE <10 mm

PE PE
equalizing cable next to the control cable. Minimum cable
1
cross-section: 0.025 in2 [16 mm2]. 2
Figure 6.67 Twisted-pair Cables
PLC FC
130BB922.12
6 6 1 Min. 0.025 in2 [16 mm2]

PE PE <10 mm 2 Equalizing cable
PE PE
1
2
Figure 6.65 Control Cable with Equalizing Cable
Alternatively, the connection to terminal 61 can be
omitted:
1 Min. 0.025 in2 [16 mm2]
FC FC
130BB924.12
2 Equalizing cable
69 68
68 69
PE PE <10 mm
PE PE
50/60 Hz ground loops 1
With very long control cables, ground loops may occur. To 2
eliminate ground loops, connect one end of the shield-to- Figure 6.68 Terminal 61 not Connected
ground with a 100 nF capacitor (keeping leads short).
1 Min. 0.025 in2 [16 mm2]

130BB609.12
PLC FC
2 Equalizing cable
PE
100nF PE <10 mm
Figure 6.66 Shield-to-ground Connected to a 100 nF
Capacitor

6.8.4 RFI Switch
130BT307.10
Line power supply isolated from ground
If the adjustable frequency drive is supplied from an
isolated line power source (IT line power, floating delta) or
TT/TN-S line power with grounded leg (grounded delta),
turn off the RFI switch via 14-50 RFI 1.
In OFF, the internal capacitors between the chassis
(ground), the input RFI filter and the intermediate circuit
are cut off. As the RFI switch is turned off, the adjustable
frequency drive is not be able to meet optimum EMC
performance.
By opening the RFI filter switch, the ground leakage
currents are also reduced, but not the high-frequency 6 6
leakage currents caused by the switching of the inverter. It
is important to use isolation monitors that are capable for
use with power electronics (IEC61557-8), e.g., Deif type
SIM-Q, Bender type IRDH 275/375 or similar.
Also refer to the application note VLT on IT line power.
BAUER D-7 3734 ESLINGEN
NOTICE! 3~ MOTOR NR. 1827421 2003
If the RFI switch is not turned off and the adjustable
frequency drive is running on isolated grids, ground S/E005A9
faults can potentially lead to charge-up of the 1,5 KW
intermediate circuit and cause DC capacitor damage or n2 31,5 /MIN. 400 Y V
result in reduced product life. n1 1400 /MIN. 50 Hz
cos 0,80 3,6 A
6.9 Residual Current Device

1,7L
Use RCD relays, multiple protective grounding as extra B IP 65 H1/1A
protection, provided that local safety regulations are Figure 6.69 Motor Nameplate
complied with.
If a ground fault appears, a DC content may develop in the
faulty current. Step 2. Enter the motor nameplate data in this
If RCD relays are used, observe local regulations. Relays parameter list.
must be suitable for protection of three-phase equipment To access this list, press [Quick Menu] and select “Q2 Quick
with a bridge rectifier and for a brief discharge on power- Set-up”.
up, see chapter 2.11 Ground Leakage Current for further
information. 1. 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
1-21 Motor Power [HP].
6.10 Final Set-up and Test
2. 1-22 Motor Voltage.
To test the set-up and ensure that the adjustable 3. 1-23 Motor Frequency.
frequency drive is running, follow these steps.
4. 1-24 Motor Current.
Step 1. Locate the motor nameplate 5. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.

NOTICE!
The motor is either star- (Y) or delta-connected (Δ). This
information is located on the motor nameplate data.

Step 3. Activate the Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Step 4. Set speed limit and ramp times
Performing an AMA ensures optimum performance. The Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp time:
AMA measures the values from the motor model 3-02 Minimum Reference.
equivalent diagram. 3-03 Maximum Reference.
1. Connect terminal 37 to terminal 12 (if terminal 37
is available). 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 4-12 Motor
Speed Low Limit [Hz].
2. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or set
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input to [0] No function. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or 4-14 Motor
Speed High Limit [Hz].
3. Activate the AMA 1-29 Automatic Motor
Adaptation (AMA). 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time.
4. Select between complete or reduced AMA. If a 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time.

sine-wave filter is mounted, run only the reduced
6 6 AMA, or remove the sine-wave filter during the
AMA procedure.
5. Press [OK]. The display shows Press [Hand on] to
start.
6. Press [Hand On]. A progress bar indicates if the
AMA is in progress.
Stop the AMA during operation
1. Press [Off] - the adjustable frequency drive enters
alarm mode and the display shows that the AMA
was terminated by the user.
Successful AMA
1. The display shows Press [OK] to finish AMA.
2. Press [OK] to exit the AMA state.
Unsuccessful AMA
1. The adjustable frequency drive enters alarm
mode. A description of the alarm can be found in
the Warnings and Alarms chapter in the product-
related Instruction Manual.
2. Report Value in the [Alarm Log] shows the last
measuring sequence carried out by the AMA
before the adjustable frequency drive entered
alarm mode. This number along with the
description of the alarm assist in troubleshooting.
If contacting Danfoss for service, make sure to
mention number and alarm description.
NOTICE!
Unsuccessful AMA is often caused by incorrectly
registered motor nameplate data or a difference that is
too large between the motor power size and the
adjustable frequency drive power size.

Application Examples Design Guide
7 Application Examples
7.1 Application Examples 7.1.2 Pulse Start/Stop

7.1.1 Start/Stop Terminal 18 = start/stop 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
Latched start
Terminal 18 = start/stop 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Terminal 27= Stop 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6] Stop
Start inverse
Terminal 27 = No operation 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
[0] No operation (Default coast inverse 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input = Latched start
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input = Stop inverse
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input = Start (default)
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input = coast inverse
(default)
7 7
Figure 7.1 Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop

Function
Figure 7.2 Terminal 37: Available Only with Safe Torque Off
Function

7.1.3 Potentiometer Reference Limitations and preconditions:

• For the AMA to determine the motor parameters
Voltage reference via a potentiometer. optimally, enter the correct motor nameplate
data in 1-20 Motor Power [kW] to 1-28 Motor
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] = Analog Input 53 Rotation Check.
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage = 0 V • For the best adjustment of the adjustable
frequency drive, carry out an AMA on a cold
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage = 10 V motor. Repeated AMA runs may lead to a heating
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value = 0 RPM of the motor, which results in an increase of the
stator resistance, Rs. Normally, this is not critical.
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value =
1500 RPM • AMA can only be carried out if the rated motor
current is minimum 35% of the rated output
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
current of the adjustable frequency drive. AMA
can be carried out on up to one oversize motor.
• It is possible to carry out a reduced AMA test

7 7 with a sine-wave filter installed. Avoid carrying
out a complete AMA with a sine-wave filter. If an
overall setting is required, remove the sine-wave
filter while running a total AMA. After completion
of the AMA, reinsert the sine-wave filter.
• If motors are coupled in parallel, use only a

reduced AMA, if any.
• Avoid running a complete AMA when using

synchronous motors. If synchronous motors are
applied, run a reduced AMA and manually set the
extended motor data. The AMA function does not
apply to permanent magnet motors.
Figure 7.3 Voltage Reference via a Potentiometer • The adjustable frequency drive does not produce
motor torque during an AMA. During an AMA, it
is imperative that the application does not force
the motor shaft to run, which is known to
7.1.4 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
happen with windmilling in ventilation systems,
for example. This disturbs the AMA function.
AMA is an algorithm to measure the electrical motor
parameters on a motor at standstill. This means that AMA • AMA cannot be activated when running a PM
itself does not supply any torque. motor (when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1]
AMA is useful when commissioning systems and PM non-salient SPM).
optimizing the adjustment of the adjustable frequency
drive to the applied motor. This feature is particularly used 7.1.5 Smart Logic Control
where the default setting does not apply to the connected
motor. A useful facility in the adjustable frequency drive is the
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) allows a choice of Smart Logic Control (SLC).
complete AMA with determination of all electrical motor In applications where a PLC generates a simple sequence,
parameters or reduced AMA with determination of the the SLC may take over elementary tasks from the main
stator resistance Rs only. control.
The duration of a total AMA varies from a few minutes on SLC is designed to act from event send to or generated in
small motors to more than 15 minutes on large motors. the adjustable frequency drive. The adjustable frequency
drive then performs the pre-programmed action.

7.1.6 Smart Logic Control Programming
The Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of

user-defined actions (see 13-52 SL Controller Action)
executed by the SLC when the associated user-defined
event (see 13-51 SL Controller Event) is evaluated as TRUE
by the SLC.
Events and actions are each numbered and are linked in
pairs called states. This means that when event [1] is
fulfilled (attains the value TRUE), action [1] is executed.
After this, the conditions of event [2] is evaluated, and if
evaluated TRUE, action [2] is executed and so on. Events
and actions are placed in array parameters.
Only one event will be evaluated at any time. If an event is

evaluated as FALSE, nothing happens (in the SLC) during
the present scan interval and no other events are
evaluated. This means that when the SLC starts, it
7 7
evaluates event [1] (and only event [1]) each scan interval.
Only when event [1] is evaluated TRUE does the SLC
execute action [1] and start evaluating event [2].
It is possible to program from 0 to 20 events and actions.

When the last event/action has been executed, the
sequence starts over again from event [1]/action [1].
Figure 7.4 shows an example with three events/actions:
Figure 7.4 An Example with Three Events/Actions

7.1.7 SLC Application Example
7 7
Figure 7.5 One sequence 1: Start – ramp-up – run at reference speed 2 sec – ramp-down and hold shaft until stop.
Set the ramping times in 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time and 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time to the desired times
tacc × nnorm par . 1 − 25
tramp =
ref RPM
Set term 27 to No Operation (5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input)

Set Preset reference 0 to first preset speed (3-10 Preset Reference [0]) in percentage of Max reference speed (3-03 Maximum
Reference). Ex.: 60%
Set preset reference 1 to second preset speed (3-10 Preset Reference [1] Ex.: 0% (zero)
Set the timer 0 for constant running speed in 13-20 SL Controller Timer [0]. Ex.: 2 sec
Set Event 1 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [1] to True [1]

Set Event 2 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [2] to On Reference [4]
Set Event 3 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [3] to Time Out 0 [30]
Set Event 4 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [4] to False [0]
Set Action 1 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [1] to Select preset 0 [10]

Set Action 2 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [2] to Start Timer 0 [29]
Set Action 3 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [3] to Select preset 1 [11]
Set Action 4 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [4] to No Action [1]

7 7
Figure 7.6 Set Event and Action
Set the Smart Logic Control in 13-00 SL Controller Mode to ON.
Start/stop command is applied on terminal 18. If stop signal is applied, the adjustable frequency drive will ramp down and
go into free mode.

7.1.8 Cascade Controller Lead Pump Alternation

The motors must be of equal size. This function makes it
possible to cycle the adjustable frequency drive between
the pumps in the system (when 25-57 Relays per Pump =1,
maximum pump is 4. When 25-57 Relays per Pump =2,
maximum pump is 3). In this operation, the run time
between pumps is equalized, thus reducing the required
pump maintenance and increasing reliability and system
lifetime. The alternation of the lead pump can take place
at a command signal or at staging (adding lag pump).
The command can be a manual alternation or an
alternation event signal. If the alternation event is selected,
the lead pump alternation takes place every time the
event occurs. Selections include whenever an alternation
timer expires, when the lead pump goes into sleep mode.
Staging is determined by the actual system load.
7 7 Figure 7.7 A Pump Application
25-55 Alternate if Load <= 50%= 1, if load >50% alternation
does not happen. If load <=50% Alternation happens.
When 25-55 Alternate if Load <= 50% = 0, Alternation
happens no matter with Load. Total pump capacity is
The Cascade Controller is used for pump applications determined as lead pump plus lag speed pumps capacities.
where a certain pressure (“head”) or level needs to be
maintained over a wide dynamic range. Running a large Bandwidth Management
pump at variable speed over a wide range is not an ideal In cascade control systems, to avoid frequent switching of
solution because of low pump efficiency, and because fixed-speed pumps, the desired system pressure is kept
there is a practical limit of about 25% rated full load speed within a bandwidth rather than at a constant level. The
for running a pump. staging bandwidth provides the required bandwidth for
operation. When a large and quick change in system
pressure occurs, the override bandwidth overrides the
In the Cascade Controller, the adjustable frequency drive
staging bandwidth to prevent immediate response to a
controls a variable-speed motor as the variable-speed
short duration pressure change. An override bandwidth
pump (lead) and can stage up to two additional constant-
timer can be programmed to prevent staging until the
speed pumps on and off. By varying the speed of the
system pressure has stabilized and normal control
initial pump, variable-speed control of the entire system is
established.
provided. This maintains constant pressure while
eliminating pressure surges, resulting in reduced system When the cascade controller is enabled and running
stress and quieter operation in pumping systems. normally and the adjustable frequency drive issues a trip
alarm, the system head is maintained by staging and
Fixed Lead Pump destaging fixed-speed pumps. To prevent frequent staging
The motors must be of equal size. The Cascade Controller and destaging and minimize pressure fluctuations, a wider
allows the adjustable frequency drive to control up to five fixed-speed bandwidth is used instead of the staging
equal size pumps using the adjustable frequency drives, bandwidth.
two built-in relays and terminal 27, 29 (DI/DO). When the
variable pump (lead) is connected directly to the
adjustable frequency drive, the other four pumps are
controlled by the two built-in relays and terminal 27, 29
(DI/DO). Lead pump alternation cannot be selected when
lead pump is fixed.

7.1.9 Pump Staging with Lead Pump 7.1.10 System Status and Operation
Alternation
If the lead pump goes into Sleep Mode, the function is
displayed on the LCP. It is possible to alternate the lead
pump on a sleep mode condition.
When the Cascade Controller is enabled, the operation

status for each pump and the Cascade Controller is
displayed on the LCP. Information displayed includes:
• Pumps Status, is a readout of the status for the

Figure 7.8 Pump Staging with Lead Pump Alternation relays assigned to each pump. The display shows
pumps that are disabled, off, running on the
adjustable frequency drive, or running on the line
power/motor starter.
With lead pump alternation enabled, a maximum of two
pumps are controlled. At an alternation command, the • Cascade Status, is a readout of the status for the
7 7
lead pump ramps to minimum frequency (fmin) and after a Cascade Controller. The display shows the
delay will ramp to maximum frequency (fmax). When the cascade controller is disabled, all pumps are off,
speed of the lead pump reaches the destaging frequency, and emergency has stopped all pumps, all pumps
the fixed-speed pump is cut out (destaged). The lead are running, fixed-speed pumps are being
pump continues to ramp up and then ramps down to a staged/de-staged and lead pump alternation is
stop and the two relays are cut out. occurring.
• Destage at No-Flow ensures that all fixed-speed

After a time delay, the relay for the fixed-speed pump cuts pumps are stopped individually until the no-flow
in (staged) and this pump becomes the new lead pump. status disappears.
The new lead pump ramps up to maximum speed and
then down to minimum speed. When ramping down and 7.1.11 Fixed Variable-speed Pump Wiring
reaching the staging frequency, the old lead pump is now Diagram
cut in (staged) on the line power as the new fixed-speed
pump.
If the lead pump has been running at minimum frequency

(fmin) for a programmed amount of time, with a fixed-
speed pump running, the lead pump contributes little to
the system. When the programmed value of the timer
expires, the lead pump is removed, avoiding a heat water-
circulation problem.
Figure 7.9 Fixed Variable-speed Pump Wiring Diagram

7.1.12 Lead Pump Alternation Wiring

Diagram
L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3
130BA377.13
FC
R1
R2
k3 k3 K1 K1
k2 k1 K4 K3
K1 K2 K3 K4
7 7
Figure 7.10 Lead Pump Alternation Wiring Diagram
Every pump must be connected to two contactors (K1/K2

and K3/K4) with a mechanical interlock. Thermal relays or
other motor protection devices must be applied according
to local regulation and/or individual demands.
• RELAY 1 (R1) and RELAY 2 (R2) are the built-in

relays in the adjustable frequency drive.
• When all relays are de-energized, the first built in

relay to be energized cuts in the contactor
corresponding to the pump controlled by the
relay, e.g., RELAY 1 cuts in contactor K1, which
becomes the lead pump.
• K1 blocks K2 via the mechanical interlock,

preventing line power to be connected to the
output of the adjustable frequency drive (via K1).
• Auxiliary break contact on K1 prevents K3 from

cutting in.
• RELAY 2 controls contactor K4 for on/off control

of the fixed-speed pump.
• At alternation both relays de-energizes and now

RELAY 2 is energized as the first relay.

7.1.13 Cascade Controller Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram shows an example with the built-in BASIC Cascade Controller with one variable-speed pump (lead) and
two fixed-speed pumps, a 4–20 mA transmitter and System Safety Interlock.
7 7
Figure 7.11 Cascade Controller Wiring Diagram

7.1.14 Start/Stop Conditions
See 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Digital input commands Variable-speed pump (lead) Fixed-speed pumps (lag)

Start (SYSTEM START/STOP) Ramps up (if stopped and there is a demand) Staging (if stopped and there is a demand)
Lead Pump Start Ramps up if SYSTEM START is active Not affected
Coast (EMERGENCY STOP) Coast to stop Cut out (corresponding relays, terminal
27/29 and 42/45)
External Interlock Coast to stop Cut out (built-in relays are de-energized)
Table 7.1 Commands Assigned to Digital Inputs
LCP keys Variable-speed pump (lead) Fixed-speed pumps (lag)

[Hand On] Ramps up (if stopped by a normal stop command) or Destaging (if running)
stays in operation if already running
7 7 [Off] Ramps down Destaging
[Auto On] Starts and stops according to commands via terminals or Staging/Destaging
serial bus cascade controller only, can work when drive in
"Auto ON" mode
Table 7.2 LCP Key Functions

Installation and Set-up Design Guide
8 Installation and Set-up
8.1 Installation and Set-up

8.1.1 Overview If more than one adjustable frequency drive is connected
to a master, use parallel connections.
RS-485 is a two-wire bus interface compatible with multi-
drop network topology, that is, nodes can be connected as
130BA060.11
a bus, or via drop cables from a common trunk line.
A total of 32 nodes can be connected to one network
segment. Repeaters divide network segments.
NOTICE! RS 232 + 68 69 68 69 68 69
USB
Each repeater functions as a node within the segment in -
RS 485
which it is installed. Each node connected within a given
network must have a unique node address across all
segments.
8 8
Figure 8.1 Parallel Connections
Terminate each segment at both ends using either the

termination switch (S801) of the adjustable frequency To avoid potential equalizing currents in the shield, ground
drives or a biased termination resistor network. Always use the cable shield via terminal 61, which is connected to the
shielded twisted pair (STP) cable for bus cabling, and frame via an RC link.
always follow good common installation practice.
Low-impedance ground connection of the shield at every
130BB021.10
node is important, including at high frequencies. Thus, 61 68 69 39 42 50 53 54 55
connect a large surface of the shield to ground, for
example with a cable clamp or a conductive cable
connector. It may be necessary to apply potential-
equalizing cables to maintain the same ground potential Remove jumper to enable Safe Stop
throughout the network - particularly in installations with 12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
long cables.
To prevent impedance mismatch, always use the same
type of cable throughout the entire network. When
connecting a motor to the adjustable frequency drive,
always use shielded motor cable.
Cable Shielded twisted pair (STP)

Impedance 120
[Ω]
Cable length Max. 4,000 ft [1200 m] (including drop lines)
(ft [m]) Max. 1,650 ft [500 m] station-to-station
Table 8.1 Cable Specifications Figure 8.2 Control Card Terminals
One or more adjustable frequency drives can be connected

to a control (or master) using the RS-485 standardized
interface. Terminal 68 is connected to the P signal
(TX+, RX+), while terminal 69 is connected to the N signal
(TX-,RX-). See drawings in chapter 6.8.3 Grounding of
Shielded Control Cables.

8.1.2 Adjustable Frequency Drive Hardware Parameter Function

Set-up 8-30 Protocol Select the application protocol to run on
the RS-485 interface
Use the terminator dip switch on the main control board 8-31 Address Set the node address. Note: The address
of the adjustable frequency drive to terminate the range depends on the protocol selected in
RS-485 bus. 8-30 Protocol
8-32 Baud Rate Set the baud rate. Note: The default baud
rate depends on the protocol selected in
130BA272.11
8-30 Protocol
8-33 Parity / Stop Set the parity and number of stop bits.
Bits Note: The default selection depends on the
protocol selected in 8-30 Protocol
ON 8-35 Minimum Specify a minimum delay time between
Response Delay receiving a request and transmitting a
response. This can be used for overcoming
1 2 modem turnaround delays
8-36 Maximum Specify a maximum delay time between
S801
Response Delay transmitting a request and receiving a

Figure 8.3 Terminator Switch Factory Setting response
8 8 8-37 Maximum
Inter-Char Delay
Specify a maximum delay time between
two received bytes to ensure timeout if
The factory setting for the dip switch is OFF. transmission is interrupted
Table 8.2 Parameters Apply to the RS-485 Interface (FC port)

8.1.3 Adjustable Frequency Drive
Parameter Settings for Modbus
Communication
The following parameters apply to the RS-485 interface

(FC port):

8.1.4 EMC Precautions 8.2 Adjustable Frequency Protocol

Overview
The following EMC precautions are recommended to
achieve interference-free operation of the RS-485 network. The FC protocol, also referred to as FC bus or Standard
bus, is the Danfoss standard serial communication bus.
Observe relevant national and local regulations, for It defines an access technique according to the master-
example regarding protective ground connection. Keep the follower principle for communications via a serial bus.
RS-485 communication cable away from motor and brake One master and a maximum of 126 followers can be
resistor cables to avoid coupling of high frequency noise connected to the bus. The master selects the individual
from one cable to another. Normally a distance of 200 mm followers via an address character in the message.
(8 inches) is sufficient, but keeping the greatest possible A follower itself can never transmit without first being
distance between the cables is recommended, especially requested to do so, and direct message transfer between
where cables run in parallel over long distances. When the individual followers is not possible. Communications
crossing is unavoidable, the RS-485 cable must cross motor occur in the half-duplex mode.
and brake resistor cables at an angle of 90°. The master function cannot be transferred to another node
(single-master system).
130BD507.11
The physical layer is RS-485, thus utilizing the RS-485 port

built into the adjustable frequency drive. The FC protocol
supports different message formats:
8 8
Fieldbus cable
• A short format of 8 bytes for process data
• A long format of 16 bytes that also includes a

parameter channel
• A format used for texts
8.2.1 FC with Modbus RTU

Min. 200 mm
The FC protocol provides access to the control word and

bus reference of the adjustable frequency drive.
The control word allows the Modbus master to control

90° crossing several important functions of the adjustable frequency
drive:
Brake resistor
Figure 8.4 Cable Routing

• Start
• Stop of the adjustable frequency drive in various

ways:
Coast stop
Quick stop
DC Brake stop
Normal (ramp) stop
• Reset after a fault trip
• Run at a variety of preset speeds
• Run in reverse
• Change of the active set-up
• Control of the two relays built into the adjustable

frequency drive

The bus reference is commonly used for speed control. It is 8.4.2 Message Structure
also possible to access the parameters, read their values,
and where possible, write values to them. This permits a Each message has the following structure:
range of control options, including controlling the setpoint
of the adjustable frequency drive when its internal PID 1. Start character (STX)=02 Hex
controller is used.
2. A byte denoting the message length (LGE)
8.3 Network Configuration
3. A byte denoting the adjustable frequency drive
8.3.1 Adjustable Frequency Drive Set-up address (ADR)
A number of data bytes (variable, depending on the type
Set the following parameters to enable the FC protocol for of message) follows.
A data control byte (BCC) completes the message.
Parameter Number Setting
8-30 Protocol FC
195NA099.10
8-31 Address 1–126
8-32 Baud Rate 2400–115200 STX LGE ADR DATA BCC
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Even parity, 1 stop bit (default)
Figure 8.6 Message Structure
8 8 Table 8.3 Parameters Enable the FC Protocol
8.4 FC Protocol Message Framing Structure 8.4.3 Message Length (LGE)

8.4.1 Content of a Character (byte) The message length is the number of data bytes plus the
address byte ADR and the data control byte BCC.
Each character transferred begins with a start bit.
Then 8 data bits are transferred, corresponding to a byte. 4 data bytes LGE=4+1+1=6 bytes
Each character is secured via a parity bit. This bit is set at 12 data bytes LGE=12+1+1=14 bytes
"1" when it reaches parity. Parity is when there is an equal
Messages containing texts 101)+n bytes
number of 1s in the 8 data bits and the parity bit in total.
A stop bit completes a character, thus consisting of 11 bits Table 8.4 Length of Messages
in all. 1) The 10 represents the fixed characters, while the “n’” is variable
(depending on the length of the text).
Figure 8.5 Content of a Character

8.4.4 Adjustable Frequency Drive Address

(ADR)
Two different address formats are used.

The address range of the adjustable frequency drive is
either 1-31 or 1-126.
1. Address format 1-31:
Bit 7 = 0 (address format 1-31 active)

Bit 6 is not used
Bit 5 = 1: Broadcast, address bits (0-4) are not
used
Bit 5 = 0: No Broadcast
Bit 0-4 = adjustable frequency drive address 1-31
2. Address format 1-126:
Bit 7 = 1 (address format 1-126 active) 8 8

Bit 0-6 = adjustable frequency drive address
1-126
Bit 0-6 = 0 Broadcast
The follower returns the address byte unchanged to the
master in the response message.
8.4.5 Data Control Byte (BCC)
The checksum is calculated as an XOR-function. Before the

first byte in the message is received, the calculated
checksum is 0.

8.4.6 The Data Field
The structure of data blocks depends on the type of message. There are three message types, and the type applies for both
control messages (master⇒follower) and response messages (follower⇒master).
The three types of message are:
Process block (PCD)

The PCD is made up of a data block of four bytes (two words) and contains:
• Control word and reference value (from master to follower)
• Status word and present output frequency (from follower to master)
130BA269.10
STX LGE ADR PCD1 PCD2 BCC
Figure 8.7 Process Block
8 8 Parameter block
The parameter block is used to transfer parameters between master and follower. The data block is made up of 12 bytes
(six words) and also contains the process block.
130BA271.10
STX LGE ADR PKE IND PWEhigh PWElow PCD1 PCD2 BCC
Figure 8.8 Parameter Block
Text block
The text block is used to read or write texts via the data block.
130BA270.10
STX LGE ADR PKE IND Ch1 Ch2 Chn PCD1 PCD2 BCC
Figure 8.9 Text Block

8.4.7 The PKE Field If the command cannot be performed, the follower sends
this response:
The PKE field contains two subfields: Parameter command 0111 Command cannot be performed
and response AK, and parameter number PNU: - and issues the following fault report in the parameter
value (PWE):
130BA268.10
PKE IND PWEhigh PWElow PWE low Fault Report
(Hex)
0 The parameter number used does not exist
1 There is no write access to the defined parameter
AK PNU 2 Data value exceeds the parameter's limits

3 The sub index used does not exist
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4 The parameter is not the array type
5 The data type does not match the defined

parameter
Parameter
commands
and replies
Parameter
11 Data change in the defined parameter is not

number
possible in the adjustable frequency drive's

present mode. Certain parameters can only be
Figure 8.10 PKE Field
82
changed when the motor is turned off
There is no bus access to the defined parameter
8 8
83 Data change is not possible because the factory
Bits no. 12-15 transfer parameter commands from master set-up is selected
to follower and return processed follower responses to the
master. Table 8.7 Parameter Value Fault Report
Bit no. Parameter command 8.4.8 Parameter Number (PNU)

15 14 13 12
0 0 0 0 No command Bits no. 0-11 transfer parameter numbers. The function of
0 0 0 1 Read parameter value the relevant parameter is defined in the parameter
0 0 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM (word) description in chapter 8.11.1 Control Word According to FC
0 0 1 1 Write parameter value in RAM (double Profile (8-10 Control Profile = FC profile).
word)
1 1 0 1 Write parameter value in RAM and 8.4.9 Index (IND)
EEPROM (double word)
1 1 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM and The index is used together with the parameter number to
EEPROM (word) read/write-access parameters with an index, e.g.,
1 1 1 1 Read/write text 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code. The index consists of two
bytes, a low byte and a high byte.
Table 8.5 Parameter Commands Master ⇒ Follower
Bit no. Response

Only the low byte is used as an index.
15 14 13 12
0 0 0 0 No response
0 0 0 1 Parameter value transferred (word)
0 0 1 0 Parameter value transferred (double
word)
0 1 1 1 Command cannot be performed
1 1 1 1 text transferred
Table 8.6 Response Follower⇒ Master

8.4.10 Parameter Value (PWE) 8.4.11 Data Types Supported by the

Adjustable Frequency Drive
The parameter value block consists of two words (four
bytes), and the value depends on the defined command Unsigned means that there is no operational sign in the
(AK). The master prompts for a parameter value when the message.
PWE block contains no value. To change a parameter value
(write), write the new value in the PWE block and send Data types Description
from the master to the follower. 3 Integer 16
4 Integer 32
When a follower responds to a parameter request (read 5 Unsigned 8
command), the present parameter value in the PWE block 6 Unsigned 16
is transferred and returned to the master. If a parameter 7 Unsigned 32
contains not a numerical value, but several data options, 9 Text string
e.g., 0-01 Language where [0] is English, and [4] is Danish,
10 Byte string
select the data value by entering the value in the PWE
13 Time difference
block. See Example - Selecting a data value. Serial
33 Reserved
communication is only capable of reading parameters
35 Bit sequence
containing data type 9 (text string).
8 8
Table 8.8 Data Types and Description
15-40 FC Type to 15-53 Power Card Serial Number contain
data type 9.
8.4.12 Conversion
For example, read the unit size and AC line voltage range
in 15-40 FC Type. When a text string is transferred (read),
The various attributes of each parameter are displayed in
the length of the message is variable, and the texts are of
factory setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole
different lengths. The message length is defined in the
numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to
second byte of the message, LGE. When using text transfer
transfer decimals.
the index character indicates whether it is a read or a write
command.
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion factor of
0.1. To preset the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, transfer
To read a text via the PWE block, set the parameter
the value 100. A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the
command (AK) to ’F’ Hex. The index character high-byte
value transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is
must be “4”.
therefore read as 10.0.
Some parameters contain text that can be written to via

Examples:
the serial bus. To write a text via the PWE block, set the
0 s ⇒ conversion index 0
parameter command (AK) to ’F’ Hex. The index characters
high-byte must be “5”. 0.00 s ⇒ conversion index -2
0 ms ⇒ conversion index -3
0.00 ms ⇒ conversion index -5
PKE IND PWE high PWE low
130BA275.10
Read text Fx xx 04 00
Write text Fx xx 05 00
Figure 8.11 Text via PWE Block

Conversion index Conversion factor 8.5 Examples

100
75 8.5.1 Writing a Parameter Value
74
67 Change 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] to 100 Hz.
6 1000000 Write the data in EEPROM.
5 100000
4 10000 PKE = E19E Hex - Write single word in 4-14 Motor Speed
3 1000 High Limit [Hz]
2 100 IND = 0000 Hex
1 10 PWEHIGH = 0000 Hex
PWELOW = 03E8 Hex - Data value 1000, corresponding to
0 1
100 Hz, see chapter 8.4.12 Conversion.
-1 0.1
-2 0.01
The message looks like this:
-3 0.001
-4 0.0001
130BA092.10
-5 0.00001
E19E H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H
-6 0.000001
-7 0.0000001 PKE IND
Figure 8.12 Write Data in EEPROM

PWE high PWE low
8 8
Table 8.9 Conversion Table
8.4.13 Process Words (PCD) NOTICE!

The block of process words is divided into two blocks of 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is a single word, and the
16 bits, which always occur in the defined sequence. parameter command for write in EEPROM is “E”.
Parameter number 4-14 is 19E in hexadecimal.
PCD 1 PCD 2
The response from the follower to the master is:
Control message (master ⇒ follower control Reference value
word)
130BA093.10
Control message (follower ⇒ master) status Present output
119E H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H
word frequency
Table 8.10 Process Words (PCD)
Figure 8.13 Response from Follower
8.5.2 Reading a Parameter Value
Read the value in 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time
PKE = 1155 Hex - Read parameter value in 3-41 Ramp 1

Ramp-up Time
IND = 0000 Hex
PWEHIGH = 0000 Hex
PWELOW = 0000 Hex
130BA094.10
1155 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H
Figure 8.14 Parameter Value

If the value in 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time is 10 s, the Controllers communicate using a master-follower
response from the follower to the master is technique in which only the master can initiate
transactions (called queries). Followers respond by
supplying the requested data to the master, or by taking
the action requested in the query.
The master can address individual followers, or initiate a
broadcast message to all followers. Followers return a
response to queries that are addressed to them
Figure 8.15 Response from Follower individually. No responses are returned to broadcast
queries from the master. The Modbus RTU protocol
establishes the format for the master’s query by providing
3E8 Hex corresponds to 1000 decimal. The conversion the device (or broadcast) address, a function code defining
index for 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time is -2, i.e. 0.01. the requested action, any data to be sent, and an error-
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time is of the type Unsigned 32. checking field. The follower’s response message is also
constructed using Modbus protocol. It contains fields
8.6 Modbus RTU Overview confirming the action taken, any data to be returned and
an error-checking field. If an error occurs in receipt of the
8.6.1 Assumptions message, or if the follower is unable to perform the
requested action, the follower constructs an error message,
Danfoss assumes that the installed controller supports the
8 8 interfaces in this document, and strictly observes all
and send it in response, or a timeout occurs.
requirements and limitations stipulated in the controller

and adjustable frequency drive.
8.6.4 Adjustable Frequency Drive with
Modbus RTU
8.6.2 What the User Should Already Know The adjustable frequency drive communicates in Modbus
RTU format over the built-in RS-485 interface. Modbus RTU
The Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is designed to provides access to the control word and bus reference of
communicate with any controller that supports the the adjustable frequency drive.
interfaces defined in this document. It is assumed that the
user has full knowledge of the capabilities and limitations
The control word allows the Modbus master to control
of the controller.
several important functions of the adjustable frequency
drive:
8.6.3 Modbus RTU Overview
• Start
Regardless of the type of physical communication
networks, the Modbus RTU Overview describes the process • Stop of the adjustable frequency drive in various
a controller uses to request access to another device. This ways:
process includes how the Modbus RTU responds to - Coast stop
requests from another device, and how errors are detected
- Quick stop
and reported. It also establishes a common format for the
layout and contents of message fields. - DC Brake stop
During communications over a Modbus RTU network, the - Normal (ramp) stop
protocol determines:
• Reset after a fault trip
• How each controller learns its device address • Run at a variety of preset speeds
• Recognizes a message addressed to it • Run in reverse
• Determines which actions to take • Change the active set-up
• Extracts any data or other information contained • Control the adjustable frequency drive’s built-in
in the message relay
If a reply is required, the controller constructs the reply

message and sends it.

The bus reference is commonly used for speed control. It is 8.8.2 Modbus RTU Message Structure
also possible to access the parameters, read their values,
and where possible, write values to them. This permits a The transmitting device places a Modbus RTU message
range of control options, including controlling the setpoint into a frame with a known beginning and ending point.
of the adjustable frequency drive when its internal PI This allows receiving devices to begin at the start of the
controller is used. message, read the address portion, determine which
device is addressed (or all devices, if the message is
8.7 Network Configuration
broadcast), and to recognize when the message is
To enable Modbus RTU on the adjustable frequency drive, completed. Partial messages are detected, and errors are
set the following parameters set as a result. Characters for transmission must be in
hexadecimal 00 to FF format in each field. The adjustable
Parameter Setting frequency drive continuously monitors the network bus,
8-30 Protocol Modbus RTU
also during ‘silent’ intervals. When the first field (the
address field) is received, each adjustable frequency drive
8-31 Address 1–247
or device decodes it to determine which device is being
8-32 Baud Rate 2400–115200
addressed. Modbus RTU messages addressed to zero are
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Even parity, 1 stop bit (default)
broadcast messages. No response is permitted for
Table 8.11 Modbus RTU Parameters broadcast messages. A typical message frame is shown in
Table 8.13.
8.8 Modbus RTU Message Framing
Start Address Function Data CRC End
8 8
Structure
check
8.8.1 Adjustable Frequency Drive with T1-T2-T3- 8 bits 8 bits Nx8 16 bits T1-T2-T3-
Modbus RTU T4 bits T4
Table 8.13 Typical Modbus RTU Message Structure

The controllers are set up to communicate on the Modbus
network using RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode, with
each byte in a message containing two 4-bit hexadecimal 8.8.3 Start/Stop Field
characters. The format for each byte is shown in Table 8.12.
Messages start with a silent period of at least 3.5 character
Start Data byte Stop/ Stop
intervals. This is implemented as a multiple of character
bit parity
intervals at the selected network baud rate (shown as Start
T1-T2-T3-T4). The first field to be transmitted is the device
address. Following the last transmitted character, a similar
Table 8.12 Format for Each Byte period of at least 3.5 character intervals marks the end of
the message. A new message can begin after this period.
Coding System 8-bit binary, hexadecimal 0-9, A-F. The entire message frame must be transmitted as a
2 hexadecimal characters contained in each continuous stream. If a silent period of more than 1.5
8-bit field of the message character intervals occurs before completion of the frame,
Bits Per Byte 1 start bit the receiving device flushes the incomplete message and
8 data bits, least significant bit sent first assumes that the next byte is the address field of a new
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no message. Similarly, if a new message begins before 3.5
parity character intervals after a previous message, the receiving
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity device considers it a continuation of the previous message.
Error Check Field Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) This causes a timeout (no response from the follower),
since the value in the final CRC field is not valid for the
combined messages.

8.8.4 Address Field 8.8.7 CRC Check Field
The address field of a message frame contains 8 bits. Valid Messages include an error-checking field, operating based
follower device addresses are in the range of 0–247 on a Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) method. The CRC
decimal. The individual follower devices are assigned field checks the contents of the entire message. It is
addresses in the range of 1–247. (0 is reserved for applied regardless of any parity check method used for the
broadcast mode, which all followers recognize.) A master individual characters of the message. The CRC value is
addresses a follower by placing the follower address in the calculated by the transmitting device, which appends the
address field of the message. When the follower sends its CRC as the last field in the message. The receiving device
response, it places its own address in this address field to recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message and
let the master know which follower is responding. compares the calculated value to the actual value received
in the CRC field. If the two values are unequal, a bus
8.8.5 Function Field timeout results. The error-checking field contains a 16-bit
binary value implemented as two 8-bit bytes. When this is
The function field of a message frame contains 8 bits. Valid done, the low-order byte of the field is appended first,
codes are in the range of 1-FF. Function fields are used to followed by the high-order byte. The CRC high-order byte
send messages between master and follower. When a is the last byte sent in the message.
message is sent from a master to a follower device, the
function code field tells the follower what kind of action to 8.8.8 Coil Register Addressing
8 8 perform. When the follower responds to the master, it uses
the function code field to indicate either a normal (error- In Modbus, all data are organized in coils and holding
free) response, or that some kind of error occurred (called registers. Coils hold a single bit, whereas holding registers
an exception response). For a normal response, the hold a 2-byte word (i.e., 16 bits). All data addresses in
follower simply echoes the original function code. For an Modbus messages are referenced to zero. The first
exception response, the follower returns a code that is occurrence of a data item is addressed as item number
equivalent to the original function code with its most zero. For example: The coil known as ‘coil 1’ in a
significant bit set to logic 1. In addition, the follower places programmable controller is addressed as coil 0000 in the
a unique code into the data field of the response message. data address field of a Modbus message. Coil 127 decimal
This tells the master what kind of error occurred, or the is addressed as coil 007EHEX (126 decimal).
reason for the exception. Also refer to Holding register 40001 is addressed as register 0000 in the
chapter 8.8.10 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU and data address field of the message. The function code field
chapter 8.8.11 Modbus Exception Codes. already specifies a ‘holding register’ operation. Therefore,
the ‘4XXXX’ reference is implicit. Holding register 40108 is
8.8.6 Data Field addressed as register 006BHEX (107 decimal).
The data field is constructed using sets of two hexadecimal

digits, in the range of 00 to FF hexadecimal. These are
made up of one RTU character. The data field of messages
sent from a master to follower device contains additional
information which the follower must use to take the action
defined by the function code. This can include items such
as coil or register addresses, the quantity of items to be
handled and the count of actual data bytes in the field.

Coil Description Signal direction Coil 0 1

number 33 Control not ready Control ready
1-16 Adjustable frequency drive control Master to 34 Adjustable frequency drive Adjustable frequency drive
word follower not ready ready
17-32 Adjustable frequency driver speed or Master to 35 Coasting stop Safety closed
setpoint reference Range follower 36 No alarm Alarm
0x0–0xFFFF (-200% ... ~200%) 37 Not used Not used
33-48 Adjustable frequency drive status Follower to 38 Not used Not used
word (see Table 8.16) master 39 Not used Not used
49-64 Open-loop mode: Adjustable Follower to 40 No warning Warning
frequency drive output frequency master 41 Not at reference At reference
closed-loop mode: Adjustable
42 Hand mode Auto mode
frequency drive feedback signal
43 Out of freq. range In frequency range
65 Parameter write control (master to Master to
44 Stopped Running
follower) follower
45 Not used Not used
0= Parameter changes are written
46 No voltage warning Voltage warning
to the RAM of the adjustable
47 Not in current limit Current limit
frequency drive
48 No thermal warning Thermal warning
1= Parameter changes are written
to the RAM and EEPROM of the
adjustable frequency drive
Table 8.16 Adjustable Frequency Drive Status Word 8 8
(FC Profile)
66- Reserved
65536 Register Description
number
Table 8.14 Coil Descriptions 00001-00006 Reserved
00007 Last error code from an FC data object interface
Coil 0 1
00008 Reserved
01 Preset reference LSB
00009 Parameter index*
02 Preset reference MSB
00010-00990 000 parameter group (parameters 001
03 DC brake No DC brake
through 099)
04 Coast stop No coast stop
05 Quick stop No quick stop
through 199)
06 Freeze freq. No freeze freq.
07 Ramp stop Start
through 299)
08 No reset Reset
09 No jog Jog
through 399)
10 Ramp 1 Ramp 2
11 Data not valid Data valid
through 499)
12 Relay 1 off Relay 1 on
... ...
13 Relay 2 off Relay 2 on
14 Set up LSB through 4999)
15 Set up MSB 50000 Input data: Adjustable frequency drive control
16 No reversing Reversing word register (CTW).
50010 Input data: Bus reference register (REF).
Table 8.15 Adjustable Frequency Drive Control Word
... ...
(FC Profile)
50200 Output data: Adjustable frequency drive status
word register (STW).
50210 Output data: Adjustable frequency drive main
actual value register (MAV).
Table 8.17 Holding Registers

* Used to specify the index number to be used when accessing an
indexed parameter.

8.8.9 How to Control the Adjustable 8.8.11 Modbus Exception Codes

Frequency Drive
For a full explanation of the structure of an exception code
This section describes codes which can be used in the response, refer to chapter 8.8.5 Function Field.
function and data fields of a Modbus RTU message.
Code Name Meaning
8.8.10 Function Codes Supported by 1 Illegal The function code received in the query is
Modbus RTU function not an allowable action for the server
(or follower). This may be because the
Modbus RTU supports use of the following function codes function code is only applicable to newer
in the function field of a message. devices and was not implemented in the
unit selected. It could also indicate that
Function Function code the server (or follower) is in the wrong
state to process a request of this type, for
Read coils 1 Hex
example, because it is not configured and
Read holding registers 3 Hex
is being asked to return register values.
Write single coil 5 Hex
2 Illegal data The data address received in the query is
Write single register 6 Hex
address not an allowable address for the server
Write multiple coils F Hex
(or follower). More specifically, the
8 8 Write multiple registers
Get comm. event counter
10 Hex
B Hex
combination of reference number and
transfer length is invalid. For a controller
Report follower ID 11 Hex with 100 registers, a request with offset
96 and length 4 would succeed, a request
Table 8.18 Function Codes
with offset 96 and length 5 generates
exception 02.
Function Function Sub- Sub-function
3 Illegal data A value contained in the query data field
Code function
value is not an allowable value for server (or
code
follower). This indicates a fault in the
Diagnostics 8 1 Restart communication
structure of the remainder of a complex
2 Return diagnostic register
request, such as that the implied length is
10 Clear counters and
incorrect. It specifically does NOT mean
diagnostic register
that a data item submitted for storage in
11 Return bus message count
a register has a value outside the
12 Return bus communi- expectation of the application program,
cation error count since the Modbus protocol is unaware of
13 Return bus exception error the significance of any particular value of
count any particular register.
14 Return follower message 4 Follower An unrecoverable error occurred while the
count device failure server (or follower) was attempting to
perform the requested action.
Table 8.19 Function Codes
Table 8.20 Modbus Exception Codes

8.9 How to Access Parameters 8.9.5 Conversion Factor

8.9.1 Parameter Handling The different attributes for each parameter can be seen in
the section on factory settings. Since a parameter value
The PNU (Parameter Number) is translated from the can only be transferred as a whole number, a conversion
register address contained in the Modbus read or write factor must be used to transfer decimals.
message. The parameter number is translated to Modbus
as (10 x parameter number) DECIMAL. Example: Reading 8.9.6 Parameter Values
3-12 Catch up/slow-down value (16 bit): The holding
register 3120 holds the parameters value. A value of 1352
Standard data types
(Decimal) means that the parameter is set to 12.52%.
Standard data types are int 16, int 32, uint 8, uint 16 and
uint 32. They are stored as 4x registers (40001–4FFFF). The
Reading 3-14 Preset Relative Reference (32 bit): The holding parameters are read using function 03HEX "Read Holding
registers 3410 and 3411 hold the parameters value. Registers." Parameters are written using the function 6HEX
A value of 11300 (decimal), means that the parameter is "Preset Single Register" for 1 register (16 bits), and the
set to 1113.00 S. function 10 HEX "Preset Multiple Registers" for 2 registers
(32 bits). Readable sizes range from one register (16 bits)
For information on the parameters, size and converting up to ten registers (20 characters).
index, consult the product relevant programming guide.
Non-standard data types
Non-standard data types are text strings and are stored as 8 8
8.9.2 Storage of Data 4x registers (40001–4FFFF). The parameters are read using
function 03HEX "Read Holding Registers" and written using
The Coil 65 decimal determines whether data written to function 10HEX "Preset Multiple Registers." Readable sizes
the adjustable frequency drive are stored in EEPROM and range from one register (two characters) up to ten
RAM (coil 65=1) or only in RAM (coil 65=0). registers (20 characters).
8.10 Examples
8.9.3 IND
The following examples illustrate various Modbus RTU
Some parameters in the adjustable frequency drive are commands.
array parameters, e.g., 3-10 Preset Reference. Since the
Modbus does not support arrays in the holding registers, 8.10.1 Read Coil Status (01 HEX)
the adjustable frequency drive has reserved the holding
register 9 as pointer to the array. Before reading or writing
Description
an array parameter, set the holding register 9. Setting
This function reads the ON/OFF status of discrete outputs
holding register to the value of 2, causes all following
(coils) in the adjustable frequency drive. Broadcast is never
read/write to array parameters to be to the index 2.
supported for reads.
8.9.4 Text Blocks Query

The query message specifies the starting coil and quantity
Parameters stored as text strings are accessed in the same of coils to be read. Coil addresses start at zero, that is,
way as the other parameters. The maximum text block size coil 33 is addressed as 32.
is 20 characters. If a read request for a parameter is for
more characters than the parameter stores, the response is
truncated. If the read request for a parameter is for fewer
characters than the parameter stores, the response is
padded with spaces.

Example of a request to read coils 33–48 (Status Word) 8.10.2 Force/Write Single Coil (05 HEX)
from follower device 01.
Description
Field Name Example (HEX) This function forces the coil to either ON or OFF. When
Follower Address 01 (adjustable frequency drive address) broadcast, the function forces the same coil references in
Function 01 (read coils) all attached followers.
Starting Address HI 00 Query
Starting Address LO 20 (32 decimals) Coil 33 The query message specifies the coil 65 (parameter write
No. of Points HI 00 control) to be forced. Coil addresses start at zero, that is,
No. of Points LO 10 (16 decimals) coil 65 is addressed as 64. Force Data=00 00HEX (OFF) or
Error Check (CRC) - FF 00HEX (ON).
Table 8.21 Query Field Name Example (HEX)

Follower Address 01 (adjustable frequency drive
Response address)
The coil status in the response message is packed as one Function 05 (write single coil)
coil per bit of the data field. Status is indicated as: 1=ON; Coil Address HI 00
0=OFF. The LSB of the first data byte contains the coil Coil Address LO 40 (64 decimal) Coil 65
addressed in the query. The other coils follow toward the Force Data HI FF
8 8 high order end of this byte and from ‘low-order to high-
order’ in subsequent bytes.
Force Data LO 00 (FF 00=ON)
Error Check (CRC) -
If the returned coil quantity is not a multiple of 8, the
remaining bits in the final data byte are padded with zeros Table 8.23 Query
(toward the high order end of the byte). The byte count
field specifies the number of complete bytes of data. Response
The normal response is an echo of the query, which is
Field Name Example (HEX)
returned after the coil state has been forced.
address) Field Name Example (HEX)
Function 01 (read coils) Follower Address 01
Byte Count 02 (two bytes of data) Function 05
Data (Coils 40-33) 07 Force Data HI FF
Data (Coils 48-41) 06 (STW=0607hex) Force Data LO 00
Error Check (CRC) - Quantity of Coils HI 00
Quantity of Coils LO 01
Table 8.22 Response
Error Check (CRC) -
NOTICE! Table 8.24 Response

Coils and registers are addressed explicitly with an
off-set of -1 in Modbus.
For example, Coil 33 is addressed as Coil 32.

8.10.3 Force/Write Multiple Coils (0F HEX) 8.10.4 Read Holding Registers (03 HEX)
Description Description
This function forces each coil in a sequence of coils to This function reads the contents of holding registers in the
either ON or OFF. When broadcasting the function forces following.
the same coil references in all attached followers.
Query Query
The query message specifies the coils 17 to 32 (speed The query message specifies the starting register and
setpoint) to be forced. quantity of registers to be read. Register addresses start at
zero, i.e., registers 1-4 are addressed as 0-3.
Follower Address 01 (adjustable frequency drive Field Name Example (HEX)
address) Slave Address 01
Function 0F (write multiple coils) Function 03 (read holding registers)
Coil Address HI 00 Starting Address HI 0B (Register address 3029)
Coil Address LO 10 (coil address 17) Starting Address LO D5 (Register address 3029)
Quantity of Coils HI 00 No. of Points HI 00
Quantity of Coils LO 10 (16 coils) No. of Points LO 02 - (Par. 3-03 is 32 bits long, i.e.,
8 8
Byte Count 02 two registers)
Force Data HI 20 Error Check (CRC) -
(Coils 8-1)
Force Data LO 00 (ref.=2000 hex) Table 8.27 Example: Read 3-03 Maximum Reference, register
(Coils 16-9) 03030
Error Check (CRC) -
Response
Table 8.25 Query The register data in the response message are packed as
two bytes per register, with the binary contents right-
Response justified within each byte. For each register, the first byte
The normal response returns the follower address, function contains the high-order bits and the second contains the
code, starting address, and quantity of coils forced. low-order bits.

Slave Address 01
address)
Function 03
Function 0F (write multiple coils)
Byte Count 04
Coil Address HI 00
Data HI 00
Coil Address LO 10 (coil address 17)
(Register 3030)
Quantity of Coils HI 00
Data LO 16
Quantity of Coils LO 10 (16 coils)
(Register 3030)
Error Check (CRC) -
Data HI E3
(Register 3031)
Table 8.26 Response
Data LO 60
(Register 3031)
Error Check -
(CRC)
Table 8.28 Example: Hex 0016E360=1.500.000=1500 RPM

8.10.5 Preset Single Register (06 HEX) 8.10.6 Preset Multiple Registers (10 HEX)
Description Description
This function presets a value into a single holding register. This function presets values into a sequence of holding
registers.
Query
The query message specifies the register reference to be
preset. Register addresses start at zero, that is, register 1 is Query
addressed as 0. The query message specifies the register references to be
preset. Register addresses start at zero, i.e., register 1 is
Example: Write to 1-00 Configuration Mode, register 1000.
addressed as 0. Example of a request to preset two
registers (set parameter 1–24=738 (7.38 A))
Follower Address 01
Function 06
Slave Address 01
Register Address HI 03 (Register address 999)
Function 10
Register Address LO E7 (Register address 999)
Starting Address HI 04
Preset Data HI 00
Starting Address LO D7
Preset Data LO 01
No. of Registers HI 00
Error Check (CRC) -
8 8 Table 8.29 Query
No. of registers LO
Byte Count
02
04
Write Data HI 00
Response (Register 4: 1049)
The normal response is an echo of the query, returned Write Data LO 00
after the register contents have been passed. (Register 4: 1049)
Write Data HI 02
Field Name Example (HEX) (Register 4: 1050)
Follower Address 01 Write Data LO E2

(Register 4: 1050)
Function 06
Error Check (CRC) -
Register Address HI 03
Register Address LO E7 Table 8.31 Query
Preset Data HI 00
Preset Data LO 01 Response
Error Check (CRC) - The normal response returns the slave address, function
code, starting address and quantity of preset registers.
Table 8.30 Response

Slave Address 01
Function 10
Starting Address HI 04
Starting Address LO D7
No. of Registers HI 00
No. of registers LO 02
Error Check (CRC) -
Table 8.32 Response

8.11 Danfoss FC Control Profile NOTICE!

Make a selection in 8-56 Preset Reference Select to define
8.11.1 Control Word According to FC how Bit 00/01 gates with the corresponding function on
Profile (8-10 Control Profile = FC the digital inputs.
profile)
Bit 02, DC brake
Master-follower
130BA274.11
Bit 02 = ’0’ leads to DC braking and stop. Set braking
CTW Speed ref. current and duration in 2-01 DC Brake Current and 2-02 DC
Braking Time. Bit 02 = ’1’ leads to ramping.
Bit Bit 03, Coasting
no.: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 03 = ’0’: The adjustable frequency drive immediately
Figure 8.16 Control Word "lets go" of the motor (the output transistors are "shut
off"), and it coasts to a standstill. Bit 03 = ’1’:
The adjustable frequency drive starts the motor if the
Bit Bit value = 0 Bit value = 1 other starting conditions are met.
00 Reference value External selection lsb
Make a selection in 8-50 Coasting Select to define how Bit
01 Reference value External selection msb
03 gates with the corresponding function on a digital
02 DC brake Ramp input.
03
04
Coasting
Quick stop
No coasting
Ramp
Bit 04, Quick stop 8 8
Bit 04 = ’0’: Makes the motor speed ramp down to stop
05 Hold output frequency Use ramp
(set in 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time).
06 Ramp stop Start
07 No function Reset Bit 05, Hold output frequency
08 No function Jog Bit 05 = ’0’: The present output frequency (in Hz) freezes.
09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2
Change the frozen output frequency only with the digital
inputs (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
10 Data invalid Data valid
Digital Input) programmed to Speed up and Slow-down.
11 No function Relay 01 active
12 No function Relay 02 active NOTICE!
13 Parameter set-up Selection lsb If Freeze output is active, the adjustable frequency drive
14 Parameter set-up Selection msb can only be stopped by the following:
15 No function Reverse
• Bit 03 Coasting stop
Table 8.33 Control Word Bits • Bit 02 DC braking
Explanation of the Control Bits • Digital input (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input) programmed to
DC braking, Coasting stop, or Reset and coasting
Bits 00/01 stop
Bits 00 and 01 are used to select between the four
reference values, which are pre-programmed in 3-10 Preset
Reference according to Table 8.34. Bit 06, Ramp stop/start
Bit 06 = ’0’: Causes a stop and makes the motor speed
Programmed Parameter Bit 01 Bit 00 ramp down to stop via the selected ramp-down parameter.
ref. value Bit 06 = ’1’: Permits the adjustable frequency drive to start
1 3-10 Preset 0 0 the motor if the other starting conditions are met.
Reference [0]
Make a selection in 8-53 Start Select to define how Bit 06
2 3-10 Preset 0 1
Ramp stop/start gates with the corresponding function on
Reference [1]
a digital input.
3 3-10 Preset 1 0
Reference [2] Bit 07, Reset
4 3-10 Preset 1 1
Bit 07 = ’0’: No reset. Bit 07 = ’1’: Resets a trip. Reset is
Reference [3]
activated on the leading edge of the signal, i.e. when
changing from logic ’0’ to logic ’1’.
Table 8.34 Reference Values

Bit 08, Jog 8.11.2 Status Word According to FC Profile

Bit 08 = ’1’: The output frequency is determined by (STW) (8-10 Control Profile = FC
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]. profile)
Bit 09, Selection of ramp 1/2
Follower-master
130BA273.11
Bit 09 = "0": Ramp 1 is active (3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time
to 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time). Bit 09 = "1": Ramp 2
STW Output freq.
(3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time to 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down
Time) is active.
Bit
Bit 10, Data not valid/Data valid 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
no.:
Tell the adjustable frequency drive whether to use or
Figure 8.17 Status Word
ignore the control word. Bit 10 = ’0’: The control word is
ignored. Bit 10 = ’1’: The control word is used. This
function is relevant because the message always contains
the control word, regardless of the message type. Turn off Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1
the control word if it should not be used when updating 00 Control not ready Control ready
or reading parameters. 01 Drive not ready Drive ready
02 Coasting Enable
Bit 11, Relay 01
03 No error Trip
Bit 11 = "0": Relay not activated. Bit 11 = "1": Relay 01
8 8
04 No error Error (no trip)
activated provided that Control word bit 11 is selected in
05 Reserved -
5-40 Function Relay.
06 No error Trip lock
Bit 12, Relay 04
07 No warning Warning
Bit 12 = "0": Relay 04 is not activated. Bit 12 = "1": Relay 04
08 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference
is activated provided that Control word bit 12 is selected in
09 Local operation Bus control
5-40 Function Relay.
10 Out of frequency limit Frequency limit OK
Bit 13/14, Selection of set-up 11 No operation In operation
Use bits 13 and 14 to select from the four menu set-ups 12 Drive OK Stopped, auto-start
according to Table 8.35. 13 Voltage OK Voltage exceeded
14 Torque OK Torque exceeded
Set-up Bit 14 Bit 13
15 Timer OK Timer exceeded
1 0 0
2 0 1
Table 8.36 Status Word Bits
3 1 0
4 1 1 Explanation of the Status Bits
Table 8.35 Four Menu Set-ups

Bit 00, Control not ready/ready
The function is only possible when Multi Set-ups is selected Bit 00 = ’0’: The adjustable frequency drive trips. Bit 00
in 0-10 Active Set-up. = ’1’: The adjustable frequency drive controls are ready,
but the power component does not necessarily receive any
Make a selection in 8-55 Set-up Select to define how Bit power supply (in case of external 24 V supply to controls).
13/14 gates with the corresponding function on the digital
inputs. Bit 01, Drive ready
Bit 01 = ’1’: The adjustable frequency drive is ready for
Bit 15 Reverse operation but the coasting command is active via the
Bit 15 = ’0’: No reversing. Bit 15 = ’1’: Reversing. In the digital inputs or via serial communication.
default setting, reversing is set to digital in 8-54 Reverse
Select. Bit 15 causes reversing only when ser. communi- Bit 02, Coasting stop
cation, logic or OR logic and is selected. Bit 02 = ’0’: The adjustable frequency drive releases the
motor. Bit 02 = ’1’: The adjustable frequency drive starts
the motor with a start command.
Bit 03, No error/trip
Bit 03 =’0’: The adjustable frequency drive is not in fault
mode. Bit 03 = ’1’: The adjustable frequency drive trips. To
re-establish operation, enter [Reset].

Bit 04, No error/error (no trip) Bit 15, Timer OK/limit exceeded
Bit 04 = ’0’: The adjustable frequency drive is not in fault Bit 15 = ’0’: The timers for motor thermal protection and
mode. Bit 04 = “1”: The adjustable frequency drive shows thermal protection are not exceeded 100%. Bit 15 = ’1’:
an error but does not trip. One of the timers exceeds 100%.
Bit 05, Not used All bits in the STW are set to ’0’ if the connection between
Bit 05 is not used in the status word. the Interbus option and the adjustable frequency drive is
lost, or if an internal communication problem has occurred.
Bit 06, No error/triplock
Bit 06 = ’0’: The adjustable frequency drive is not in fault
mode. Bit 06 = “1”: The adjustable frequency drive is 8.11.3 Bus Speed Reference Value
tripped and locked.
Speed reference value is transmitted to the adjustable
Bit 07, No warning/warning
frequency drive in a relative value expressed as %. The
Bit 07 = ’0’: There are no warnings. Bit 07 = ’1’: A warning
value is transmitted in the form of a 16-bit word; in
has occurred.
integers (0–32767) the value 16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds
Bit 08, Speed≠ reference/speed = reference to 100%. Negative figures are formatted by means of 2’s
Bit 08 = ’0’: The motor is running, but the present speed is complement. The Actual Output frequency (MAV) is scaled
different from the preset speed reference. For example, in the same way as the bus reference.
this might be the case when the speed ramps up/down
during start/stop. Bit 08 = ’1’: The motor speed matches Master-follower
8 8
130BA276.11
the preset speed reference.
16bit
Bit 09, Local operation/bus control CTW Speed ref.
Bit 09 = ’0’: [STOP/RESET] is activated on the control unit
or Local control in 3-13 Reference Site is selected. Control Follower-master
via serial communication is not possible. Bit 09 = ’1’ It is
Actual output
possible to control the adjustable frequency drive via the STW
freq.
serial communication bus/serial communication.
Figure 8.18 Actual Output Frequency (MAV)
Bit 10, Out of frequency limit
Bit 10 = ’0’: The output frequency has reached the value in
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 4-13 Motor Speed High The reference and MAV are scaled as follows:
Limit [RPM]. Bit 10 = "1": The output frequency is within
the defined limits. -100% 0% 100%
130BA277.10
Bit 11, No operation/in operation
(C000hex) (0hex) (4000hex)
Bit 11 = ’0’: The motor is not running. Bit 11 = ’1’: The Par.3-00 set to
(1) -max- +max

Reverse Forward
adjustable frequency drive has a start signal, or the output

Par.3-03 0 Par.3-03
frequency is greater than 0 Hz. Max reference Max reference
Bit 12, Drive OK/stopped, autostart

0% 100%
Bit 12 = ’0’: There is no temporary overtemperature on the (0hex) (4000hex)
inverter. Bit 12 = ’1’: The inverter stops because of Par.3-00 set to
overtemperature, but the unit does not trip and resumes

Forward
(0) min-max
operation once the overtemperature stops. Par.3-02 Par.3-03
Min reference Max reference
Bit 13, Voltage OK/limit exceeded

Figure 8.19 Reference and MAV
Bit 13 = ’0’: There are no voltage warnings. Bit 13 = ’1’: The
DC voltage in the adjustable frequency drive’s intermediate
circuit is too low or too high.
Bit 14, Torque OK/limit exceeded
Bit 14 = ’0’: The motor current is lower than the torque
limit selected in 4-18 Current Limit. Bit 14 = ’1’: The torque
limit in 4-18 Current Limit is exceeded.

General Specifications and ... Design Guide
9 General Specifications and Troubleshooting
9.1 Line Power Supply Tables

Line Power Supply 1x200–240 V AC
Line Power Supply 1 x 200–240 V AC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute

Adjustable frequency drive P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P3K7 P5K5 P7K5 P15K P22K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7 5.5 7.5 15 22
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 240 V 1.5 2.0 2.9 4.0 4.9 7.5 10 20 30
IP20/Chassis A3 - - - - - - - -
IP21/NEMA 1 - B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C2
IP55/NEMA 12 A5 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C2
IP66 A5 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C2
Output current
Continuous (3 x 200–240 V) [A] 6.6 7.5 10.6 12.5 16.7 24.2 30.8 59.4 88
Intermittent (3 x 200–240 V) [A] 7.3 8.3 11.7 13.8 18.4 26.6 33.4 65.3 96.8
Continuous kVA (208 V AC) [kVA] 5.00 6.40 12.27 18.30
Max. input current
Continuous (1 x 200–240 V) [A] 12.5 15 20.5 24 32 46 59 111 172
9 9 Intermittent (1 x 200–240 V) [A] 13.8 16.5 22.6 26.4 35.2 50.6 64.9 122.1 189.2
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 20 30 40 40 60 80 100 150 200
Additional specifications
Estimated power loss at rated
44 30 44 60 74 110 150 300 440
max. load [W]4)
Max. cable size (line power, motor,
[0.2–4]/(4–10) [10]/(7) [35]/(2) [50]/(1)/0 [95]/(4/0)
brake) [mm2]/(AWG)2)
Weight enclosure IP20 (lb [kg]) 10.8 [4.9] - - - - - - - -
Weight enclosure IP21 (lb [kg]) 50.71 50.71 50.71 50.71 50.71 59.53 99.21 143.3
-
[23] [23] [23] [23] [23] [27] [45] [65]
-
[23] [23] [23] [23] [23] [27] [45] [65]
-
[23] [23] [23] [23] [23] [27] [45] [65]
Efficiency3) 0.968 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Table 9.1 Line Power Supply 1 x 200–240 V AC - Normal Overload 110% for 1 Minute

Line power supply 3x200–240 V AC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute

Adjustable Frequency Drive P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P3K7
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3.7
IP20/Chassis
A2 A2 A2 A3 A3
(A2+A3 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit)
IP55/NEMA 12 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A5 A5
IP66/NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
Typical Shaft Output [hp] at 208 V 1.5 2.0 2.9 4.0 4.9
Output current
Continuous (3x200–240 V) [A] 6.6 7.5 10.6 12.5 16.7
130BA058.10
Intermittent (3x200–240 V) [A] 7.3 8.3 11.7 13.8 18.4

Continuous
2.38 2.70 3.82 4.50 6.00
kVA (208 V AC) [kVA]
Max. cable size:
(line power, motor, brake)

4/10
[mm2/AWG]2)
Max. input current

Continuous (3x200–240 V) [A] 5.9 6.8 9.5 11.3 15.0
Intermittent (3x200–240 V) [A] 6.5 7.5 10.5 12.4 16.5
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 20 20 20 32 32
Environment:
9 9
130BA057.10
Estimated power loss

63 82 116 155 185
at rated max. load [W]4)
10.8 10.8 10.8 14.6 14.6
Weight enclosure IP20 (lb [kg])
[4.9] [4.9] [4.9] [6.6] [6.6]
12.13 12.13 12.13 16.54 16.54
[5.5] [5.5] [5.5] [7.5] [7.5]
21.39/29.76 21.39/29.76 21.39/29.76 29.76 29.76
[9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [13.5] [13.5]
21.39/29.76 21.39/29.76 21.39/29.76 29.76 29.76
[9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [13.5] [13.5]
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Table 9.2 Line Power Supply 3x200–240 V AC

9 9
168
Line power supply 3x200–240 V AC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
IP20/Chassis
B3 B3 B3 B4 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
(B3+4 and C3+4 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit)
IP21/NEMA 1 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
P5K5 P7K5 P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
General Specifications and ...
Typical Shaft Output [hp] at 208 V 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
Output current
Continuous (3x200–240 V) [A] 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 115 143 170
185/
16/6 35/2 35/2 70/3/0 kcmil
350
Continuous (3x200–240 V) [A] 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 104.0 130.0 154.0
Intermittent (3x200–240 V) [A] 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 114.0 143.0 169.0
Design Guide
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 63 63 63 80 125 125 160 200 250

Environment:
130BA058.10
Estimated power loss at rated max. load [W]4) 269 310 447 602 737 845 1140 1353 1636
Weight enclosure IP20 (lb [kg]) 26.46 [12] 26.46 [12] 26.46 [12] 52 [23.5] 52 [23.5] 77.2 [35] 77.2 [35] 164 [50] 164 [50]
Weight enclosure IP21 (lb [kg]) 50.71 [23] 50.71 [23] 50.71 [23] 59.53 [27] 99.21 [45] 99.21 [45] 99.21 [45] 143.3 [65] 143.3 [65]

Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Intermittent (3x200–240 V) [A] 26.6 33.9 50.8 65.3 82.3 96.8 127 157 187
Continuous kVA (208 V AC) [kVA] 8.7 11.1 16.6 21.4 26.9 31.7 41.4 51.5 61.2
Max. cable size:
50/1/0 120/
(line power, motor, brake) [mm2/AWG]2) 10/7 35/2 95/4/0
(B4=35/2) 250 MCM
MG11BC22
Line Power Supply 3x380–480 V AC – Normal overload 110% for 1 minute

Adjustable frequency drive P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
Typical Shaft Output [hp] at 460 V 1.5 2.0 2.9 4.0 5.0 7.5 10
IP20/Chassis
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3
(A2+A3 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit)
IP55/NEMA 12 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A5 A5
IP66/NEMA 12 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A5 A5
Output current
Continuous (3x380-440 V) [A] 3 4.1 5.6 7.2 10 13 16
130BA058.10
Intermittent (3x380-440 V) [A] 3.3 4.5 6.2 7.9 11 14.3 17.6

Continuous (3x441–480 V) [A] 2.7 3.4 4.8 6.3 8.2 11 14.5
Intermittent (3x441–480 V) [A] 3.0 3.7 5.3 6.9 9.0 12.1 15.4
Continuous kVA (400 V AC) [kVA] 2.1 2.8 3.9 5.0 6.9 9.0 11.0
Continuous kVA (460 V AC) [kVA] 2.4 2.7 3.8 5.0 6.5 8.8 11.6
Max. cable size:
(line power, motor, brake)
4/10
[mm2/AWG]2)
Max. input current
Continuous (3x380–440 V) [A] 2.7 3.7 5.0 6.5 9.0 11.7 14.4
Intermittent (3x380–440 V) [A] 3.0 4.1 5.5 7.2 9.9 12.9 15.8
Continuous (3x441–480 V) [A]
Intermittent (3x441–480 V) [A]
2.7
3.0
3.1
3.4
4.3
4.7
5.7
6.3
7.4
8.1
9.9
10.9
13.0
14.3
9 9
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 10 10 20 20 20 32 32
Environment:
130BA057.10
Estimated power loss at rated

58 62 88 116 124 187 255
max. load [W]4)
10.58 10.8 10.8 10.8 10.8 14.6 14.6
[4.8] [4.9] [4.9] [4.9] [4.9] [6.6] [6.6]
21.39/ 21.39/ 21.39/ 21.39/ 21.39/
31.31 31.31
Weight enclosure IP55 (lb [kg]) 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76
[14.2] [14.2]
[9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5]
21.39/ 21.39/ 21.39/ 21.39/ 21.39/
31.31 31.31
Weight enclosure IP66 (lb [kg]) 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76
[14.2] [14.2]
[9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5] [9.7/13.5]
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97

Line Power Supply 3x380–480 V AC – Normal overload 110% for 1 minute

Adjustable frequency drive P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Typical Shaft Output [hp] at 460 V 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
IP20/Chassis
(B3+4 and C3+4 may be converted to IP21 using a B3 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
conversion kit (Contact Danfoss)
IP21/NEMA 1 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Output current
Continuous (3x380–439 V)
24 32 37.5 44 61 73 90 106 147 177
[A]
Intermittent (3x380–439 V)
26.4 35.2 41.3 48.4 67.1 80.3 99 117 162 195
[A]
21 27 34 40 52 65 80 105 130 160
[A]
130BA058.10
23.1 29.7 37.4 44 61.6 71.5 88 116 143 176
[A]
Continuous kVA (400 V AC)
16.6 22.2 26 30.5 42.3 50.6 62.4 73.4 102 123
[kVA]
9 9
Continuous kVA 460 V AC)
16.7 21.5 27.1 31.9 41.4 51.8 63.7 83.7 104 128
[kVA]
Max. cable size:
120/
(line power, motor, brake) 50/1/0 95/
10/7 35/2 MCM
[mm2/ AWG]2) (B4=35/2) 4/0
250
185/
With line power disconnect
16/6 35/2 35/2 70/3/0 kcmil
switch included:
350
Max. input current
22 29 34 40 55 66 82 96 133 161
[A]
24.2 31.9 37.4 44 60.5 72.6 90.2 106 146 177
[A]
19 25 31 36 47 59 73 95 118 145
[A]
20.9 27.5 34.1 39.6 51.7 64.9 80.3 105 130 160
130BA057.10
[A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 63 63 63 63 80 100 125 160 250 250
Environment:
278 392 465 525 698 739 843 1083 1384 1474
Weight enclosure IP20 26.5 26.5 26.5 52 52 52 77.2 77.2 164 164
(lb [kg]) [12] [12] [12] [23.5] [23.5] [23.5] [35] [35] [50] [50]
Weight enclosure IP21 50.71 50.71 50.71 59.53 59.53 99.21 99.21 99.21 143.3 143.3
(lb [kg]) [23] [23] [23] [27] [27] [45] [45] [45] [65] [65]
(lb [kg]) [23] [23] [23] [27] [27] [45] [45] [45] [65] [65]
(lb [kg]) [23] [23] [23] [27] [27] [45] [45] [45] [65] [65]
Efficiency3) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99

Line power supply 3x525–600 VAC Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
Size: P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P3K7 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5 P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
MG11BC22
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
IP20 / Chassis A3 A3 A3 A3 A2 A3 A3 A3 B3 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
IP21 / NEMA 1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A2 A3 A3 A3 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Output current
Continuous
2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2 - 6.4 9.5 11.5 19 23 28 36 43 54 65 87 105 137
(3x525–550 V) [A]
Intermittent
2.9 3.2 4.5 5.7 - 7.0 10.5 12.7 21 25 31 40 47 59 72 96 116 151
(3x525–550 V) [A]
Continuous
2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 - 6.1 9.0 11.0 18 22 27 34 41 52 62 83 100 131
(3x525–600 V) [A]
Intermittent
2.6 3.0 4.3 5.4 - 6.7 9.9 12.1 20 24 30 37 45 57 68 91 110 144
(3x525–600 V) [A]
Continuous kVA
Design Guide
2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0 - 6.1 9.0 11.0 18.1 21.9 26.7 34.3 41 51.4 61.9 82.9 100 130.5
(525 V AC) [kVA]
130BA058.10
Continuous kVA
2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 - 6.1 9.0 11.0 17.9 21.9 26.9 33.9 40.8 51.8 61.7 82.7 99.6 130.5
(575 V AC) [kVA]
Max. cable size,
120/
IP21/55/66 95/
4/10 10/7 25/4 50/1/0 MCM
(line power, motor, 4/0
250
brake) [mm2]/[AWG]2)
Max. cable size, IP20 150/
95/
(line power, motor, MCM

4/10 16/6 35/2 50/1/0
4/0
brake)[mm2]/[AWG]2) 2505)
With line power 185/
70/3/
disconnect 4/10 16/6 35/2 kcmil
0
switch included: 350
Table 9.6 5) With Brake and Load Sharing 95/4/0
171
9 9
9 9
172
Line power supply 3x525–600 VAC Normal overload 110% for 1 minute - continued
Size: P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P3K7 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5 P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
Max. input current
Continuous
2.4 2.7 4.1 5.2 - 5.8 8.6 10.4 17.2 20.9 25.4 32.7 39 49 59 78.9 95.3 124.3
(3x525–600 V) [A]
Intermittent
2.7 3.0 4.5 5.7 - 6.4 9.5 11.5 19 23 28 36 43 54 65 87 105 137
(3x525–600 V) [A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 10 10 20 20 - 20 32 32 63 63 63 63 80 100 125 160 250 250
130BA057.10
Environment:
50 65 92 122 - 145 195 261 300 400 475 525 700 750 850 1100 1400 1500
Weight enclosure 14.33 14.33 14.33 14.33 14.33 14.6 14.6 26.5 26.5 26.5 52 52 52 77.2 77.2 164 164
-
IP20 (lbs [kg]) [6.5] [6.5] [6.5] [6.5] [6.5] [6.6] [6.6] [12] [12] [12] [23.5] [23.5] [23.5] [35] [35] [50] [50]
Weight enclosure 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76 29.76 31.31 31.31 50.71 50.71 50.71 59.53 59.53 59.53 99.21 99.21 143.3 143.3
IP21/55 (lbs [kg]) [13.5] [13.5] [13.5] [13.5] [13.5] [13.5] [14.2] [14.2] [23] [23] [23] [27] [27] [27] [45] [45] [65] [65]
Efficiency4) 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 - 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Design Guide
Table 9.7 5) With Brake and Load Sharing 95/ 4/0

MG11BC22
Line Power Supply 3 x 525–690 V AC

Adjustable Frequency Drive P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
Enclosure IP20 (only) A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Output current High overload 110% for 1 min
Continuous (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 2.1 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.1 9 11
Intermittent (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 2.3 3.0 4.3 5.4 6.7 9.9 12.1
Continuous kVA (3 x 551–690 V) [A] 1.6 2.2 3.2 4.5 5.5 7.5 10
Intermittent kVA (3 x 551–690 V) [A] 1.8 2.4 3.5 4.9 6.0 8.2 11
Continuous kVA 525 V AC 1.9 2.6 3.8 5.4 6.6 9 12
Continuous kVA 690 V AC 1.9 2.6 3.8 5.4 6.6 9 12
Max. input current
Continuous (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 1.9 2.4 3.5 4.4 5.5 8 10
Intermittent (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 2.1 2.6 3.8 8.4 6.0 8.8 11
Continuous kVA (3 x 551–690 V) [A] 1.4 2.0 2.9 4.0 4.9 6.7 9
Intermittent kVA (3 x 551–690 V) [A] 1.5 2.2 3.2 4.4 5.4 7.4 9.9
IP20 max. cable cross-section5) (line power,
[0.2-4]/(24-10)
motor, brake and load sharing) [mm2]/(AWG)
Estimated power loss at rated max. load [W]4) 44 60 88 120 160 220 300
Weight, enclosure IP20 (lb [kg]) 14.6 [6.6] 14.6 [6.6] 14.6 [6.6] 14.6 [6.6] 14.6 [6.6] 14.6 [6.6] 14.6 [6.6]
Efficiency4) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
9 9
Table 9.8 Line Power Supply 3x525–690 V AC IP20

Normal overload 110% for 1 minute

Adjustable frequency drive P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at
10 16.4 20.1 24 33 40 50 60 75 100
575 V
Output current
Continuous (3 x 525–550 V)
14 19 23 28 36 43 54 65 87 105
[A]
Intermittent (3 x 525–550 V)
15.4 20.9 25.3 30.8 39.6 47.3 59.4 71.5 95.7 115.5
[A]
13 18 22 27 34 41 52 62 83 100
[A]
14.3 19.8 24.2 29.7 37.4 45.1 57.2 68.2 91.3 110
[A]
13.3 18.1 21.9 26.7 34.3 41 51.4 61.9 82.9 100
[kVA]
12.9 17.9 21.9 26.9 33.8 40.8 51.8 61.7 82.7 99.6
[kVA]
15.5 21.5 26.3 32.3 40.6 49 62.1 74.1 99.2 119.5
[kVA]
9 9 Max. input current
15 19.5 24 29 36 49 59 71 87 99
[A]
16.5 21.5 26.4 31.9 39.6 53.9 64.9 78.1 95.7 108.9
[A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 63 63 63 63 80 100 125 160 160 160
Estimated power loss at
201 285 335 375 430 592 720 880 1200 1440
rated max. load [W]4)
Max. cable size (line power,
motor, brake) [35]/(1/0) [95]/(4/0)
[mm2]/(AWG)2)
Weight IP21 (lb [kg]) 59.53 59.53 59.53 59.53 59.53 143.3 143.3 143.3 143.3 143.3
[27] [27] [27] [27] [27] [65] [65] [65] [65] [65]
Weight IP55 (lb [kg]) 59.53 59.53 59.53 59.53 59.53 143.3 143.3 143.3 143.3 143.3
[27] [27] [27] [27] [27] [65] [65] [65] [65] [65]
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Table 9.9 Line Power Supply 3x525–690 V AC IP21-IP55/NEMA 1-NEMA 12

Normal overload 110% for 1 minute

Adjustable frequency drive P45K P55K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 45 55
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 575 V 60 75
IP20/Chassis C3 C3
Output current
Continuous (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 54 65
Intermittent (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 59.4 71.5
Continuous (3x551–690 V) [A] 52 62
Intermittent (3x551–690 V) [A] 57.2 68.2
Continuous kVA (550 V AC) [kVA] 51.4 62
Continuous kVA (575 V AC) [kVA] 62.2 74.1
Continuous kVA (690 V AC) [kVA] 62.2 74.1
Max. input current
Continuous (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 52 63
Intermittent (3 x 525–550 V) [A] 57.2 69.3
Continuous (3x551–690 V) [A] 50 60
Intermittent (3x551–690 V) [A] 55 66
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 100 125
Estimated power loss at rated max. load [W]4) 592 720
Max. cable size (line power, motor, brake) [mm2]/(AWG)2)
Weight IP20 (lb [kg]) 77.2 [35]
50 (1)
77.2 [35]
9 9
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98
Table 9.10 Line Power Supply 3x525–690 V IP20

1) For type of fuse, see chapter 6.2 Fuses and Circuit Breakers
2) American Wire Gauge
3) Measured using 16 ft [5 m] shielded motor cables at rated load and rated frequency
4) The typical power loss is at normal load conditions and expected to be within ±15% (tolerance relates to variety in voltage and cable
conditions).
Values are based on a typical motor efficiency (IE1/IE2 border line). Lower efficiency motors will also add to the power loss in the adjustable
frequency drive and vice versa.
If the switching frequency is raised from nominal, the power losses may rise significantly.
LCP and typical control card power consumption values are included. Further options and customer load may add up to 30 W to the losses.
(Though typically only 4 W extra for a fully loaded control card or options for slot A or slot B, each).
Although measurements are made with state of the art equipment, some measurement inaccuracy must be allowed for (±5%).
5) Motor and line cable: 300 MCM/150 mm2

9.2 General Specifications

Line power supply (L1, L2, L3)
Supply voltage 200–240 V ±10%, 380–480 V ±10%, 525–690 V ±10%
AC line voltage low / line drop-out:
During low AC line voltage or a line drop-out, the adjustable frequency drive continues until the intermediate circuit voltage
drops below the minimum stop level, which corresponds typically to 15% below the adjustable frequency drive's lowest rated
supply voltage. Power-up and full torque cannot be expected at AC line voltage lower than 10% below the adjustable frequency
drive's lowest rated supply voltage.
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz ±5%
Max. imbalance temporary between line phases 3.0% of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor () ≥ 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cos) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≤ enclosure type A maximum twice/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ enclosure type B, C maximum once/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ enclosure type D, E, F maximum once/2 min.
Environment according to EN60664-1 overvoltage category III / pollution degree 2
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100.000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 480/600 V
maximum.
Motor output (U, V, W)
Output voltage 0–100% of supply voltage
9 9 Output frequency 0–590 Hz*
Switching on output Unlimited
Ramp times 1–3600 s
* Dependent on power size.
Torque characteristics
Starting torque (Constant torque) Maximum 110% for 1 min.*
Starting torque maximum 135% up to 0.5 s*
Overload torque (Constant torque) Maximum 110% for 1 min.*
* Percentage relates to the adjustable frequency drive's nominal torque.
Cable lengths and cross-sections
Max. motor cable length, shielded/armored VLT® HVAC Drive: 492 ft [150 m]
Max. motor cable length, non-shielded/unarmored VLT® HVAC Drive: 984 ft [300 m]
Max. cross-section to motor, line power, load sharing and brake *
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, rigid wire 0.0023 in2 [1.5 mm2]/16 AWG (2 x 0.0012 in2 [0.75 mm2])
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, flexible cable 0.00016 in2 [1 mm2]/18 AWG
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, cable with enclosed core 0.0008 in2 [0.5 mm2]/20 AWG
Minimum cross-section to control terminals 0.00039 in2 [0.25 mm2]
* See Line Power Supply tables for more information!

Digital inputs
Programmable digital inputs 4 (6)
Terminal number 18, 19, 271), 291), 32, 33,
Logic PNP or NPN
Voltage level 0–24 V DC
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP <5 V DC
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP >10 V DC
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN >19 V DC
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN <14 V DC
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes Voltage or current
Mode select Switch S201 and switch S202
Voltage mode Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
Voltage level 0 to +10 V (scaleable)
Max. voltage
Current mode
±20 V
Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
9 9
Current level 0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Max. current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs Max. error 0.5% of full scale
Bandwidth 200 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
PELV isolation
130BA117.10
+24V
Control Mains
18
High
voltage Motor
37
Functional
isolation
RS485 DC-Bus
Figure 9.1 PELV Isolation of Analog Inputs

Pulse inputs
Programmable pulse inputs 2
Terminal number pulse 29, 33
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33 110 kHz (push-pull driven)
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33 5 kHz (open collector)
Min. frequency at terminal 29, 33 4 Hz
Voltage level see chapter 9.2.1
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Pulse input accuracy (0.1–1 kHz) Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Analog output
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4–20 mA
Max. resistor load to common at analog output 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output Max. error: 0.8% of full scale
Resolution on analog output 8 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, RS-485 serial communication
Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 Common for terminals 68 and 69
9 9 The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally seated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV).
Digital output
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 291)
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0–24 V
Max. output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Max. load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Max. capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz
Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz
Accuracy of frequency output Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.
The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, 24 V DC output
Terminal number 12, 13
Max. load 200 mA
The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and digital
inputs and outputs.

Relay outputs
Programmable relay outputs 2
Relay 01 Terminal number 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load) 60 V DC, 1 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Relay 02 Terminal number 4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (resistive load)2) 3) 400 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 80 V DC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 50 V DC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Min. terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO) 24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 20 mA
Environment according to EN 60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 parts 4 and 5
The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage Category II
3) UL applications 300 V AC 2 A 9 9
Control card, 10 V DC output
Terminal number 50
Output voltage 10.5 V ±0.5 V
Max. load 25 mA
The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control characteristics
Resolution of output frequency at 0–590 Hz ±0.003 Hz
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33) ≤ 2 ms
Speed control range (open-loop) 1:100 of synchronous speed
Speed accuracy (open-loop) 30–4000 rpm: Maximum error of ±8 rpm
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor.

Surroundings
Enclosure type A IP 20/Chassis, IP 21kit/Type 1, IP55/Type12, IP 66/Type12
Enclosure type B1/B2 IP 21/Type 1, IP55/Type12, IP 66/12
Enclosure type B3/B4 IP20/Chassis
Enclosure type C1/C2 IP 21/Type 1, IP55/Type 12, IP66/12
Enclosure type C3/C4 IP20/Chassis
Enclosure kit available. IP21/NEMA 1/IP 4X on top of enclosure
Vibration test enclosure A, B, C 1.0 g
Relative humidity 5%–95% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 60068-2-43) H2S test class Kd
Test method according to IEC 60068-2-43 H2S (10 days)
Ambient temperature (at 60 AVM switching mode)
- with derating max. 131 °F [55 °C]1)
- with full output power of typical IE2 motors (up to 90% output current) max. 122 °F [50 °C]1)
- at full continuous FC output current max. 113 °F [45 °C]1)
1) For more information on derating see chapter 9.6 Special Conditions
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 32 °F [0 °C]
Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance 14 °F [-10 °C]
Temperature during storage/transport -13–+149/158 °F [-25–+65/70 °C]
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating 3300 ft [1000 m]
9 9 Maximum altitude above sea level with derating

Derating for high altitude, see chapter 9.6 Special Conditions
10,000 ft [3000 m]
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011, IEC 61800-3

EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2,
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6
See chapter 9.6 Special Conditions
Control card performance
Scan interval 5 ms
Control card, USB serial communication
USB standard 1.1 (Full speed)
USB plug USB type B “device” plug
CAUTION
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device USB cable.
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB connection is not galvanically isolated from protection ground. Use only isolated laptop/PC as connection to
the USB connector on or an isolated USB cable/drive.

Protection and Features Adjustable frequency drive efficiency calculation

Calculate the efficiency of the adjustable frequency drive at
• Electronic thermal motor protection against different loads based on Figure 9.2. The factor in this graph
overload.
must be multiplied with the specific efficiency factor listed
• Temperature monitoring of the heatsink ensures in the specification tables:
that the adjustable frequency drive trips, if the
1.01
130BB252.11
temperature reaches 203 °F ± 9 °F [95 °C ± 5 °C].
1.0
An overload temperature cannot be reset until 0.99
Relative Efficiency
the temperature of the heatsink is below 0.98
158 °F ± 9 °F [70 °C ± 5 °C] (guideline - these 0.97
temperatures may vary for different power sizes, 0.96
enclosures, etc.). The has an auto derating 0.95
0.94
function to avoid it's heatsink reaching
0.93
203 °F [95 °C]. 0.92
0% 50% 100% 150% 200%
• The adjustable frequency drive is protected % Speed
against short-circuits on motor terminals U, V, W. 100% load 75% load 50% load 25% load
• If a line phase is missing, the adjustable Figure 9.2 Typical Efficiency Curves
frequency drive trips or issues a warning
(depending on the load).
Example: Assume a 30 hp [22 kW], 380–480 V AC
• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage
adjustable frequency drive runs at 25% load at 50% speed.
ensures that the adjustable frequency drive trips
The graph shows 0.97 - rated efficiency for a 30 hp [22 kW]
if the intermediate circuit voltage is too low or
too high. adjustable frequency drive is 0.98. The actual efficiency is 9 9
then: 0.97x0.98=0.95.
• The adjustable frequency drive is protected
against ground faults on motor terminals U, V, W.
Efficiency of the motor (ηMOTOR)
9.3 Efficiency The efficiency of a motor connected to the adjustable
frequency drive depends on the magnetizing level. In
Efficiency of the adjustable frequency drive (ηVLT) general, the efficiency is just as good as with line power
The load on the adjustable frequency drive has little effect operation. The efficiency of the motor depends on the
on its efficiency. In general, the efficiency is the same at type of motor.
the rated motor frequency fM,N, even if the motor supplies
100% of the rated shaft torque or only 75%, i.e., in case of In the range of 75–100% of the rated torque, the efficiency
part loads. of the motor is practically constant, both when it is
controlled by the adjustable frequency drive, and when it
This also means that the efficiency of the adjustable runs directly on line power.
frequency drive does not change even if other U/f charac-
teristics are chosen. In small motors, the influence from the U/f characteristic
However, the U/f characteristics influence the efficiency of on efficiency is marginal. However, in motors from 15 hp
the motor. [11 kW] and up, the advantages are significant.
The efficiency declines a little when the switching In general, the switching frequency does not affect the
frequency is set to a value greater than 5 kHz. The efficiency of small motors. The efficiency of motors from
efficiency will also be slightly reduced if the AC line 15 hp [11 kW] and up improves by 1–2%. This is because
voltage is 480 V. the sine shape of the motor current is almost perfect at
high switching frequency.
Efficiency of the system (ηSYSTEM)

To calculate the system efficiency, the efficiency of the
adjustable frequency drive (ηVLT) is multiplied by the
efficiency of the motor (ηMOTOR):
ηSYSTEM = ηVLT x ηMOTOR

9.4 Acoustic noise 9.5 Peak voltage on motor

The acoustic noise from the adjustable frequency drive When a transistor in the inverter bridge switches, the
originates from three sources: voltage across the motor increases by a dU/dt ratio
• DC intermediate circuit coils. depending on:
• Integrated fan. • the motor cable (type, cross-section, length,

shielded or non-shielded)
• RFI filter choke.
• inductance
Typical values are measured at a distance of 3.3 ft. [1 m]
from the unit: The natural induction causes an overshoot UPEAK in the
motor voltage before it stabilizes itself at a level
depending on the voltage in the intermediate circuit. The
At reduced fan
Full fan speed rise time and the peak voltage UPEAK affect the service life
Enclosure type speed (50%)
[dBA] of the motor. If the peak voltage is too high, motors
[dBA]
without phase coil insulation are especially affected. If the
A2 51 60
motor cable is short (by a few yards), the rise time and
A3 51 60
peak voltage are lower. If the motor cable is long (330 ft
A4 50 55 [100 m]), the rise time and peak voltage increase. In
A5 54 63 motors without phase insulation paper or other insulation
B1 61 67 reinforcement suitable for operation with the voltage
B2 58 70 supply (such as an adjustable frequency drive), fit a sine-
B3 59.4 70.5 wave filter on the output of the adjustable frequency drive.
B4 53 62.8
9 9 C1 52 62 To obtain approximate values for cable lengths and
C2 55 65 voltages not mentioned below, use the following rules of
C3 56.4 67.3 thumb:
C4 - -
1. Rise time increases/decreases proportionally with
Table 9.11 Measured values
cable length.
2. UPEAK = DC link voltage x 1.9
(DC link voltage = AC line voltage x 1.35).
3. 0.8 × UPEAK
dU / dt =
Rise time
Data are measured according to IEC 60034-17.

Cable lengths are in meters.
Cable length AC linevoltage Rise time Vpeak dU/dt

(ft [m]) [V] [μsec] [kV] [kV/μsec]
120 [36] 240 0.226 0.616 2.142
164 [50] 240 0.262 0.626 1.908
330 [100] 240 0.650 0.614 0.757
500 [150] 240 0.745 0.612 0.655
Table 9.12 Adjustable frequency drive, P5K5, T2

16.4 [5] 230 0.13 0.510 3.090
164 [50] 230 0.23 0.590 2.034
330 [100] 230 0.54 0.580 0.865
500 [150] 230 0.66 0.560 0.674


120 [36] 240 0.264 0.624 1.894
450 [136] 240 0.536 0.596 0.896
500 [150] 240 0.568 0.568 0.806
Table 9.14 Adjustable frequency drive, P11K, T2

100 [30] 240 0.556 0.650 0.935
330 [100] 240 0.592 0.594 0.807
500 [150] 240 0.708 0.575 0.669

120 [36] 240 0.244 0.608 1.993
450 [136] 240 0.568 0.580 0.832
500 [150] 240 0.720 0.574 0.661

9 9
120 [36] 240 0.244 0.608 1.993
450 [136] 240 0.560 0.580 0.832
500 [150] 240 0.720 0.574 0.661

50 [15] 240 0.194 0.626 2.581
164 [50] 240 0.252 0.574 1.929
500 [150] 240 0.444 0.538 0.977

100 [30] 240 0.300 0.598 1.593
330 [100] 240 0.536 0.566 0.843
500 [150] 240 0.776 0.546 0.559

100 [30] 240 0.300 0.598 1.593
330 [100] 240 0.536 0.566 0.843
500 [150] 240 0.776 0.546 0.559


16.4 [5] 400 0.640 0.690 0.862
164 [50] 400 0.470 0.985 0.985
500 [150] 400 0.760 1.045 0.947

16.4 [5] 400 0.172 0.890 4.156
164 [50] 400 0.310 2.564
500 [150] 400 0.370 1.190 1.770

16.4 [5] 400 0.04755 0.739 8.035
164 [50] 400 0.207 1.040 4.548
500 [150] 400 0.6742 1.030 2.828
9 9

50 [15] 400 0.408 0.718 1.402
330 [100] 400 0.364 1.050 2.376
500 [150] 400 0.400 0.980 2.000

120 [36] 400 0.422 1.060 2.014
330 [100] 400 0.464 0.900 1.616
500 [150] 400 0.896 1.000 0.915

120 [36] 400 0.344 1.040 2.442
330 [100] 400 1.000 1.190 0.950
500 [150] 400 1.400 1.040 0.596


120 [36] 400 0.232 0.950 3.534
330 [100] 400 0.410 0.980 1.927
500 [150] 400 0.430 0.970 1.860

50 [15] 400 0.271 1.000 3.100
330 [100] 400 0.440 1.000 1.818
500 [150] 400 0.520 0.990 1.510

16.4 [5] 480 0.270 1.276 3.781
164 [50] 480 0.435 1.184 2.177
330 [100] 480 0.840 1.188 1.131
500 [150] 480 0.940 1.212 1.031
Table 9.29 Adjustable frequency drive, P37K, T4 9 9

120 [36] 400 0.254 1.056 3.326
164 [50] 400 0.465 1.048 1.803
330 [100] 400 0.815 1.032 1.013
500 [150] 400 0.890 1.016 0.913

33 [10] 400 0.350 0.932 2.130

16.4 [5] 480 0.371 1.170 2.466

16.4 [5] 400 0.364 1.030 2.264

9.6 Special Conditions

9.6.1 Purpose of Derating SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation
130BD639.10
Iout (%)
110%
Take derating into account when using the adjustable 100%
frequency drive at low air pressure (high altitudes), at low 80%
speeds, with long motor cables, cables with a large cross-
60%
section or at high ambient temperature. This section A1-A3 45°C, A4-A5 40°C
describes the actions required. 40% A1-A3 50°C, A4-A5 45°C
A1-A3 55°C, A4-A5 50°C
20%
9.6.2 Derating for Ambient Temperature 0
fsw (kHz)
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Figure 9.4 Derating of Iout for Different TAMB, MAX for
90% adjustable frequency drive output current can be
Enclosures Type A, using SFAVM
maintained up to max. 122 °F [50 °C] ambient
temperature.
When using only 33 ft [10 m] motor cable or less in

With a typical full load current of IE2 motors, full output
enclosure size A, less derating is necessary. This is due to
shaft power can be maintained up to 122 °F [50 °C]. the fact that the length of the motor cable has a relatively
For more specific data and/or derating information for high impact on the recommended derating.
other motors or conditions, contact Danfoss.
60° AVM
9.6.3 Derating for Ambient Temperature,
9 9
130BA394.10
Iout (%)
Enclosure Type A 110%
100%
80%
60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation
Iout (%) A1-A3 45°C, A4-A5 40°C
130BA393.10
60%
110% A1-A3 50°C, A4-A5 45°C
100% 40% A1-A3 55°C, A4-A5 50°C
80% 20%
fsw (kHz)
60% 0 0
A1-A3 45°C, A4-A5 40°C 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
40% A1-A3 50°C, A4-A5 45°C Figure 9.5 Derating of Iout for Different TAMB, MAX for
A1-A3 55°C, A4-A5 50°C
20% Enclosures Type A, using 60° AVM and maximum 32 ft [10 m]
0
fsw (kHz) motor cable
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Enclosure Type A, using 60° AVM SFAVM
130BD640.10
Iout (%)
110%
100%
80%
A1-A3 45°C, A4-A5 40°C
60%
A1-A3 50°C, A4-A5 45°C
40% A1-A3 55°C, A4-A5 50°C
20%
fsw (kHz)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Enclosures Type A, using SFAVM and maximum 32 ft [10 m]
motor cable

9.6.3.1 Enclosure Type A3, T7
130BB828.10
lout(%)
NO
130BD596.10
Iout (%) 110%
110% 100% B3
100% 90% B4
80%
80%
o
60% 60% 45 C
ILOAD at TAMB max o
50 C
40% ILOAD at TAMB max +5 °C 40% o
55 C
ILOAD at TAMB max +5 °C
20%
20%
fsw (kHz)
0 fsw (kHz)
0 1 2 3 4 5 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Enclosure Type A3 Figure 9.9 Derating of Iout for different TAMB, MAX for
enclosure types B3 and B4, using 60° AVM in normal
overload mode (110% over torque)
9.6.4 Derating for Ambient Temperature,
Enclosure Type B
SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation
9.6.4.1 Enclosure Type B, T2, T4 and T5 Iout (%)
130BA403.11
NO
110%
100%
For the B and C enclosure types, the derating also depends B1
on the overload mode selected in 1-04 Overload Mode 80% B2

9 9
60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation 60% 45°C
Iout (%) 50°C

130BA401.11
NO 40%
110% 55°C
100% 20%
B1
B2 fsw (kHz)
80% 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
60% 45°C
Figure 9.10 Derating of Iout for different TAMB, MAX for
50°C
40% enclosure types B1 and B2, using SFAVM in normal
55°C
20%
fsw (kHz)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Figure 9.8 Derating of Iout for different TAMB, MAX for 130BB832.10
lout(%)
enclosure types B1 and B2, using 60° AVM in normal
NO
overload mode (110% over torque) 110%
100% B3
90% B4
80%
60% o
45 C
o
50 C
40%
20%
fsw (kHz)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

enclosure types B3 and B4, using SFAVM in normal

9.6.4.2 Enclosure Type B, T6 9.6.4.3 Enclosure Type B, T7
60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation Enclosure Type B2, 525–690 V

60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation
130BB820.10
B2 all options
130BB211.10
Iout (A)
lout(%)
NO
110% 34
100% B1 & B2 30.6
90% 27.2 45°C
80%
60%
o
45 C
20.4 50°C
o
50 C
40% 13.6 55°C
20%
fsw (kHz)
0 fsw (kHz)
0 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
1 2 4 6 8 10
Figure 9.12 Output current derating with switching frequency Figure 9.14 Output current derating with switching frequency
and ambient temperature for 600 V adjustable frequency and ambient temperature for enclosure type B2, 60° AVM.
drives, enclosure type B, 60° AVM, NO Note: The graph is drawn with the current as absolute value
and is valid for both high and normal overload.
SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation

9 9 SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation
130BB826.10
Iout (A)
130BB212.10
B2 all options
lout(%)
NO
110% 100
100% B1 & B2 90
90% 80
80%
70
60 45°C
60% o
45 C
o 40 50°C
40% 50 C
20 55°C
20%
fsw (kHz)
fsw (kHz)
0 1 2 4 6 8 10
0 1 2 4 6 8 10
Figure 9.15 Output current derating with switching frequency
Figure 9.13 Output current derating with switching frequency and ambient temperature for enclosure type B2, SFAVM.
and ambient temperature for 600 V adjustable frequency Note: The graph is drawn with the current as absolute value
drives, enclosure type B, SFAVM, NO and is valid for both high and normal overload.

9.6.5 Derating for Ambient Temperature, SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation
Enclosure Type C Iout (%)
130BA399.10
NO
110%
100%
9.6.5.1 Enclosure Type C, T2, T4 and T5 C1 & C2
80%
60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation 60% 45°C

Iout (%)
130BA397.10
50°C
NO 40%
110% 55°C
100% 20%
C1 & C2
fsw (kHz)
80% 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
60% 45°C
50°C Figure 9.18 Derating of Iout for different TAMB, MAX for
40% 55°C enclosure types C1 and C2, using SFAVM in normal
20% overload mode (110% over torque)
fsw (kHz)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
130BB833.10
enclosure types C1 and C2, using 60° AVM in Normal lout(%)
NO
overload mode (110% over torque) 110%
100% C3 & C4
90%
80%
9 9
130BB829.10
60% o
lout(%) 45 C
NO o
110% 40% 50 C
100% C3 & C4
90% 20%
80% fsw (kHz)
o 0
45 C
60% 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
o
50 C
40% o
55 C
enclosure types C3 and C4, using SFAVM in normal
20%
fsw (kHz)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Figure 9.17 Derating of Iout for different TAMB, MAX for 9.6.5.2 Enclosure Type C, T6
enclosure types C3 and C4, using 60° AVM in Normal
overload mode (110% over torque) 60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation
130BB821.10
lout(%)
NO
110%
100% C1 & C2
90%
80%
o
45 C
60%
o
50 C
40%
20%
fsw (kHz)
0
0 1 2 4 6 8 10

and ambient temperature for 600 V adjustable frequency
drives, enclosure type C, 60° AVM, NO

SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation SFAVM - Stator Frequency Asyncron Vector Modulation
Iout (A)
130BB214.10
130BB827.10
C2 all options
lout(%)
NO 100
110%
86.6
100% 80
C1 & C2
90%
66.6
80% 60 45°C
60% o 40 50°C
45 C
o
50 C
40% 20 55°C
fsw (kHz)
20%
fsw (kHz) 1 2 4 6 8 10
0 Figure 9.23 Output current derating with switching frequency
0 1 2 4 6 8 10
and ambient temperature for enclosure type C2, SFAVM. Note:
Figure 9.21 Output current derating with switching frequency The graph is drawn with the current as absolute value and is
and ambient temperature for 600 V adjustable frequency valid for both high and normal overload.
drives, enclosure type C, SFAVM, NO
9.6.6 Automatic Adaptations to Ensure

9.6.5.3 Enclosure Type C, T7 Performance
60° AVM - Pulse Width Modulation The adjustable frequency drive constantly checks for
9 9 Iout (A) critical levels of internal temperature, load current, high
130BB213.11
C2 all options
voltage on the intermediate circuit and low motor speeds.
34 As a response to a critical level, the adjustable frequency
28.9 drive can adjust the switching frequency and/or change
27.2 45°C
the switching pattern to ensure the performance of the
20.4 50°C adjustable frequency drive. The capability for automatic
output current reduction extends the acceptable operating
13.6 55°C
conditions even further.
fsw (kHz)
1 2 4 6 8 10
and ambient temperature for enclosure type C2, 60° AVM.
Note: The graph is drawn with the current as absolute value
and is valid for both high and normal overload.

9.6.7 Derating for Low Air Pressure (°C)
130BB009.10
45
The cooling capability of air is decreased at a lower air

pressure. 40
Amb. Temp.
HO
Below 3,300 ft [1,000 m] altitude no derating is necessary,

35
but above 3,300 ft [1,000 m] the ambient temperature NO
(TAMB) or max. output current (Iout) should be derated in
accordance with the following diagram. 30
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Altitude (meters above sea level)*
Figure 9.26 Example: At an altitude of 6,600 ft [2 km] and a

temperature of 113 °F [45 °C] (TAMB, MAX - 3.3 K), 91% of the
rated output current is available. At a temperature of 107 °F
[41.7 °C], 100% of the rated output current is available
Derating of output current versus altitude at TAMB, MAX for

enclosure types D, E and F.
9.6.8 Derating for Running at Low Speed

Figure 9.24 Derating of output current versus altitude at
TAMB, MAX for enclosure types A, B and C. At altitudes above
6,600 ft [2 km], contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
When a motor is connected to an adjustable frequency
drive, it is necessary to make sure that the cooling of the
9 9
motor is adequate.
The level of heating depends on the load on the motor as
IOUT(%) well as the operating speed and time.
130BB008.10
100
Constant torque applications (CT mode)

95
A problem may occur at low RPM values in constant

90
torque applications. In a constant torque application, a
motor may overheat at low speeds due to less cooling air
85
from the motor integral fan.
Therefore, if the motor is to be run continuously at an RPM
80
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
value lower than half of the rated value, the motor must
Altitude (meters above sea level)* be supplied with additional air-cooling (or a motor
Figure 9.25 An alternative is to lower the ambient designed for this type of operation may be used).
temperature at high altitudes and thereby ensure 100%
output current at high altitudes An alternative is to reduce the load level of the motor by
selecting a larger motor. However, the design of the
adjustable frequency drive limits the motor size.
Variable (quadratic) torque applications (VT)
In VT applications such as centrifugal pumps and fans,

where the torque is proportional to the square of the
speed and the power is proportional to the cube of the
speed, there is no need for additional cooling or de-rating
of the motor.

In the graphs shown below, the typical VT curve is below NOTICE!

the maximum torque with derating and maximum torque
After a manual reset pressing [RESET] on the LCP, press
with forced cooling at all speeds.
[Auto On] or [Hand On] to restart the motor.
120
130BA893.10
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its
100
1) cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
80 (see also Table 9.35).
60
T%
40 CAUTION
20
Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,
means that the line power supply must be switched off
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
v%
on, the is no longer blocked and may be reset as
Legend: ─ ─ ─ ─Typical torque at VT load ─•─•─•─ Max torque described above once the cause has been rectified.
with forced cooling ‒‒‒‒‒Max torque Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using
Note 1) Oversynchronous speed operation results in the the automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode
available motor torque decreasing inversely proportional with (Warning: automatic wake-up is possible!)
the increase in speed. This must be considered during the If a warning and alarm is marked against a code in the
design phase to avoid overloading the motor. table on the following page, this means that either a
warning occurs before an alarm, or it can be specified
Table 9.34 Maximum load for a standard motor at 104 °F whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be
9 9 [40 °C] displayed for a given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in 1-90 Motor Thermal
9.7 Troubleshooting Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on
coasting, and the alarm and warning flash on the . Once
A warning or an alarm is signaled by the relevant LED on the problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
the front of the and indicated by a code on the display. flashing.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer

present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
NOTICE!
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be No missing motor phase detection (no 30-32) and no
critical, but are not necessarily so. stall detection is active when 1-10 Motor Construction is
set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
In the event of an alarm, the trips. Alarms must be reset to
restart operation once their cause has been rectified.
This may be done in four ways:

1. By resetting the [RESET] on the LCP.
2. Via a digital input with the “Reset” function.
3. Via serial communication/optional serial
communication bus.
4. By resetting automatically using the Auto Reset
function, which is a default setting for VLT® HVAC
Drive, see 14-20 Reset Mode in the FC 102
Programming Guide

No. Description Warning Alarm/ Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter Reference

Trip
1 10 V low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01
3 No motor (X) 1-80
4 Line phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC overvoltage X X
8 DC undervoltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
11 Motor thermistor overtemp. (X) (X) 1-90
12 Torque limit X X
13 Overcurrent X X X
14 Ground fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04
18 Start failed X
23 Internal Fan Fault X
24
25
External Fan Fault
Brake resistor short-circuited
X
X
14-53
9 9
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15
29 Drive over temperature X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
33 Soft-charge fault X X
34 Serial communication bus communication fault X X
35 Out of frequency range X X
36 Line failure X X
37 Phase Imbalance X X
38 Internal fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Term. 27 (X) 5-00, 5-01
41 Overload of Digital Output Term. 29 (X) 5-00, 5-02
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/6 (X) 5-32
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/7 (X) 5-33
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA Parameter out of range X

No. Description Warning Alarm/ Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter Reference

Trip
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External Interlock X
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
64 Voltage Limit X
65 Control Board Over temperature X X X
66 Heatsink Temperature Low X
67 Option Configuration has Changed X
68 Safe Stop (X) X1) 5-19
69 Pwr. Card Temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X1)
72 Dang. failure X1)
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart
76 Pwr Unit Set-up X
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialized to Default Value X
9 9 91
92
Analog input 54 wrong settings
No-Flow X X
X
22-2*
93 Dry Pump X X 22-2*
94 End of Curve X X 22-5*
95 Broken Belt X X 22-6*
96 Start Delayed X 22-7*
97 Stop Delayed X 22-7*
98 Clock Fault X 0-7*
201 Fire M was Active
202 Fire M Limits Exceeded
203 Missing Motor
204 Locked Rotor
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heatsink temp X X X
245 Heatsink sensor X X
246 Pwr.card supply X X
247 Pwr.card temp X X
248 Illegal PS config X X
250 New spare parts X
251 New Type Code X X
Table 9.35 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter
1) Cannot be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip will coast the motor and can be reset by pressing [Reset] or make
a reset by a digital input (parameter group 5-1* [1]). The original event that caused an alarm cannot damage the or cause
dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action when an alarm occurs, which may cause damage to or connected parts. A trip
lock situation can only be reset by power cycling.

Warning yellow
Alarm flashing red
Trip locked yellow and red
Table 9.36 LED Indication
Alarm Word and Extended Status Word

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Warning Word Extended Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check Brake Check Ramping
1 00000002 2 Pwr. Card Temp Pwr. Card Temp AMA Running
2 00000004 4 Ground Fault Ground Fault Start CW/CCW
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp Ctrl.Card Temp Slow-down
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up
5 00000020 32 Overcurrent Overcurrent Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit Torque Limit Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over Motor Th Over Output Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over Motor ETR Over Output Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Inverter Overld. Output Freq High
10 00000400 1024 DC undervolt DC undervolt Output Freq Low
11 00000800 2048 DC overvolt DC overvolt Brake Check OK
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit DC Voltage Low Braking Max
13 00002000 8192 Soft-charge fault DC Voltage High Braking
14 00004000 16384 Line power ph. Loss Line power ph. Loss Out of Speed Range 9 9
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK No Motor OVC Active
16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error Live Zero Error
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault 10 V low
18 00040000 262144 Brake Overload Brake Overload
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss Brake Resistor
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Brake IGBT
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Speed Limit
22 00400000 4194304 Serial communication Serial communication bus fault
bus fault
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply Low 24 V Supply Low
24 01000000 16777216 Line failure Line failure
25 02000000 33554432 1.8 V Supply Low Current Limit
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Low Temp
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT Voltage Limit
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change Unused
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialized Unused
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop Unused
31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake low (A63) Extended Status Word
Table 9.37 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional serial communication
bus for diagnosis. See also 16-90 Alarm Word, 16-92 Warning Word and 16-94 Ext. Status Word.

9.7.1 Alarm Words Bit Alarm Word 2

(Hex) (16-91 Alarm Word 2)
Bit Alarm Word 00000001
(Hex) (16-90 Alarm Word) 00000002 Reserved
00000001 00000004 Service Trip, Type code / Spare part
00000002 Power card over temperature 00000008 Reserved
00000004 Ground fault 00000010 Reserved
00000008 00000020
00000010 Control word timeout 00000040
00000020 Overcurrent 00000080
00000040 00000100 Broken Belt
00000080 Motor thermistor overtemp. 00000200 Not used
00000100 Motor ETR overtemperature 00000400 Not used
00000200 Inverter overloaded 00000800 Reserved
00000400 DC link undervoltage 00001000 Reserved
00000800 DC link overvoltage 00002000 Reserved
00001000 Short-circuit 00004000 Reserved
00002000 00008000 Reserved
00004000 Line phase loss 00010000 Reserved
00008000 AMA not OK 00020000 Not used
00010000 Live zero error 00040000 Fans error
9 9 00020000
00040000
Internal fault 00080000
00100000
ECB error
Reserved
00080000 Motor phase U is missing 00200000 Reserved
00100000 Motor phase V is missing 00400000 Reserved
00200000 Motor phase W is missing 00800000 Reserved
00800000 Control Voltage Fault 01000000 Reserved
01000000 02000000 Reserved
02000000 VDD, supply low 04000000 Reserved
04000000 Brake resistor short-circuit 08000000 Reserved
08000000 Brake chopper fault 10000000 Reserved
10000000 Ground fault DESAT 20000000 Reserved
20000000 Drive initialized 40000000 PTC 1 Safe Stop [A71]
40000000 Safe Stop [A68] 80000000 Dangerous Failure [A72]
80000000
Table 9.39 16-91 Alarm Word 2
Table 9.38 16-90 Alarm Word

9.7.2 Warning Words Bit Warning Word 2

(Hex) (16-93 Warning Word 2)
Bit Warning Word 00000001
(Hex) (16-92 Warning Word) 00000002
00000001 00000004 Clock Failure
00000002 Power card over temperature 00000008 Reserved
00000004 Ground fault 00000010 Reserved
00000008 00000020
00000010 Control word timeout 00000040
00000020 Overcurrent 00000080 End of Curve
00000040 00000100 Broken Belt
00000080 Motor thermistor overtemp. 00000200 Not used
00000100 Motor ETR overtemperature 00000400 Reserved
00000200 Inverter overloaded 00000800 Reserved
00000400 DC link undervoltage 00001000 Reserved
00000800 DC link overvoltage 00002000 Reserved
00001000 00004000 Reserved
00002000 00008000 Reserved
00004000 Line phase loss 00010000 Reserved
00008000 No motor 00020000 Not used
00010000 Live zero error 00040000 Fans warning
00020000
00040000
00080000
00100000 Reserved
9 9
00080000 00200000 Reserved
00100000 00400000 Reserved
00200000 00800000 Reserved
00400000 01000000 Reserved
00800000 02000000 Reserved
01000000 04000000 Reserved
02000000 Current limit 08000000 Reserved
04000000 10000000 Reserved
08000000 20000000 Reserved
10000000 40000000 PTC 1 Safe Stop [W71]
20000000 80000000 Reserved
40000000 Safe Stop [W68]
Table 9.41 16-93 Warning Word 2
80000000 Not used
Table 9.40 16-92 Warning Word

9.7.3 Extended Status Words Bit Extended Status Word 2

(Hex) (16-95 Ext. Status Word 2)
Bit Extended Status Word 00000001 Off
(Hex) (16-94 Ext. Status Word) 00000002 Hand / Auto
00000001 Ramping 00000004 Not used
00000002 AMA tuning 00000008 Not used
00000004 Start CW/CCW 00000010 Not used
00000008 Not used 00000020 Relay 123 active
00000010 Not used 00000040 Start Prevented
00000020 Feedback high 00000080 Control ready
00000040 Feedback low 00000100 Drive ready
00000080 Output current high 00000200 Quick Stop
00000100 Output current low 00000400 DC Brake
00000200 Output frequency high 00000800 Stop
00000400 Output frequency low 00001000 Standby
00000800 Brake check OK 00002000 Freeze Output Request
00001000 Braking max 00004000 Freeze Output
00002000 Braking 00008000 Jog Request
00004000 Out of speed range 00010000 Jog
00008000 OVC active 00020000 Start Request
00010000 AC brake 00040000 Start
9 9 00020000
00040000
Password Timelock
Password Protection
00080000
00100000
Start Applied
Start Delay
00080000 Reference high 00200000 Sleep
00100000 Reference low 00400000 Sleep Boost
00200000 Local Ref./Remote Ref. 00800000 Running
00400000 Reserved 01000000 Bypass
00800000 Reserved 02000000 Fire Mode
01000000 Reserved 04000000 Reserved
40000000 Reserved
Table 9.43 Extended Status Word 2, 16-95 Ext. Status Word 2
80000000 Reserved
Table 9.42 Extended Status Word, 16-94 Ext. Status Word

The warning/alarm information below defines each WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage

warning/alarm condition, provides the probable cause for If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
the condition, and details a remedy or troubleshooting adjustable frequency drive trips after a time.
procedure.
Troubleshooting
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low Connect a brake resistor
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal 50. Extend the ramp time
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V
supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. Change the ramp type
A short circuit in a connected potentiometer or improper Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition. Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
Troubleshooting If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag,
Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the use kinetic backup (14-10 Line Failure)
warning clears, the problem is with the wiring. If
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC undervoltage
the warning does not clear, replace the control
If the DC link voltage drops below the undervoltage limit,
card.
the adjustable frequency drive checks if a 24 V DC backup
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error supply is connected. If no 24 V DC backup supply is
This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in connected, the adjustable frequency drive trips after a
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one of the fixed time delay. The time delay varies with unit size.
analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum value
Troubleshooting
programmed for that input. Broken wiring or faulty device
Make sure that the supply voltage matches the
sending the signal can cause this condition.
Troubleshooting
adjustable frequency drive voltage.
Perform input voltage test.
9 9
Check connections on all the analog input
terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for Perform soft charge circuit test.
signals, terminal 55 common. MCB 101 terminals WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload
11 and 12 for signals, terminal 10 common. MCB The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an
109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, terminals 2, 4, 6 overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
common). electronic, thermal inverter protection issues a warning at
Check that the frequency converter programming 98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The
and switch settings match the analog signal type. frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is
below 90%.
Perform Input Terminal Signal Test.
The fault is that the frequency converter has run with
WARNING/ALARM 4, Line phase loss more than 100% overload for too long.
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the line voltage Troubleshooting
imbalance is too high. This message also appears for a Compare the output current shown on the LCP
fault in the input rectifier on the adjustable frequency with the frequency converter rated current.
drive. Options are programmed at 14-12 Function at Mains
Compare the output current shown on the LCP
Imbalance.
with measured motor current.
Troubleshooting
Display the Thermal Drive Load on the LCP and
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to
monitor the value. When running above the
frequency converter continuous current rating,
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high the counter increases. When running below the
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the frequency converter continuous current rating,
high-voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the the counter decreases.
adjustable frequency drive voltage rating. The unit is still WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
active. According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low motor is too hot. Select whether the adjustable frequency
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low- drive issues a warning or an alarm when the counter
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the reaches 100% in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active. occurs when the motor runs with more than 100%
overload for too long.

Troubleshooting WARNING/ALARM 13, Overcurrent

Check for motor overheating. The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 s,
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
then the adjustable frequency drive trips and issues an
Check that the motor current set in 1-24 Motor alarm. Shock loading or quick acceleration with high inertia
Current is correct. loads can cause this fault. If the acceleration during ramp
Ensure that Motor data in parameters 1-20 to up is quick, the fault can also appear after kinetic backup.
1-25 are set correctly. If extended mechanical brake control is selected, trip can
be reset externally.
If an external fan is in use, check in 1-91 Motor
External Fan that it is selected. Troubleshooting
Remove power and check if the motor shaft can
Running AMA in 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
be turned.
(AMA) tunes the adjustable frequency drive to the
motor more accurately and reduces thermal Make sure that the motor size matches the
loading. adjustable frequency drive.
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over-temp Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct motor
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select data.
whether the adjustable frequency drive issues a warning or ALARM 14, Ground fault
an alarm in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. There is current from the output phases to ground, either
Troubleshooting in the cable between the adjustable frequency drive and
Check for motor overheating. the motor or in the motor itself.
9 9 Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded. Troubleshooting

Remove power to the adjustable frequency drive
When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
and repair the ground fault.
thermistor is connected correctly between either
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and Check for ground faults in the motor by
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the measuring the resistance to ground of the motor
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage. leads and the motor with a megohmmeter.
Check 1-93 Thermistor Source selects terminal 53 ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
or 54. A fitted option is not operational with the present control
When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that board hardware or software.
the thermistor is connected correctly between Record the value of the following parameters and contact
either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only) your Danfoss supplier:
and terminal 50. Check 1-93 Thermistor Source
15-40 FC Type
selects terminal 18 or 19.
15-41 Power Section
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit 15-42 Voltage
The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit
15-43 Software Version
Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this 15-45 Actual Typecode String
warning from a warning-only condition to a warning 15-49 SW ID Control Card
followed by an alarm.
15-50 SW ID Power Card
Troubleshooting
If the motor torque limit is exceeded during 15-60 Option Mounted
ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time. 15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot)
If the generator torque limit is exceeded during ALARM 16, Short-circuit
ramp-down, extend the ramp-down time. There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
If torque limit occurs while running, possibly Remove power to the adjustable frequency drive and
increase the torque limit. Make sure that the repair the short circuit.
system can operate safely at a higher torque.
Check the application for excessive current draw
on the motor.

WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout WARNING 25, Brake resistor short-circuit
There is no communication to the adjustable frequency The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short
drive. circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
The warning is only active when 8-04 Control Word Timeout warning appears. The adjustable frequency drive is still
Function is NOT set to [0] Off. operational but without the brake function. Remove power
If 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] Stop and to the adjustable frequency drive and replace the brake
Trip, a warning appears and the adjustable frequency drive resistor (see 2-15 Brake Check).
ramps down until it stops then displays an alarm.
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
Troubleshooting The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
Check connections on the serial communication a mean value over the last 120 seconds of run time. The
cable. calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and
the brake resistance value set in 2-16 AC Brake Max.
Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking
Check the operation of the communication energy is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If
equipment. [2] Trip is selected in 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring, the
Verify a proper installation based on EMC adjustable frequency drive trips when the dissipated
requirements. braking energy reaches 100%.
ALARM 18, Start failed WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault

The speed has not been able to exceed 1-77 Compressor The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if a
Start Max Speed [RPM] during start within the allowed time. short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
(set in 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip). This may be warning is issued. The adjustable frequency drive is still
operational but, since the brake transistor has short-
9 9
caused by a blocked motor.
circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
resistor, even if it is inactive.
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
Remove power to the adjustable frequency drive and
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
remove the brake resistor.
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
For the D, E, and F Frame filters, the regulated voltage to
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
the fans is monitored.
Check 2-15 Brake Check.
Troubleshooting
ALARM 29, Heatsink temp
Check for proper fan operation.
The maximum temperature of the heatsink has been
Cycle power to the adjustable frequency drive exceeded. The temperature fault does not reset until the
and check that the fan operates briefly at start- temperature falls below a defined heatsink temperature.
up. The trip and reset points are different based on the
Check the sensors on the heatsink and control adjustable frequency drive power size.
card. Troubleshooting
WARNING 24, External fan fault Check for the following conditions.
The fan warning function is an extra protective function Ambient temperature too high.
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning Motor cable too long.
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the
Troubleshooting adjustable frequency drive.
Check for proper fan operation.
Blocked airflow around the adjustable frequency
Cycle power to the adjustable frequency drive drive.
and check that the fan operates briefly at start-
Damaged heatsink fan.
up.
Dirty heatsink.
Check the sensors on the heatsink and control
card.

ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing No. Text

Motor phase U between the adjustable frequency drive 1300 Option SW in slot B is too old
and the motor is missing. 1302 Option SW in slot C1 is too old
Remove power from the adjustable frequency drive and 1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed)
check motor phase U. 1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
allowed)
Motor phase V between the adjustable frequency drive
1379-2819 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or
and the motor is missing.
Danfoss Service Department
Remove power from the adjustable frequency drive and 1792 HW reset of DSP
check motor phase V. 1793 Motor-derived parameters not transferred correctly
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing to DSP
Motor phase W between the adjustable frequency drive 1794 Power data not transferred correctly at power-up
and the motor is missing. to DSP
Remove power from the adjustable frequency drive and 1795 The DSP has received too many unknown SPI
check motor phase W. messages
1796 RAM copy error
ALARM 33, Soft-charge fault
2561 Replace control card
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
2820 LCP stack overflow
period. Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
2821 Serial port overflow
WARNING/ALARM 34, Serial communication bus 2822 USB port overflow
communication fault
9 9 The serial communication bus on the communication
3072-5122
5123
Parameter value is outside its limits
Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
option card is not working. control board hardware
WARNING/ALARM 36, Line failure 5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to control board hardware
the frequency converter is lost and 14-10 Mains Failure is 5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with
NOT set to [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the control board hardware
frequency converter and mains supply to the unit. 5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with
ALARM 38, Internal fault control board hardware
When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in 5376-6231 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or
Table 9.44 is displayed. Danfoss Service Department
Troubleshooting Table 9.44 Internal Fault Codes

Cycle power
Check that the option is properly installed ALARM 39, Heatsink sensor
No feedback from the heatsink temperature sensor.
Check for loose or missing wiring
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on
It may be necessary to contact your Danfoss supplier or
the power card. The problem could be on the power card,
service department. Note the code number for further
on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the
troubleshooting directions.
power card and gate drive card.
No. Text WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27
0 Serial port cannot be initialized. Contact your Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove short-
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service Department circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
256-258 Power EEPROM data is defective or too old. 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
Replace power card
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29
512-519 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove short-
Danfoss Service Department circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
783 Parameter value outside of min/max limits 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
1024-1284 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or the
Danfoss Service Department.
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old

WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
overload of digital output on X30/7 Contact your Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove Department.
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
Out (MCB 101).
The settings for motor voltage, motor current and motor
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi 1-25.
Out (MCB 101).
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
ALARM 45, Ground fault 2 The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
Ground fault.
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big
Troubleshooting The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.
Check for proper grounding and loose
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
connections.
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
Check for proper wire size.
ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range
Check motor cables for short-circuits or leakage The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
currents. acceptable range. AMA cannot run.
ALARM 46, Power card supply ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
The supply on the power card is out of range. The user has interrupted the AMA.
There are three power supplies generated by the switch ALARM 57, AMA internal fault
mode power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5 V, Try to restart AMA again. Repeated restarts can overheat
±18 V. When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107 the motor. 9 9
option, only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored.
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault
When powered with three-phase AC line voltage, all three
Contact your Danfoss supplier.
supplies are monitored.
WARNING 59, Current limit
Troubleshooting The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
Check for a defective power card.
Ensure that Motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25 are set
Check for a defective control card. correctly. Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that
Check for a defective option card. the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
If a 24 V DC power supply is used, verify proper WARNING 60, External interlock

supply power. A digital input signal is indicating a fault condition external
to the frequency converter. An external interlock has
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the
The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. The external external fault condition. To resume normal operation,
24 V DC backup power supply may be overloaded; apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external
otherwise, contact the Danfoss supplier. interlock. Reset the frequency converter.
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of The output frequency has reached the value set in
allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the application to
control card. Check for a defective control card. If an determine the cause. Possibly increase the output
option card is present, check for an overvoltage condition. frequency limit. Be sure the system can operate safely at a
WARNING 49, Speed limit higher output frequency. The warning will clear when the
When the speed is not within the specified range in output drops below the maximum limit.
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-13 Motor Speed WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
High Limit [RPM], the adjustable frequency drive shows a The cut-out temperature of the control card is 176 °F
warning. When the speed is below the specified limit in [80 °C].
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or
stopping), the adjustable frequency drive trips.

Troubleshooting ALARM 72, Dangerous failure

• Check that the ambient operating temperature is Safe Torque Off with trip lock. An unexpected combination
within limits. of Safe Torque Off commands has occurred:
• Check for clogged filters. • VLT PTC Thermistor Card enables X44/10 but safe
stop is not enabled.
• Check fan operation.
• Check the control card. • MCB 112 is the only device using Safe Torque Off
(specified through selection [4] or [5] in
WARNING 66, Heatsink temperature low 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop), Safe Torque Off is
The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This activated, and X44/10 is not activated.
warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
module. ALARM 80, Drive initialized to default value
Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a Parameter settings are initialized to default settings after a
trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency manual reset. To clear the alarm, reset the unit.
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting ALARM 92, No-Flow
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and 1-80 Function at A no-flow condition has been detected in the system.
Stop 22-23 No-Flow Function is set for alarm. Troubleshoot the
system and reset the adjustable frequency drive after the
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
One or more options have either been added or removed fault has been cleared.
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration ALARM 93, Dry pump
change is intentional and reset the unit. A no-flow condition in the system with the adjustable
frequency drive operating at high speed may indicate a
ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated
9 9 Safe Torque Off has been activated. To resume normal dry pump. 22-26 Dry Pump Function is set for alarm.
operation, apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send a reset Troubleshoot the system and reset the adjustable
signal (via bus, digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]). frequency drive after the fault has been cleared.
ALARM 69, Power card temperature ALARM 94, End of curve

The temperature sensor on the power card is either too Feedback is lower than the setpoint. This may indicate
hot or too cold. leakage in the system. 22-50 End of Curve Function is set for
alarm. Troubleshoot the system and reset the adjustable
Troubleshooting frequency drive after the fault has been cleared.
Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits. ALARM 95, Broken belt
Torque is below the torque level set for no load, indicating
Check for clogged filters. a broken belt. 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set for alarm.
Check fan operation. Troubleshoot the system and reset the adjustable
frequency drive after the fault has been cleared.
Check the power card.
ALARM 96, Start delayed
ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration
Motor start has been delayed due to short-cycle
The control card and power card are incompatible. To
protection. 22-76 Interval between Starts is enabled.
check compatibility, contact your supplier with the type
Troubleshoot the system and reset the adjustable
code of the unit from the nameplate and the part numbers
of the cards.
WARNING 97, Stop delayed
ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop
Stopping the motor has been delayed due to short cycle
Safe Torque Off has been activated from the PTC
protection. 22-76 Interval between Starts is enabled.
Thermistor Card MCB 112 (motor too warm). Normal
Troubleshoot the system and reset the adjustable
operation can be resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V
DC to Terminal 37 again (when the motor temperature
reaches an acceptable level) and when the Digital Input WARNING 98, Clock fault
from the MCB 112 is deactivated. When that happens, a Time is not set or the RTC clock has failed. Reset the clock
reset signal must be sent (via Bus, Digital I/O, or by in 0-70 Date and Time.
pressing [Reset]).

WARNING 200, Fire mode

This warning indicates the adjustable frequency drive is
operating in Fire mode. The warning clears when fire
mode is removed. See the fire mode data in the alarm log.
WARNING 201, Fire Mode was Active
This indicates the adjustable frequency drive had entered
fire mode. Cycle power to the unit to remove the warning.
See the fire mode data in the alarm log.
WARNING 202, Fire mode limits exceeded
While operating in fire mode one or more alarm conditions
have been ignored which would normally trip the unit.
Operating in this condition voids unit warranty. Cycle
power to the unit to remove the warning. See the fire
mode data in the alarm log.
WARNING 203, Missing motor
With an adjustable frequency drive operating multi-motors,
an underload condition was detected. This could indicate a
missing motor. Inspect the system for proper operation.
WARNING 204, Locked rotor
With an adjustable frequency drive operating multi-motors,
an overload condition was detected. This could indicate a
locked rotor. Inspect the motor for proper operation. 9 9
WARNING 250, New spare part
A component in the adjustable frequency drive has been
replaced. Reset the adjustable frequency drive for normal
operation.
WARNING 251, New type code
The power card or other components have been replaced
and the type code changed. Reset to remove the warning
and resume normal operation.

Index Design Guide
Index Braking energy............................................................................... 10, 54

Branch Circuit Protection................................................................ 105
A Break-away torque................................................................................. 9
Abbreviations........................................................................................... 8 Building Management System........................................................ 64
Access to Control Terminals........................................................... 120 Building Management System, BMS............................................. 23
Accessory Bags...................................................................................... 89 Bypass frequency ranges................................................................... 30
Acoustic Noise..................................................................................... 182
Adjustable Frequency Drive Hardware Set-up........................ 146 C
Adjustable Frequency Drive Set-up............................................ 148 Cable clamps....................................................................................... 129
Advanced Vector Control.................................................................. 10 Cable Lengths and Cross-sections............................................... 176
Aggressive Environments.................................................................. 14 Caution..................................................................................................... 13
Air Humidity........................................................................................... 14 CAV system............................................................................................. 29
Alarm Words........................................................................................ 196 CE Conformity and Labeling............................................................. 13
Alarm/Warning Code List................................................................ 194 Central VAV systems............................................................................ 28
Alarms and Warnings....................................................................... 192 Clockwise rotation............................................................................. 118
AMA............................................................................ 134, 136, 200, 203 Closed-loop Control for a Ventilation System............................ 43
Analog I/O option MCB 109.............................................................. 64 CO2 sensor.............................................................................................. 29
Analog I/O selection............................................................................ 64 Coasting................................................................................... 9, 163, 164
Analog input........................................................................................ 199 Communication option................................................................... 202
Analog inputs.................................................................................. 9, 177 Comparison of Energy Savings........................................................ 23
Analog Inputs......................................................................................... 10 Condenser Pumps................................................................................ 32
Analog output..................................................................................... 178 Conducted emission................................................................. 48, 0
Analog Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8............................................. 60 Constant Air Volume........................................................................... 29
Analog signal....................................................................................... 199 Constant torque applications (CT mode).................................. 191
Analog Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12............................. 60 Control cables............................................................................ 129, 132
Application Examples......................................................................... 27 Control Cables..................................................................................... 124
Automatic Adaptations to Ensure Performance..................... 190 Control card......................................................................................... 199
Automatic Motor Adaptation............................................................. 3 Control Card performance.............................................................. 180
Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).......................................... 134 Control card, 10 V DC output......................................................... 179
AWG........................................................................................................ 167 Control Card, 24 V DC output........................................................ 178
Control card, RS-485 serial communication............................. 178
B Control card, USB serial communication................................... 180
BACnet...................................................................................................... 76 Control characteristics..................................................................... 179
Balancing contractor........................................................................... 33 Control potential.................................................................................. 35
Basic Wiring Example....................................................................... 123 Control Structure Closed-loop......................................................... 39
Battery backup of clock function.................................................... 64 Control Structure Open-loop........................................................... 36
Better Control........................................................................................ 24 Control Terminals..................................................................... 121, 122
Brake Function....................................................................................... 54 Control word........................................................................................ 163
Brake Resistor......................................................................................... 53 Cooling................................................................................................... 191
Brake Resistor Cabling........................................................................ 55 Cooling conditions............................................................................... 90
Brake Resistor Calculation................................................................. 54 Cooling Tower Fan............................................................................... 30
Brake Resistors....................................................................................... 84 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights.............. 7
Braking................................................................................................... 201 Cos φ Compensation........................................................................... 25

Index Design Guide
Current rating...................................................................................... 199 Extreme Running Conditions........................................................... 55
D F
Dampers................................................................................................... 28 Fan System Controlled by Adjustable Frequency Drives....... 27
Data Types Supported by the Adjustable Frequency Drive....... FC with Modbus RTU........................................................................ 147
152
Feedback..................................................................................... 202, 204
DC brake................................................................................................ 163
Flow meter.............................................................................................. 33
DC Bus Connection............................................................................ 126
Freeze output........................................................................................... 9
DC link.................................................................................................... 199
Front cover tightening torque......................................................... 88
Decoupling plate.................................................................................. 97
Function Codes................................................................................... 158
Definitions................................................................................................. 9
Fuses.............................................................................................. 105, 202
Derating for Ambient Temperature............................................ 186
Derating for Low Air Pressure........................................................ 191 G
Derating for Running at Low Speed............................................ 191 General Aspects of Harmonics Emission...................................... 49
DeviceNet................................................................................................ 76 General Specifications...................................................................... 176
Differential pressure............................................................................ 35 Ground leakage current................................................................... 128
Digital input......................................................................................... 200 Ground loops....................................................................................... 132
Digital inputs....................................................................................... 177 Grounding..................................................................................... 97, 127
Digital Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4.................................................... 60
Digital Output..................................................................................... 178 H
Digital Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7................................................ 60 Harmonic filters..................................................................................... 78
Direction of motor rotation............................................................ 118 Harmonics Emission Requirements............................................... 50
Discharge Time...................................................................................... 13 Harmonics Test Results (Emission)................................................. 50
Disposal Instruction............................................................................. 13 High Voltage Test............................................................................... 127
Drive Configurator............................................................................... 73 Hold output frequency.................................................................... 163
DU/dt filters............................................................................................ 72
I
E I/Os for setpoint inputs....................................................................... 64
Efficiency............................................................................................... 181 IGVs............................................................................................................ 28
Electrical Installation............................................................... 122, 124 Immunity Requirements.................................................................... 50
Electrical Installation - EMC Precautions.................................... 129 Index (IND)............................................................................................ 151
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.............................................................. 14 Input terminal...................................................................................... 199
EMC emissions....................................................................................... 46 Installation at high altitudes............................................................. 12
EMC Precautions................................................................................ 147 Installation of 24 V external DC Supply...................................... 121
EMC Test Results................................................................................... 47 Intermediate circuit.................................................................... 55, 182
EMC-Compatible Cables.................................................................. 131 IP21/IP41/ TYPE1 Enclosure Kit........................................................ 70
Emission Requirements...................................................................... 47 IP21/Type 1 Enclosure Kit.................................................................. 70
Energy Savings............................................................................... 23, 24 IT line power........................................................................................ 133
ETR........................................................................................................... 118
Evaporator flow rate............................................................................ 33 J
Example of Closed-loop PID Control............................................. 43 Jog....................................................................................................... 9, 164
Extended Status Word...................................................................... 198
Extended Status Word 2.................................................................. 198 K
External 24 V DC supply..................................................................... 63 Knockouts................................................................................................ 94

Index Design Guide
L N
Laws of proportionality...................................................................... 23 Nameplate data.................................................................................. 133
LCP........................................................................................... 9, 10, 39, 69 Network Connection......................................................................... 145
Lead Pump Alternation Wiring Diagram................................... 142 Ni1000 temperature sensor.............................................................. 65
Line Drop-out......................................................................................... 55 Non-shielded/armored.................................................................... 125
Line Power Disconnectors.............................................................. 114
Line power supply................................................................................ 11 O
Line Power Supply.................................................................... 167, 171 Option....................................................................................................... 61
Literature.................................................................................................... 7 Options and Accessories.................................................................... 58
Load Sharing........................................................................................ 126 Ordering numbers................................................................................ 73
Local (Hand On) and Remote (Auto On) Control...................... 39 Ordering Numbers:......................................................... 81, 82, 83, 84
Local speed determination............................................................... 33 Ordering Numbers: Harmonic Filters............................................ 78
Low evaporator temperature........................................................... 33 Ordering Numbers: Options and Accessories............................ 75
Output current.................................................................................... 199
M Output Filters......................................................................................... 72
Manual PID Adjustment..................................................................... 45 Output Performance (U, V, W)....................................................... 176
MCT 31................................................................................................... 127 Outputs for servos................................................................................ 64
Mechanical Dimensions..................................................................... 86
Mechanical Mounting......................................................................... 90 P
Message Length (LGE)...................................................................... 148 Parameter Number (PNU)............................................................... 151
Modbus Communication................................................................ 146 Parameter Values............................................................................... 159
Modbus Exception Codes............................................................... 158 Payback period...................................................................................... 24
Modbus RTU......................................................................................... 154 Peak Voltage on Motor.................................................................... 182
Moment of inertia................................................................................. 55 Phase loss.............................................................................................. 199
Motor Cable......................................................................................... 115 Potentiometer Reference................................................................ 136
Motor cables........................................................................................ 129 Power Factor.......................................................................................... 11
Motor Connection................................................................................ 97 Power factor correction...................................................................... 25
Motor current...................................................................................... 203 Primary Pumps...................................................................................... 33
Motor data.................................................................................. 200, 203 Principle Diagram................................................................................. 64
Motor nameplate............................................................................... 133 Profibus.................................................................................................... 76
Motor output....................................................................................... 176 Programmable minimum frequency setting.............................. 30
Motor parameters.............................................................................. 136 Programming...................................................................................... 199
Motor phases......................................................................................... 55 Programming Order............................................................................ 44
Motor power........................................................................................ 203 Protection......................................................................................... 15, 51
Motor protection...................................................................... 118, 181 Protection and features................................................................... 181
Motor Rotation.................................................................................... 118 Protocol Overview............................................................................. 147
Motor thermal protection............................................................... 165 Pt1000 temperature sensor.............................................................. 65
Motor Thermal Protection....................................................... 56, 115 Public supply network........................................................................ 50
Motor voltage...................................................................................... 182 Pulse Inputs.......................................................................................... 178
Motor-generated Overvoltage........................................................ 55 Pulse Start/Stop.................................................................................. 135
Multiple pumps..................................................................................... 35 Pump impeller....................................................................................... 32
Multi-zone control................................................................................ 64

Index Design Guide
Static Overload in VVCplus Mode................................................... 55

R Status Word.......................................................................................... 164
Radiated emission...................................................................... 48, 0 Supply voltage.................................................................................... 202
Rated motor speed................................................................................. 9 Surroundings:...................................................................................... 180
RCD............................................................................................................ 10 Switches S201, S202, and S801..................................................... 122
Read Holding Registers (03 HEX).................................................. 161 Switching on the Output................................................................... 55
Real time clock (RTC)........................................................................... 65 System Status and Operation........................................................ 141
Reference Handling............................................................................. 42
Relay Connection............................................................................... 104 T
Relay Option........................................................................................... 61 The Clear Advantage - Energy Savings......................................... 22
Relay Outputs...................................................................................... 179 The EMC directive (2004/108/EC)................................................... 13
Reset.............................................................................................. 199, 204 The low-voltage directive (2006/95/EC)....................................... 13
Residual Current Device.................................................................. 133 The machinery directive (2006/42/EC)......................................... 13
Return fan................................................................................................ 28 Thermal Protection................................................................................. 8
RFI Switch.............................................................................................. 133 Thermistor............................................................................................... 11
Rise time................................................................................................ 182 Throttling valve..................................................................................... 32
RS-485.................................................................................................... 145 Torque Characteristics..................................................................... 176
Transmitter/sensor inputs................................................................. 64
S Troubleshooting................................................................................. 192
Safe Torque Off...................................................................................... 15 Tuning the Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop Control-
Safety Ground Connection............................................................. 128 ler...... 45
Safety Note............................................................................................. 12 Type Code String Low and Medium Power................................ 74
Safety Regulations............................................................................... 12
Safety requirements............................................................................ 85
U
USB Connection.................................................................................. 121
Secondary Pumps................................................................................. 35
Serial communication............................................................. 132, 180
V
Serial communication bus connection...................................... 120
Variable (quadratic) torque applications (VT).......................... 191
Serial communication port.................................................................. 9
Variable Air Volume............................................................................. 28
Shielded Control Cables.................................................................. 132
Variable control of flow and pressure........................................... 24
Shielded/armored................................................................................ 97
Varying Flow over 1 Year................................................................... 24
Shock......................................................................................................... 15
VAV............................................................................................................ 28
Short circuit.......................................................................................... 200
Vibration.................................................................................................. 15
Short Circuit (Motor Phase – Phase).............................................. 55
Vibrations................................................................................................ 30
Side-by-side installation..................................................................... 90
Voltage imbalance............................................................................. 199
Sine-wave filter...................................................................................... 99
Voltage level........................................................................................ 177
Sine-wave filters.................................................................................... 72
VVCplus)................................................................................................... 11
Smart Logic Control.......................................................................... 136
Smart Logic Control Programming............................................. 137
W
Soft-starter.............................................................................................. 25
Warning against unintended start................................................. 12
Software Version..................................................................................... 7
Warning Words................................................................................... 197
Software versions................................................................................. 76
What is CE Conformity and Labeling?........................................... 13
Star/Delta Starter.................................................................................. 25
Start/Stop.............................................................................................. 135
Start/Stop Conditions....................................................................... 144

Danfoss shall not be responsible for any errors in catalogs, brochures or other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products at any time without notice, provided that alterations to
products already on order shall not require material changes in specifications previously agreed upon by Danfoss and the Purchaser. All trademarks in this material are property of the respective
companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.
Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
130R0084 MG11BC22 Rev. 06/2014
*MG11BC22*

Manual Danfoss

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Danfoss

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Danfoss

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

1 How to Read this Design Guide 7

2 Introduction to VLT® HVAC Drive 12

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

6.5.6 Basic Wiring Example 123

7 Application Examples 135

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved.

8 Installation and Set-up 145

Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

8.8.10 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU 158

9 General Specifications and Troubleshooting 166

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved.

9.7.2 Warning Words 197

Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

15-43 Software Version. • The Programming Guide provides information on

This publication contains information proprietary to

• VLT® HVAC Drive Metasys, Instruction Manual.

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 7

WARNING Local Control Panel

NOTICE! Nominal motor frequency fM,N

Table 1.3 Abbreviations

8 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

Control command Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset

Table 1.4 Function Groups ηVLT

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 9

10 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 11

2 Introduction to VLT® HVAC Drive

WARNING sure that all voltage inputs have been discon-

12 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

2.1.2 Caution 2.2 CE Labeling

The adjustable frequency drive is most often used by

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 13

However, CE labeling may cover many different specifi-

Degree of protection as per IEC 60529

14 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 15

Safe Torque Off Technical Data Abbrev. Ref. Description

Reaction time for T37 FIT Failure In Time: 1E-9 hours

16 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

Liability Conditions Safe Torque Off Installation and Set-up

• This function is suitable for performing

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 17

Safe Torque Off Commissioning Test

FC that short circuit in the wiring to T37 can be excluded.

18 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

Paralleling of Safe Torque Off inputs via one safety relay FC

since a fault in one adjustable frequency drive might result

Figure 2.6 Paralleling of Multiple Adjustable Frequency

FC 3 1. Activate the Safe Torque Off function by

Figure 2.5 STO Category 4 Example

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 19

The Safe Torque Off function can be set to an Automatic

20 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. MG11BC22

PTC Thermistor Card

This is only allowed in the following cases:

12100-2 2003 must be observed.

Parameter settings for external safety device in NOTICE!

MG11BC22 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 06/2014 All rights reserved. 21